You are on page 1of 180

Industrial Control &

Circuit Breakers

Section C

Innovative, intelligent NEC and IEC solutions safely and efficiently control power and protect
circuits in explosive, wet, and corrosive environments worldwide.

New Products in the Control Product Line

Section

• EMN Series Pushbutton Style Compact Manual NEMA Starters

2C

• EMN Series Pushbutton Style Compact Manual IEC Starters

2C

• GUSC Enclosures with Manual Motor Starters

2C

• XLC Explosionproof Lighting Contactors

5C

• DSD-TS Series Timers

5C

• ACE20 Series Explosionproof Variable Frequency Drives

6C

• Engineered Solutions

7C

C

Industrial Control and Circuit Breakers
Table of Contents

Section C of the Eaton's Crouse-Hinds Product Catalog lists motor control, circuit breakers, variable frequency drives, and engineered
solutions and switch racks. Information on application, features, standard materials, standard finishes, size ranges, compliances, options, and
accessories are presented for ease of product selection.
Information relating to product families in Section C is grouped as follows:

Section 1C

Section 5C

Combination Motor Starters

Specialty Control Stations

(for hazardous and non-hazardous areas)

(for hazardous and non-hazardous areas)
For means of remote and local motor control, visual indicators and
circuit control and selection. Offers a selection of push buttons,
pilot lights, selector switches.

C

Combination magnetic line starters and enclosures for across-theline motor starting, motor disconnect, motor and line protection,
and start-stop operations.
For hazardous areas
EBMC
EPC

EJB Custom Control Panels
EMP / EMPS
EGL
AFU / AFUX

For non-hazardous areas
NMC

AFA / AFAX
D2X
EGF
XLC
DSD-TS

Section 2C

Section 6C

Motor Starters

Explosionproof Variable Frequency Drives
(for hazardous areas)
Highly flexible AC drives designed specifically for hazardous area
locations. These drives can be mounted next to the motor in the
classified area, providing significant installation cost savings - along
with the traditional VFD benefits of energy savings, speed and
torque control, and system diagnostics.
ACE

(for hazardous and non-hazardous areas)
Line starters and enclosures for manual and magnetic across-theline starting of motors, motor protection, and remote and manual
starting and stopping.
Magnetic starters

Manual starters

EBMS
EPC
NMG

EFD
EDS
EMN
MC
EMN

GHG
NSSC
NFSC
NMN
GUSC

Section 7C
Engineered Solutions
(for hazardous and non-hazardous areas)
For motor control centers in outdoor and/or hazardous areas.

Section 3C
Circuit Breakers

For hazardous areas
ERK
DRK

(for hazardous and non-hazardous areas)
For use in conjunction with a variety of heating, lighting, and power
circuits to provide disconnect means and short circuit protection.
For hazardous areas

For non-hazardous areas

EBMB
EFD
EPC
EIB
FLB

NCB

Section 4C
Traditional Control Stations
(for hazardous and non-hazardous areas)
For means of remote and local motor control, visual indicators and
circuit control and selection. Offers a selection of pushbuttons,
pilot lights, and selector switches.
For hazardous areas
FlexStation
GHG43
EDS / EDSC
N2SU / N2SCU
EDSCM
N2FA / N2FAC
DSD / DSD-SR
N2S / N2SC
EDS
EFS
MC / MCC
OAC

444

www.crouse-hinds.com

For non-hazardous areas
MC

US: 1-866-764-5454

CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business

For non-hazardous areas
WRK

1C

Combination Motor Starters
Hazardous and Non-hazardous Areas

Description

Page No.

Application/Selection

see page 446

Combination Line Starters and Enclosures
Single speed, non-reversing, with circuit breakers
& disconnect switches
EBMC Series

see page 447

EPC Series

see page 454

NMC Nonmetallic Series

see page 458

www.crouse-hinds.com

EBMC Series

see page 453

EPC Series

see page 457

US: 1-866-764-5454

CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business

445

1C

Single speed, non-reversing, with
motor circuit protectors

E. 1 & 2. Groups E. Div. Square D Cutler-Hammer G. 1. 2.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business . G II. Quick Selector Chart Enclosures for Combination Motor Starters NEMA/ EEMAC Starters Manufacturers Equipment Enclosed NEC/CEC – Hazardous Area Certifications and Compliance NEMA/EEMAC Enclosure Type Single Speed Non-Reversing Starter Breaker/Switch Cover Type EBMC Cl. 12 0–5 Allen-Bradley G.E. Div. G II. 4. Cl. 4*. 1 & 2. Div. Groups F. Groups F. Cl. Square D Cutler-Hammer Bolted/Ground Joint/Gasketed EPC Cl. and are used for: • Across-the-line starting of polyphase AC induction motors • Providing disconnect means • Branch circuit protection • Motor running protection • Remote starting and stopping • Standard material on EBMC and EPC Series is copper-free aluminum with natural finish • EBMC and EPC optional finish is Corro-free™ epoxy for use in exceptionally corrosive atmospheres • Standard material on NMC Series is Krydon® high impact fiberglass-reinforced polyester. Cl. Many are available in kit form for field addition to existing units. Cl. Div. 12 0–3 Allen-Bradley G. 7CD.E. 2. F. 1. Groups E. Square D Cutler-Hammer Gasketed Enclosures *Without EMP control devices 446 www. 9EFG.E. Cl. providing excellent corrosion resistance and stability to heat Options and Accessories: 1C Considerations for Selection: Considerations for selection of proper enclosure: • The environment of the enclosure location in accordance with NEC/CEC and NEMA/EEMAC requirements • The characteristics of the starter and breaker to be enclosed • See "Quick-Selector" below for guidance Some of the options and accessories available for particular applications are: • Push buttons • Selector switches • Control transformers • Extra overload relays • Extra interlock contacts • Neutral connectors (both insulated and grounded) • Breathers and drains See individual listings for specific options. C. Square D Cutler-Hammer G.E.E. Groups B. I. 4X. Cl. I. D II.1C Combination Motor Starters Application and Quick Selector Chart Applications: Materials and Finishes: Combination line starters are housed in enclosures suitable for specific environments. Div. Div. G III 3. Square D Cutler-Hammer Threaded NMC — 3. G III 3. D II. 12 0–4 Allen-Bradley G. F. 7BCD. 9EFG. Square D Cutler-Hammer G. Groups C.crouse-hinds.

straightforward installation of breaker and starter on predrilled mounting plate within enclosure. 1 & 2. D Cl. 7BCD. 12 Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight 1C Applications: Interior components are readily accessible with ample end room for wiring Features: • Rugged. F. 1.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 447 . C. G Cl.000 480 50. C. Div. Groups E.000 600 25. G Class III • UL Standards UL1203 – Hazardous (classified) locations • UL Subject 2062 . 250. Stainless steel springs provide clear indication cover bolts are fully retracted from body • Versatile. 4X††. speed changing and reversing of polyphase AC induction motors • To provide line disconnect means and short circuit protection • To provide motor overload and undervoltage protection • For service entrance. 150. heating. Removable reducers are supplied. 3R. dusty hazardous locations without the need for a protective shelter • In areas where frequent washdowns are necessary or where heavy rain or water spray is prevalent • For across-the-line starting. Groups B. stopping. Division 2. II. 1C Spectrum™ EBM hinged cover motor control enclosures are used: • For general motor control and circuit protection – indoors and outdoors – in damp.000 • CSA Standard: C22. 9EFG. Standard Materials: • • • • • Body and cover – copper-free aluminum Operating handle – copper-free aluminum Operating shafts and bushings – stainless steel Cover bolts.High AIC rating (Interrupting Capacity) For Groups C & D only Volt RMS Symm-Amperes 240 65. • Circuit breaker motor circuit protector external operating handle can be padlocked in either "ON" or "OFF" positions • Neoprene cover gasket permanently attached to the cover seals out moisture • Bodies have top and bottom drilled and tapped entrances for power conduits plus one at the bottom for control conduit. Mounting plate also field removable. hinges. 225. G Cl. G Class II. 400. captive. 4‡. 600. • Tap-on mounting feet • Optional EMPS control devices may be added to enclosure cover • Steel bracket for lifting larger enclosures during installation supplied as standard *National Electrical Code is a Registered Trademark of the National Fire Protection Association. as standard. Groups F. wet. 250. washer and retractile springs – stainless steel Interior parts – sheet steel. to accommodate smaller size conduits. Division 1. 1000† ampere frame sizes • Motor circuit protectors – 150. electrogalvanized Electrical Rating Range: • Motor starters – NEMA/EEMAC sizes 0-5 • Circuit breakers – 100.2 No. dirty.EBMC Combination Line Starters and Enclosures Cl. ††With S752 or S753. 9EFG. with an external flanged ground joint between body and cover makes interior components more accessible • Minimum enclosure-to-enclosure spacing with little interference between the opened cover and an adjacent enclosure • Stainless steel hinges allow the cover to swing well out of the way • Stainless steel. 2. 4X††. Groups E. 400 ampere frame sizes † 1000 Ampere Frame (max. II. Groups F. 4‡. All conduit entrances are plugged. 7BCD. D Class II. internal operating mechanisms allow for field adjustment to accommodate popular manufacturers' starters and breakers • Simple.4 of 1%) • Component operating handles located through the right side wall of the body permits visual confirmation of correct component assembly and operation • Total compliance to the wiring end room requirements of the National Electrical Code*/Canadian Electrical Code • Semi-clamshell enclosure design. F. 800 ampere trip) www. 12 ‡Enclosure not suitable for NEMA 4 or 4X with cover mounted operators. Div. 3R. appliance and motor circuits • On switchracks or other assemblies where it's desired that motor control be centrally located Side operators leave cover free for control options Certifications and Compliances: • NEC/CEC: Class I. 800. Groups B. 30 • NEMA/EEMAC: 3. I.crouse-hinds. corrosion resistant. feeder or branch circuit protection for lighting. hex head cover bolts. III NEMA 3. quick release. cast copper-free aluminum construction (less than 0. Division 1 & 2. Div.

......... coil 120VAC........... ➀ CL • Less overload relays (motor contactor)........ # Suffix • Ambient compensated circuit breaker trip setting .. J3.O................ Details on specific makes and sizes on request............ ➁ • Auxiliary switch on Circuit Breaker 2A and 2B contacts .........................O............................................................. or 1 starters necessitates using the larger "D" size enclosure.............. 2....... ➀ RR2‡ • Hand-Off-Auto selector switch .......... Div........... When specifying any one of the following options with Spectrum™ EBM Motor Controls (J1............................ breather & drain.....O.............. Class I.......... Breather and drain entries must be plugged for NEMA 4 rating............. ➀ S753 • Additional control contacts...... 50 / 60 Hertz....C & D............................... F & G.... 480 Volt......................C....com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business ...................... Class I.. ‡Enclosure not suitable for NEMA 4 or 4X with cover mounted operators..... red jewel. ➀ R11 • Space heater........EBMC Combination Line Starters and Enclosures 1C Options: The following options are available from the factory by adding suffix to catalog number – suffixes are added alphanumerically................................ 5 600/480/240–120..C.................... ➀ S786 • General purpose control relay... & 2 N...................... F...... ➀ R22 • Space heater.... Groups E... ➁ S782 Auxiliary contacts on starter 3 N......................... 120VAC........................... with provision for fusing both primary leads and one secondary lead (fuses not provided) ... non-reversing starters only (number limited by design of starter...... Class II.... 4X††... with provision for fusing both primary leads and one secondary lead (fuses not provided) .... ➀ CM • Control Circuit Transformer...... ➀ FTPS300 • Pilot light............................. ➀ J1 • Pilot light..O...................C....... – for single speed. ➀ LED • Less heaters in starter overload relay...... 100VA for NEMA/EEMAC sizes 0–2............... 9EFG..... with provision for fusing both primary leads and one secondary lead (fuses not provided) ........... Class III ...... B. 3R. 50 / 60 hertz ................. Groups F..................... 25 Watts ... N.... 1C ➁ Options in this position are modifications to the starter and/or circuit breaker and should be listed alphanumerically........... ➀ RR3‡ • Space heater..... I.... ➀ S1 • Insulated neutral w/2 connectors .......... RR3) it is necessary to order DSL Legend Plates for identification and marking of the device(s) being used. ➀ J3 • LED pilot lights (in place of standard incandescent lamps) . 25 Watts .. ➀ S787* *Use of this option with NEMA/EEMAC Size 0................ 1.......... D Cl.... PB23.........................C & D....... ➁ S781 Auxiliary contacts on starter 2 N...... 50 / 60 Hertz.................... Div. 25 Watts ...... Cl... ➁ AC • Less overload relays (lighting contactor)............. 200VA for NEMA/EEMAC size 3............... w/blank indicating plate .... w/blank indicating plate .................................. 12 Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight Position Description in Cat...... 7BCD..................... ➀ FTPS100 • Control Circuit Transformer.. E... C.............................. B.. RR2.... contacts rated 10A@600V............. ➀ R44 • Automatic reset overload relay ................. drain... ➁ S783 • Auxiliary switch on Circuit Breaker 1A and 1B S784 contacts ....... Div...... ➀ S752 • Internal and external epoxy finish .. ➀ FTPS200 • Control Circuit Transformer......... 4 pole N................ 120VAC.. 240 Volt... Class III .......... Class II................... ➀ S756‡ • Std. ➀ S146 • Std.... ➁ S785 • 12 Point term.crouse-hinds....... II..... Groups B..... ➀ S756V‡ • External epoxy finish ............... G Cl... green jewel....... ††With S752 or S753.... F & G..........O...... & 1 N.. 300V........ 1 & 2.. & 3 N............ G Cl............ 4‡. 120 Volt......... 600/480/240–120.............. III NEMA 3.............. ➁ 0 • Start-Stop pushbuttons (requires 2 spaces)........................... 50 / 60 Hertz.. ➀ PB23‡ • On-Off selector switch ..... E.. Catalog Number System Example EBMC1FB-➀-DT30FAL36-W643-➁ ➀ Options in this position are additions to the enclosure itself and should be listed alphanumerically........... II..... 600/480/240–120...........) Auxiliary contacts on starter 1 N. EBMC Series motor control enclosures with combination line starters............................ 300VA for NEMA/EEMAC size 4. or N............ block – 30 Amp.................................. 448 www......C..

9EFG. 2. Stop DSL16 DSL01 DSL02 DSL21 DSL23 DSL17 Blank with 2 fields For-Rev Hand-Auto In-Out Off-On Open-Close DSL03 DSL30 DSL29 DSL35 DSL48 DSL32 Fast Forward Hand In Jog Lower DSL46 DSL18 DSL15 DSL24 DSL10 DSL27 Raise-Lower Run-Jog Safe-Run Start-Stop Slow-Fast Up-Down DSL36 DSL28 DSL86 DSL37 DSL65 DSL33 On Off Open Out Power On Raise DSL07 DSL08 DSL20 DSL25 DSL14 DSL26 Three Function Legend Plates Reset Reverse Run Safe Slow Start DSL12 DSL19 DSL09 DSL85 DSL47 DSL05 Stop Test Trip Up DSL06 DSL13 DSL11 DSL22 Marking Cat.EBMC Combination Line Starters and Enclosures Cl. G Cl. F. all others are stamped. C. # Marking Cat. Single Function Legend Plates Background color for all legend plates is black with the following exceptions: Two Function Legend Plates Cat. III NEMA 3. D Cl. 12 1C Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight Options: • If desired. DSL16) immediately after optional device in the EBM Catalog Number. • If EMP devices are to be added in the field. 3R. Div. • Insert Legend Plate(s) Catalog Number (i. Groups E. Groups F. 1 & 2. www. II. DSL Legend Plates must be ordered separately as they are not furnished with the EMP/EMPS devices. ††With S752 or S753. Example: EBMC1FB-J1-DSL14-J3-DSL09-DT30FAL36-W643 Use the charts below to select the appropriate legend plate(s) for your application. Markings shown in bold print are etched. I. Select from the list of standard markings below. Div. 4‡. # Automatic Blank Blank with single field Close Down Emerg. 4X††. markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number. Stop Plate Color Green Red Red 1C Marking ‡Enclosure not suitable for NEMA 4 or 4X with cover mounted operators. 1. 7BCD. # Auto-Off-Hand Blank with 3 fields Fast-Off-Slow For-Off-Rev Hand-Off-Auto Run-Off-Jog DSL49 DSL04 DSL41 DSL40 DSL39 DSL38 Open-Off-Close Raise-Off-Lower Slow-Off-Fast Up-Off-Down 1-Off-2 DSL43 DSL87 DSL88 DSL44 DSL42 Marking Start Stop Emerg.e.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 449 . Div. Groups B.crouse-hinds. II. G Cl.

7BCD. §Use EBMCFD enclosure when LVR1 or S787 options are ordered with Size 0 or 1 combination starters.03 12.00 17.13 10.50 42. ‡Enclosure not suitable for NEMA 4 or 4X with cover mounted operators. C.) J** Conduit Entry Trade Size D&T✪ w/RE Enclosure Enclosure Only Size Cat. III NEMA 3.5" 4. ✪Drilled & Tapped.65 12. (All conduit entrances supplied with RE reducer and PLG plug.78 12.00 13.25 3.65 6.50 36. Groups F. 1 & 2.13 3" 2.94 11. F.75 26.66 — — — 34. 2. 12 Dimensions (In inches)† Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight Dimensions 1C In Inches: *1" Conduit entrance for control conductors (top & bottom).90 21.13 2" Size 2 FVNR combination line starter EBMCFD D 28. not for construction purposes. 9EFG.00 Size 3 FVNR combination line starter EBMCFG■ G 38.5" 3.28 12.1C EBMC Combination Line Starters and Enclosures Cl.25 3.5" 3.25 — — 22.25 27. II.5" 2.88 Size 5 FVNR combination line starter EBMCFM M 64.00 (2) 4" (2) 3. G Cl.03 14.90 6. 1 FVNR combination line starter§ EBMCFB B 25.78 — — 19. Groups E. Groups B.97 4.00 10.80 (2) 3" EBMCFL L 53.12 41.50 39. 4X††.46 12. II.13 10.28 6.50 13.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business L M .40 6.5" (2) 3.crouse-hinds.75 24.65 20.00 13.78 12.50 38. 1. Div.00 3. Div.25 3. ■For Cutler-Hammer W200 Advantage® starters.00 17.03 41.65 16. # Symbol A B C D Size 0.25 3.08 15.58 15.40 34. I. 450 www.50 18.00 EBMCFH H 37.67 12.75 Size 4 FVNR combination line starter EBMCFK■ K 43.00 (2) 4" (2) 2.03 41.5" 3.46 †Dimensions are approximate.50 64.03 14.50 18.13 3" 14.25 29.06 33.47 51.13 10.25 — — 24.65 13.50 13. **Conduit entrance for power conductors (top & bottom).00 17.00 3. ††With S752 or S753.90 20. 4‡.00 E F G K N O P 1.40 29.5" 3.54 3" 2.25 — 3. G Cl. D Cl. 3R.50 53.50 13.13 36.22 62.25 3. Div.03 14.

FDB TED. FDB EBMCFD EBMCFD EBMCFD EBMC2FD ➀70➁32 ➂623 EBMC2FD ➀70➁34 ➂623 EBMC2FD ➀70➁36 ➂623 15 15 15 480 480 600 2 2 2 40 40 40 480 600 600 TED. FDB EBMCFD EBMCFD EBMCFD EBMC2FD ➀50➁32 ➂623 EBMC2FD ➀50➁34 ➂623 EBMC2FD ➀50➁36 ➂623 15 15 15 240 240 240 2 2 2 70 70 70 240 480 600 TEB TED. For Combination starters with motor circuit protectors for single speed.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 451 . 600VAC Maximum Ordering Information: To order an enclosure complete with starter and breaker. RPM. # § 1C Max. G Cl. Enclosures only can be ordered. 120V coil standard with FTPS option. Ex. 9EFG. FDB EBMCFH EBMCFH EBMCFH EBMC3FH ➀70➁34 ➂643 EBMC3FH ➀70➁36 ➂643 EBMC3FH ➀70➁36 ➂663 With Breaker & Starter Cat. 4‡. 1C Instantaneous magnetic trip circuit breakers (magnetic circuit interrupters) can be supplied. HP Polyphase Enclosure Without Breaker & Starter Cat. www. 1. Groups B. insert the manufacturer's symbols in the designated positions of the catalog number. To include a 120V coil. No. FDB TED. II. EHD TED. G Cl.crouse-hinds. EHD TED. EHD TED. FDB EBMCFD EBMCFD EBMCFD EBMC2FD ➀50➁34 ➂643 EBMC2FD ➀50➁36 ➂643 EBMC2FD ➀50➁36 ➂663 25 25 25 480 480 600 2 2 2 70 70 70 480 600 600 TED. EHD TED. FDB EBMCFD EBMCFD EBMCFD EBMC2FD ➀40➁34 ➂643 EBMC2FD ➀40➁36 ➂643 EBMC2FD ➀40➁36 ➂663 20 20 20 480 480 600 2 2 2 50 50 50 480 600 600 TED. non-reversing motors see page 453. type and full load ampere rating of motor – or specify ampere rating of heaters. Div. Motor Starter Select the complete Cat.EBMC Combination Line Starters and Enclosures Cl. FDB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMC0FB ➀30➁32 ➂613 EBMC0FB ➀30➁34 ➂613 EBMC0FB ➀30➁36 ➂613 3 3 3 240 240 240 0 0 0 20 20 20 240 480 600 TEB TED. FDB TED. 12 Single-Speed Non-Reversing with Circuit Breakers 3-Pole 60 hertz. Groups E. I. 4X††. when heater ratings are fully specified. C. 3R. FDB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMC1FB ➀50➁32 ➂623 EBMC1FB ➀50➁34 ➂623 EBMC1FB ➀50➁36 ➂623 10 10 10 480 480 600 1 1 1 30 30 30 480 600 600 TED. II. D Cl. FDB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMC0FB ➀15➁34 ➂643 EBMC0FB ➀15➁36 ➂643 EBMC0FB ➀15➁36 ➂663 5 5 5 240 240 240 1 1 1 30 30 30 240 480 600 TEB TED. 2. §Starters are furnished with 3 heaters. Div. FDB TED. EHD TED. EHD TED. 1 & 2. EHD TED. frequency. EHD TED. FDB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMC1FB ➀30➁34 ➂643 EBMC1FB ➀30➁36 ➂643 EBMC1FB ➀30➁36 ➂663 10 10 10 240 240 240 2 2 2 50 50 50 240 480 600 TEB TED. Div. ††With S752 or S753. EBMC0FB-➀30➁32-➂613 becomes EBMC0FB-➀30➁32-➂6113 ‡Enclosure not suitable for NEMA 4 or 4X with cover mounted operators. FDB TED. EHD TED. Consult factory. III NEMA 3. # See page 452 for configurable options. voltage. Circuit Breaker Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight Line Volts NEMA Size Amp Rating Frame Volts Frame Types 2 2 2 120 120 120 0 0 0 30 30 30 240 480 600 TEB TED. FDB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMC0FB ➀20➁32 ➂623 EBMC0FB ➀20➁34 ➂623 EBMC0FB ➀20➁36 ➂623 5 5 5 480 480 600 0 0 0 15 15 15 480 600 600 TED. EHD TED. Select from listings below. FDB EBMCFD EBMCFD EBMCFD EBMC2FD ➀70➁34 ➂643 EBMC2FD ➀70➁36 ➂643 EBMC2FD ➀70➁36 ➂663 20 25 30 240 240 240 3 3 3 90 100 125 240 240 480 TEB TEB TED EBMCFH EBMCFH EBMCFH EBMC3FH ➀90➁32 ➂623 EBMC3FH ➀100➁32 ➂623 EBMC3FH ➀125➁34 ➂623 30 30 30 ➀➁➂ 480 480 600 3 3 3 70 70 70 480 600 600 TED. FDB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMC1FB ➀30➁32 ➂623 EBMC1FB ➀30➁34 ➂623 EBMC1FB ➀30➁36 ➂623 71/ 2 71/ 2 71/ 2 240 240 240 1 1 1 50 50 50 240 480 600 TEB TED. below and specify HP. EHD TED. FDB TED. EHD TED. 7BCD. insert a "1" between second to last and last character in catalog number. Groups F. Symbols are shown in the footnotes see page 452. F.

EHD TED. II. # 40 40 40 480 480 600 3 3 3 90 90 90 480 600 600 TED. TFJ. Div. Frame and 150 Amp. Div.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business ➂623 ➂623 ➂643 ➂663 ➂643 ➂663 ➂643 ➂663 . JD. TJJ. 452 www. D Cl. Frame 240V 480V 600V Manufacturer AC AC AC EBMCFD EBMCFD EBMCFD EBMCFH FD FD FD FD on Frame Size. TFJ. FDB EBMCFH EBMCFH EBMCFH EBMC3FH ➀90➁34 ➂643 EBMC3FH ➀90➁36 ➂643 EBMC3FH ➀90➁36 ➂663 50 50 50 480 480 600 3 3 3 100 100 100 480 600 600 TED. 4X††. 2. FDB TED. 1. I. C. III NEMA 3. JD. Groups F. JD. F. HP Polyphase Max. G Cl. Frame and 250 Amp. 7BCD. Groups B. Voltage. G Cl. HP Polyphase Line Volts NEMA Size Amp Rating Frame Volts Frame Types Enclosure Without Breaker & Starter Cat. KDB EBMCFM EBMCFM EBMC5FM ➀300➁36 ➂643 EBMC5FM ➀400➁36 ➂643 Motor Starter / / / / / / / / JD. # § ➀175➁36 ➀200➁36 ➀125➁36 ➀100➁36 ➀150➁36 ➀125➁36 ➀200➁36 ➀150➁36 Fusible Disconnect Switch Max. FDB TED. Frame 600VAC 600VAC KD – Interchangeable Trip Unit KDB – Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit TJK – Interchangeable Trip Unit TJJ – Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit Cutler-Hammer — EHD FDB JD – Interchangeable Trip Unit JDB – Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit General Electric TEB TED TED TFK – Interchangeable Trip Unit TFJ – Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit ➂Motor Starters: Manufacturer Allen Bradley Square D General Electric Cutler-Hammer WFD30J36 W643 WFD30J36 W643 WFD60J36 W643 WFD100J36 W643 Symbol AB D G W ‡Enclosure not suitable for NEMA 4 or 4X with cover mounted operators. TFJ. # 5 10 25 30 600 600 600 600 0 1 2 3 30 30 60 100 600 600 600 600 DS161R DS161R DS262R DS363R EBMC0FD EBMC1FD EBMC2FD EBMC3FH ➀Circuit Breakers: Manufacturer Cutler-Hammer General Electric NEMA Size Without Switch & Starter Cat. 600VAC Maximum 1C Motor Starter Circuit Breaker Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight Max. ††With S752 or S753. when heater ratings are fully specified. KDB TJK / KD. JD. Volts Switch Type With Disconnect Switch & Starter Cat. Frame 400 Amp. §Starters are furnished with 3 heaters. Groups E. 12 EBMC Combination Line Starters and Enclosures Single-Speed Non-Reversing with Circuit Breakers and Fusible Disconnect Switches 3-Pole 60 hertz. Div. TFJ. JD. Line Volts NEMA Size Amp Rating Max. II. JDB JDB JDB JDB JDB JDB JDB JDB With Breaker & Starter Cat. FDB EBMCFH EBMCFH EBMCFH EBMC3FH ➀100➁34 ➂643 EBMC3FH ➀100➁36 ➂643 EBMC3FH ➀100➁36 ➂663 40 50 60 60 75 75 100 100 240 240 480 600 480 600 480 600 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 175 200 125 100 150 125 200 150 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 TFK TFK TFK TFK TFK TFK TFK TFK EBMCFL EBMCFL EBMCFL EBMCFL EBMCFL EBMCFL EBMCFL EBMCFL EBMC4FL EBMC4FL EBMC4FL EBMC4FL EBMC4FL EBMC4FL EBMC4FL EBMC4FL 125 150 480 480 5 5 300 400 600 600 TJK / KD. EHD TED. # Symbol 0 1 2 3 WT TT ➁Select Circuit Breaker Frame Type based and Manufacturer desired: 100 Amp. TFJ. TFJ. 225 Amp.crouse-hinds. JD. JD. TJJ. TFJ. 1 & 2. TFJ.1C Cl. 4‡. 3R. 9EFG.

voltage. F. HP Polyphase 3 3 3 5 5 WP TP DP General Electric Square D HMCP (F-Frame) TEC FAL ➂Motor Starters: Manufacturer Symbol Allen Bradley Square D General Electric Cutler-Hammer AB D G W ➂623 ➂623 ➂643 ➂663 ➂643 ➂663 ➃After the MCP amp rating the following character symbol must be entered to designate the trip range.EBMC Combination Line Starters Single-Speed Non-Reversing with Motor Circuit Protectors 3-Pole 60 hertz. 1. below and specify HP. 12 Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight 1C Ordering Information: Select the complete Catalog No. 600VAC Maximum Cl. 1 & 2. 9EFG.crouse-hinds. MCP Amp Rating Symbol Trip Range Symbol ➁Select Motor Circuit Protector Frame Type based on Frame Size and Manufacturer desired: 150 Amp. Groups E. # Enclosure with Starter & MCP Cat. 250 Amp. Motor Starter Volts NEMA Size MCP Amp Rating Enclosure without Starter & MCP Cat. 3R. ††With S752 or S753. 7BCD. D Cl. Rated. Groups B. frequency. Frame Frame Frame Cutler-Hammer ➀250➃➁36 ➀400➃➁36 ➀250➃➁36 ➀250➃➁36 ➀400➃➁36 ➀400➃➁36 1C ➀Motor Circuit Protectors: Manufacturer Cutler-Hammer General Electric Square D ➂623 ➂643 ➂643 ➂663 HMCP (J-Frame) TFC KAL HMCP (K-Frame) TJC LAL ‡ Enclosure not suitable for NEMA 4 or 4X with cover mounted operators. 2. Div. 4X††. RPM. §Starters are furnished with three heaters when heater ratings are fully specified. 400 Amp. *General Electric motor circuit protectors are 225 Amp. III NEMA 3. Div. G Cl. I. www. Groups F. G Cl. C. # § 240 480 600 480 600 0 0 0 0 0 15 7 7 15 15 EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMC0FB EBMC0FB EBMC0FB EBMC0FB EBMC0FB ➀15A➁36 ➂623 ➀7A➁36 ➂643 ➀7A➁36 ➂663 ➀15A➁36 ➂643 ➀15A➁36 ➂663 71/2 71/2 10 10 240 480 480 600 1 1 1 1 30 15 30 15 EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMC1FB EBMC1FB EBMC1FB EBMC1FB ➀30A➁36 ➀15A➁36 ➀30A➁36 ➀15A➁36 10 15 15 20 25 25 240 240 480 600 480 600 2 2 2 2 2 2 50 100 30 30 50 50 EBMCFD EBMCFD EBMCFD EBMCFD EBMCFD EBMCFD EBMC2FD EBMC2FD EBMC2FD EBMC2FD EBMC2FD EBMC2FD ➀50A➁36 ➂623 ➀100A➁36 ➂623 ➀30A➁36 ➂643 ➀30A➁36 ➂663 ➀50A➁36 ➂643 ➀50A➁36 ➂663 30 30 50 50 240 600 480 600 3 3 3 3 100 50 100 100 EBMCFH EBMCFH EBMCFH EBMCFH EBMC3FH EBMC3FH EBMC3FH EBMC3FH ➀100A➁36 ➂623 ➀50A➁36 ➂663 ➀100A➁36 ➂643 ➀100A➁36 ➂663 50 100 100 240 480 600 4 4 4 250* 250* 250* EBMCFL EBMCFL EBMCFL EBMC4FL ➀250➃➁36 ➂623 EBMC4FL ➀250➃➁36 ➂643 EBMC4FL ➀250➃➁36 ➂663 60 100 125 150 200 200 240 240 480 600 480 600 5 5 5 5 5 5 250* 400 250* 250* 400 400 EBMCFM EBMCFM EBMCFM EBMCFM EBMCFM EBMCFM EBMC5FM EBMC5FM EBMC5FM EBMC5FM EBMC5FM EBMC5FM Max. Div. type and full load ampere rating of motors or specify ampere rating of heaters. II. II. 4‡. Consult factory for other trip ranges available.com US: 1-866-764-5454 Cutler-Hammer (WP) 7 15 30 50 100 250 400 A A A B B J G 21 to 70 45 to 150 90 to 300 150 to 500 300 to 1000 1250 to 2500 1250 to 2500 General Electric (TP) 7 15 30 50 100 225 400 A A A A A B C 18 to 90 42 to 198 90 to 390 180 to 660 300 to 1308 1000 to 2250 1000 to 3300 Square D (DP) 7 15 30 50 100 250 400 A A A A A H E 18 to 70 50 to 180 100 to 350 150 to 580 300 to 1100 1250 to 2500 1250 to 2500 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 453 .

Groups E.. Division 2.......... G Cl.............. Class II...... S542 Standard Breather (Class I....... FT FTPS S781 S782 S783 S784 S785 S366 S367 PB3 Separated view showing major components Suffix Selector switches (standard duty): ON-OFF. 454 www........... circuit breaker or motor circuit protector design – Consult Factory † Required for pilot lights on other than 120 volt control circuits...... 100 & 225 amp) ....... Auxiliary Switch on Circuit Breaker or Motor Circuit Protector* 1A/1B (1P2T) .............. ‡ Not suitable for NEMA 4........ Back boss drilled and tapped same size as standard hubs (except 15" dia. T4 600 volt† ......... No......... motor branch circuit protection. Class II..... S454‡ (2) Universal Breather – Drains (Class I................... Class III) .. II...................O. S454V‡ Less heaters...... and top cover skirted • Specially located stops and locks insure adequate thread engagement and prevent overtightening • Separate replaceable mounting bracket attached to the rear of the body provides three-point suspension for quick installation and leveling – one keyhole slot at top and two open slots at bottom • Bodies have two taper-tapped conduit hubs with integral bushings on the top....... The interior assembly... Div..... R11 240 volt ... One required for each lamp........ 1 and 3 inclusive • Breakers – 100 and 150 ampere frame sizes • Motor Circuit Protectors – 100 ampere frame size Options: The following special options are available from factory by adding suffix to Cat........... 120 volt..................... tapped and plugged for future addition of pilot lights One hole...... with breaker and starter attached.... D................ 9EFG. 7CD................. and many are available in kit form or for field addition to existing units: See page 471 for listing of kits Description Suffix Control circuit transformer 600/480/240–120 volts. 30 Standard Materials: • • • • Body and cover – copper-free aluminum Operating handle – copper-free aluminum Operating shafts – stainless steel Interior parts – sheet steel Standard Finishes: Features: • Quick-opening covers – less than two turns to remove or install • Three section design for ease of installation • Water-shedding construction with female threads on top cover....................... 100 & 225 amp) . G) .../3 N............. Class II..... in place of standard incandescent lamps... undervoltage protection and remote starting and stopping due to the combination of thermal-magnetic circuit breaker and magnetic motor starter Cl.... G... and covers assembled • External handle........ D. feeder and branch circuit conductors are easily pulled into the wiring chamber......O................ G. S198V Universal Breather – Drain (Class I................... III NEMA 3. Class II.................... T5 Space heaters: 120 volt .... 9EFG....... which operates breaker can be padlocked in either "ON" or "OFF" positions • Breaker is trip-free of the handle.. Groups F.................... 2. ..... Groups C.. F.... – 1" size)...... 1 & 2.. is then replaced...................................... 120 volt ... Class II.../2 N........... contactor......... 4..... Specify Insulated neutral with 2 connectors (50..... I. Fusible – Primary and secondary................ G. Pushbuttons (heavy duty): START-STOP .... ....... wet or corrosive locations • For installation indoors or outdoors at petroleum refineries... Side bosses drilled and tapped same size as standard hubs (except 15" dia... F.. G Class II.... Auxiliary Contacts on Starter or Contactor* 1 N.. F.... D Cl..................... S541 Two holes.. S219 Standard Drain (Class I. Groups C./1 N........ D Class II... J3 LED pilot lights. F............... Division 1 & 2..... 2A/2B (2P2T) ...........C... S178 Pilot light holes drilled.... LED Pilot light transformers: 240 volt† . Groups C...... 2 N...... and two more directly below • Universal mounting plate and reset mechanism will accommodate any of the motor starters and circuit breakers in catalog listing • When interior mounting plate is removed.... chemical and petrochemical plants and other process industry facilities where similar hazards exist • To provide disconnecting means. Div.....O..........2 No.1C EPC Combination Line Starters and Enclosures Applications: 1C EPC combination line starters and enclosures are used: • For across-the-line starting of polyphase AC induction motors • In locations which are hazardous due to the presence of flammable vapors............. G) ...... Groups E...... II.. D.. 12 • UL Standard: 698 • CSA Standards: C22.. ......... Groups F................... Groups E............... therefore it will open under short circuit or overload...... Class III) .......... G Class III • NEMA/EEMAC: 3... J1 Green... male threads on bottom cover...... G Cl... Groups C....... D... final connections made... F.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business ............... Div... 50 or 60 hertz (Sizes 0 and 1 – 100–50 VA) Fusible – Secondary......... Division 1............ R44 Automatic reset overload relay........ Groups C........... Groups C............ R22 480 volt . D..................... gases or highly combustible dusts • In damp. T2 480 volt† ................. 0 *Application is limited by starter........... RR2 HAND-OFF-AUTO........... Groups F. 12 Certifications and Compliances: • NEC/CEC Class I. CL Less overload relays (motor contactor) CM Separate AC control circuit .......... Class III) ........... Groups C............. 4. S146 Grounded neutral stud with 3 connectors (50...... 7CD................................ S1 Less overload relays (lighting contactor)........... 3 N.................. 1................. motor running protection....... Groups F..... S198 Standard Breather and Drain (Class I... Groups E... Groups E... even if the external handle is locked in the "ON" position • Furnished with third overload relay as standard Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight Assembled unit • Copper-free aluminum – natural • Stainless steel – natural • Sheet steel – electrogalvanized with chromate finish Description Electrical Rating Range: • Starters – Sizes 0..crouse-hinds. RR3 Pilot lights: Red................C............. – 1" size).C..............

1. Dia.crouse-hinds. 1 & 2. I. Groups E. Div. 7CD. not for construction purposes. 4. 1 and 3 starters EPC87 EPC87–FTPS or EPC87–FT Int. www.EPC Combination Line Starters and Enclosures Dimensions* (In Inches) Cl. Div. Groups F. 2. Groups C. II. F. 12 Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight 1C 1C Single-Speed Non-Reversing Sizes 0. D Cl. Div.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 455 . III NEMA 3. 7" 7" a b c d e f g h j k l m n p Dimensions 105/8 261/16 3511/16 1411/16 63/4 711/16 115/8 2 75/8 73/8 21/16 93/8 51/4 11/4 Dimensions† 105/8 311/16 4711/16 1411/16 113/4 711/16 115/8 9 75/8 73/8 21/16 93/8 51/4 11/4 *Dimensions are approximate. 9EFG. G Cl. II. G Cl. †For units with Control Circuit Transformer (suffix FT or FTPS).

1 & 2. # § 2 120 0 30 EB 11/4 7 EPC87 EPC870 ➀30ED ➁613 3 3 3 3 240 480 480 600 0 0 0 0 20 15 15 15 EHD EHD FDB FD 11/4 11/4 11/4 11/4 7 7 7 7 EPC87 EPC87 EPC87 EPC87 EPC870 EPC870 EPC870 EPC870 ➀20EHD ➁623 ➀15EHD ➁643 ➀15FD ➁643 ➀15FD ➁653 5 5 5 5 240 480 480 600 1 0 0 0 30 15 15 15 EHD EHD FDB FDB 11/4 11/4 11/4 11/4 7 7 7 7 EPC87 EPC87 EPC87 EPC87 EPC871 EPC870 EPC870 EPC870 ➀30EHD ➁623 ➀15EHD ➁643 ➀15FD ➁643 ➀15FD ➁653 71/2 71/2 71/2 71/2 240 480 480 600 1 1 1 1 50 30 30 30 EHD EHD FDB FDB 11/4 11/4 11/4 11/4 7 7 7 7 EPC87 EPC87 EPC87 EPC87 EPC871 EPC871 EPC871 EPC871 ➀50EHD ➁623 ➀30EHD ➁643 ➀30FD ➁643 ➀30FD ➁653 10 10 10 480 480 600 1 1 1 30 30 30 EHD FDB FDB 11/4 11/4 11/4 7 7 7 EPC87 EPC87 EPC87 EPC871 ➀30EHD ➁643 EPC871 ➀30FD ➁643 EPC871 ➀30FD ➁653 ➁Motor Starters: ➀Circuit Breakers: Manufacturer Symbol Frames 100/150AMP 240V 480V 600V General Electric Cutler-Hammer TT WT TEB EHD TED* EHD TED* FB. RPM. D Cl. 600 VAC Maximum Ordering Information: Enclosures only can be ordered. To order an enclosure complete with starter and breaker. HP Polyphase Circuit Breaker Volts NEMA Size Amp Rating Frame For combination starters with motor circuit protectors or single speed. Select from listings below. Non-Reversing with Circuit Breakers 3-Pole 60 hertz. Select the complete Cat. 1. Without Starter & Circuit Breaker Cat. 9EFG. below and specify HP. non-reversing motors see page 457. G Cl. Dia. Groups F. 7CD. type and full load ampere rating of motor – or specify ampere rating of heaters. frequency. II. 456 www. Div.1C EPC Combination Line Starters and Enclosures Cl. FDB *Specify Voltage Manufacturer Symbol Allen-Bradley General Electric Square D Cutler-Hammer AB G D W § Starters are furnished with three heaters when heater ratings are fully specified. Div.crouse-hinds. Div. Symbols are shown in the footnotes below. in. Motor Starter 1C Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight Max. G Cl. 4. Consult factory. Groups E. insert the manufacturer's symbols in the designated positions of the catalog number. voltage. F. Groups C. III NEMA 3. Instantaneous magnetic trip circuit breakers (magnetic circuit interrupters) can be supplied. 12 Single Speed. II. No.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business . Enclosure Hub Size in. Int. # With Starter & Circuit Breaker Cat. I. 2.

EPC Combination Line Starters

Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D
Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G
Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G
Cl. III
NEMA 3, 4, 7CD, 9EFG, 12

Single-Speed Non-Reversing
with Motor Circuit Protectors
3-Pole 60 hertz, 600 VAC Maximum

Explosionproof
Dust-Ignitionproof
Raintight
Wet Locations
Watertight

1C

Ordering Information:
Select the complete Catalog No. below and specify HP, voltage,
frequency, RPM, type and full load ampere rating of motors or
specify ampere rating of heaters.
Current limiters may be ordered by specification*.
Enclosure with Motor Circuit
Protector and Starter §
Amp
Rating
Cat. #

3
3
3
5
5

240
480
600
480
600

0
0
0
0
0

15
7
7
15
15

EPC870
EPC870
EPC870
EPC870
EPC870

➀15HMCP ➁623
➀7HMCP ➁643
➀7HMCP ➁653
➀15HMCP ➁643
➀15HMCP ➁653

71/2
71/2
10
10

240
480
600
480

1
1
1
1

30
15
15
30

EPC871
EPC871
EPC871
EPC871

➀30HMCP
➀15HMCP
➀15HMCP
➀30HMCP

➀Motor Circuit Protectors
Manufacturer
General Electric
Square D
Cutler-Hammer

TP
DP
WP

➁Motor Starters:
Manufacturer
Allen-Bradley
General Electric
Square D
Cutler-Hammer

AB
G
D
W

1C

Motor Starter
Max. HP
NEMA
Polyphase Volts Size

➁623
➁643
➁653
➁643

Symbol

Symbol

*General Electric or Cutler-Hammer MCPs only.
§ Starters are furnished with three heaters when heater ratings are fully specified.

www.crouse-hinds.com

US: 1-866-764-5454

CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business

457

1C

NMC Combination Line
Starters and Enclosures

Corrosion-Resistant
Dust-tight
Watertight
Weatherproof
NEMA 3, 4X, 12

600VAC Heavy Duty
Applications:
• NMC combination magnetic line starters
are for use in across-the-line motor
starting, motor disconnect, motor and
line protection and start-stop operations.

1C

Features:
• Enclosures are made of Krydon® high
impact strength fiberglass-reinforced
polyester material having excellent
corrosion resistance and stability to
heat.
• Unitized, strong and durable enclosure
construction provides longer service life
for equipment.
• Provided with top and bottom
mounting feet.
• Enclosure has hinged access door
which opens 160° for easy wiring and
maintenance. Three screws for door
frame are hidden behind access door.
• Access door may be padlocked to
prevent unauthorized access.

Combination line starter with optional
START-STOP pushbuttons –
open view

Options:

Certifications and
Compliances:
• NEMA/EEMAC: 3, 4X and 12

Electrical Rating Ranges:
• 3-pole, 60 hertz, 600 VAC max.
• Starters – sizes 0, 1, 2, 3, 4
• Breakers – 100, 150, 225 and
250 amp frame
• Switches – 30, 60, 100 amp
• Motor circuit protectors – 15, 30, 50,
100, 150 amp

Description
Suffix
Control circuit transformer
480/240-120 volts, 50 or
60 hertz, (Sizes 0 and 1 – 50VA,
Size 2 – 100VA, Size 3 – 150VA,
Size 4 – 300VA)
Fusible
Secondary....................................
FT
Primary and secondary................ FTPS
Auxiliary Contact on Starter
or Contactor*
1NO/1NC..................................... S781
2 NO/2 NC................................... S782
3 NO/3 NC................................... S783
Auxiliary Switch on Circuit
Breaker or Motor
Circuit Protector*
1A/1B .......................................... S784
2A/2B .......................................... S785
Time delay low voltage release
for 3-wire control with 2, 4 or 6second adjustment. For singlespeed, non-reversing starters only.
Control circuit voltage:
120 volt, 60 hertz.............................. LVR1†
240 volt, 60 hertz.............................. LVR2†
480 volt, 60 hertz.............................. LVR4†

Combination line starter with optional
START-STOP pushbuttons –
closed view
Description
Suffix
Pilot lights, 120 V primary –
specify other primary voltages
as required:
Red pilot light..................................
J1
Green pilot light...............................
J3
LED pilot lights in place of
standard incandescent pilot lamps
LED
Pushbutton (heavy duty,
uses two device holes):
START-STOP................................... PB13
Selector Switch (heavy duty)
ON–OFF........................................... RR17
HAND–OFF–AUTO.......................... RR18
JOG–RUN–OFF............................... RR19
Padlock attachment for:
Pushbutton...................................... S708
Automatic reset overload relay.......
S1
Less overload relays (contactor).....
C
Separate AC control circuit............. Specify
Insulated, groundable type terminal
block for grounded or ungrounded
neutral can be supplied................... S618
Hubs (see "NOTE ON HUBS") –
see page 677
Grounding plate or bushing –
see page 677
*Application limited by Size 5 starter, contactor or circuit
breaker design – consult factory.
†Option not available on NMC1024B.

NOTE ON HUBS: The following number and sizes of hubs (not mounted) are included when combination starters are
ordered complete. If enclosures only are ordered, hubs must be ordered separately (see "Options").

458

www.crouse-hinds.com

US: 1-866-764-5454

Starter Size

Number Included

Hub Size

0

3

3

1

1
2

/4
1

2

1
2

3
/4
11/2

3

1
2

3
/4
2

4

1
2

3
/4
21/2

CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business

/4

3

NMC Combination Line Starters
and Enclosures

1C

Corrosion-Resistant
Dust-tight
Watertight
Weatherproof
NEMA 3, 4X, 12

Single-Speed, Non-Reversing
600VAC Heavy Duty
Ordering Information - With Circuit Breakers

To order an enclosure complete with starter and breaker, insert the manufacturer’s symbols in the designated positions of the catalog number.
Symbols are shown in the footnotes.
Select the complete Cat. No. below and specify HP, voltage, frequency, RPM, type and full load ampere rating of motor – or specify ampere
rating of heaters. Starters are furnished with three heaters.
Enclosures only can be ordered. Select from listings below. Specific reference table is shown in the listings below. Instantaneous magnetic
trip circuit breakers (magnetic circuit interrupters) can be supplied.
Motor Starter
Circuit Breaker
Enclosure
Trip
With Starter &
Without Starter &
Max. HP
Volts
NEMA
Setting
Circuit Breaker
Circuit Breaker
Polyphase
(A-C)
Size
Amps
Frame
Cat. #
Cat. #
2
2

120
240

0
0

30
15

EB
EB

NMC1024B ➀30EB ➁6130
NMC1024B ➀15EB ➁6230

NMC1024B
NMC1024B

240

0

20

EB

NMC1024B ➀20EB ➁6230

NMC1024B

240
480
600

1
0
0

30
15
15

EB
EHD
FDB

NMC1024B ➀30EB ➁6231
NMC1024B ➀15EHB ➁6430
NMC1024B ➀15FB ➁6530

NMC1024B
NMC1024B
NMC1024B

71/2
71/2
71/2

240
480
600

1
1
1

50
20
20

EB
EHD
FDB

NMC1024B ➀50EB ➁6231
NMC1024B ➀20EHB ➁6431
NMC1024B ➀20FB ➁6531

NMC1024B
NMC1024B
NMC1024B

10
10
10

240
480
600

2
1
1

60
30
30

EB
EHD
FDB

NMC1024B2 ➀60EB ➁6232
NMC1024B ➀30EHB ➁6431
NMC1024B ➀30FB ➁6531

NMC1024B2
NMC1024B
NMC1024B

15
15
15

240
480
600

2
2
1

80
40
40

EB
EHD
FDB

NMC1024B2 ➀80EB ➁6232
NMC1024B2 ➀40EHB ➁6432
NMC1024B ➀40FB ➁6531

NMC1024B2
NMC1024B2
NMC1024B

20
20
20

240
480
600

3
2
2

80
60
50

EB
EHD
FDB

NMC1426B ➀80EB ➁6233
NMC1024B2 ➀60EHB ➁6432
NMC1024B2 ➀50FB ➁6532

NMC1426B
NMC1024B2
NMC1024B2

25
25
25

240
480
600

3
2
2

80
70
60

EB
EHD
FDB

NMC1426B ➀80EB ➁6233
NMC1024B2 ➀70EHB ➁6432
NMC1024B2 ➀60FB ➁6532

NMC1426B
NMC1024B2
NMC1024B2

30
30
30

240
480
600

4
3
3

125
80
60

JDB‡
EHD
FDB

NMC2426B ➀125JB ➁6234
NMC1426B ➀80EHB ➁6433
NMC1426B ➀60FB ➁6533

NMC2426B
NMC1426B
NMC1426B

40
40
40

240
480
600

4
3
3

150
80
80

JDB‡
EHD
FDB

NMC2426B ➀150JB ➁6234
NMC1426B ➀80EHB ➁6433
NMC1426B ➀80FB ➁6533

NMC2426B
NMC1426B
NMC1426B

50
50
50

240
480
600

4
3
3

200
100
100

JDB‡
EHD
FDB

NMC2426B ➀200JB ➁6234
NMC1426B ➀100EHB ➁6433
NMC1426B ➀100FB ➁6533

NMC2426B
NMC1426B
NMC1426B

60
60

480
600

4
4

125
100

JDB‡
JDB‡

NMC2426B ➀125JB ➁6434
NMC2426B ➀100JB ➁6534

NMC2426B
NMC2426B

75
75

480
600

4
4

150
125

JDB‡
JDB‡

NMC2426B ➀150JB ➁6434
NMC2426B ➀125JB ➁6534

NMC2426B
NMC2426B

100
100

480
600

4
4

175
150

JDB‡
JDB‡

NMC2426B ➀175JB ➁6434
NMC2426B ➀150JB ➁6534

NMC2426B
NMC2426B

1C

3
5
5
5

➁Motor Starters:

➀Circuit Breakers:
Manufacturer

Frames
100/150A
Symbol 240V
480V

General Electric
Square D
Cutler-Hammer

TT
DT
WT

TEB
FAL§
EB

600V

225/250A
600V

TED§
TED§
TFJ
FAL§
FAL§
KAL
EHB, EHD FB, FDB JB, JDB

Manufacturer

Symbol

Allen-Bradley
General Electric
Square D
Cutler-Hammer

AB
G
D
W

Information on other starter manufacturers on request.

NOTE ON HUBS: See page 458.
§Specify voltage.
‡Formerly "JB"

www.crouse-hinds.com

US: 1-866-764-5454

CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business

459

Symbol AB D G W Information on other starter manufacturers on request. HP Polyphase Volts (AC) NEMA Size MCP Trip Setting Amps Enclosure With Starter & MCP Cat. HP Polyphase Volts (AC) NEMA Size Non-fusible Disconnect Switch Switch Size-Amps 3 5 5 240 480 600 0 0 0 30 30 30 NMC1024D ➀30 ➁6230 NMC1024D ➀30 ➁6430 NMC1024D ➀30 ➁6530 NMC1024D ➀ NMC1024D ➀ NMC1024D ➀ 71/2 10 10 240 480 600 1 1 1 30 30 30 NMC1024D ➀30 ➁6231 NMC1024D ➀30 ➁6431 NMC1024D ➀30 ➁6531 NMC1024D ➀ NMC1024D ➀ NMC1024D ➀ 15 25 25 240 480 600 2 2 2 60 60 60 NMC1426D ➀60 ➁6232 NMC1426D ➀60 ➁6432 NMC1426D ➀60 ➁6532 NMC1426D ➀ NMC1426D ➀ NMC1426D ➀ 30 50 50 240 480 600 3 3 3 100 100 100 NMC2426D ➀100 ➁6233 NMC2426D ➀100 ➁6433 NMC2426D ➀100 ➁6533 NMC2426D ➀ NMC2426D ➀ NMC2426D ➀ ➀Disconnect Switches: Manufacturer Symbol General Electric G Square D D Cutler-Hammer W Enclosure With Starter & Disconnect Switch Cat.com US: 1-866-764-5454 ➁Motor Starters: Manufacturer Symbol Allen-Bradley Square D General Electric Cutler-Hammer AB D G W Information on other starter manufacturers on request. # Without Starter & Disconnect Switch Cat. # Switch Type Type QMW Class 9422 Type DS NOTE ON HUBS: See page 458. 4X. # 3 5 5 240 480 600 0 0 0 15 15 15 NMC1024B ➀15MCP ➁6230 NMC1024B ➀15MCP ➁6430 NMC1024B ➀15MCP ➁6530 NMC1024B NMC1024B NMC1024B 71/2 10 10 240 480 600 1 1 1 30 30 30 NMC1024B ➀30MCP ➁6231 NMC1024B ➀30MCP ➁6431 NMC1024B ➀30MCP ➁6531 NMC1024B NMC1024B NMC1024B 15 25 25 240 480 600 2 2 2 50 50 50 NMC1024B2 ➀50MCP ➁6232 NMC1024B2 ➀50MCP ➁6432 NMC1024B2 ➀50MCP ➁6532 NMC1024B2 NMC1024B2 NMC1024B2 30 50 50 240 480 600 3 3 3 100 100 100 NMC1426B ➀100MCP ➁6233 NMC1426B ➀100MCP ➁6433 NMC1426B ➀100MCP ➁6533 NMC1426B NMC1426B NMC1426B 50 100 100 240 480 600 4 4 4 150 150 150 NMC2426P ➀150MCP ➁6234 NMC2426P ➀150MCP ➁6434 NMC2426P ➀150MCP ➁6534 NMC2426P NMC2426P NMC2426P ➀Motor Circuit Protectors: Manufacturer General Electric Cutler-Hammer ➁Motor Starters: Manufacturer Allen-Bradley Square D General Electric Cutler-Hammer Symbol G W NOTE ON HUBS: See page 458.With Motor Circuit Protector Motor Starter Max.crouse-hinds. For motor circuit protector with current limiter – information on request.With Non-fusible Disconnect Switch To order an enclosure complete with disconnect switch. Select from listings below. Symbols are shown in the footnotes. Enclosures only can be ordered. CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business . insert the manufacturer's symbol in the designated positions of the catalog number.1C NMC Combination Line Starters and Enclosures Single-Speed. § With motor circuit protector only. Non-Reversing 600VAC Heavy Duty Corrosion-Resistant Dust-tight Watertight Weatherproof NEMA 3. Ordering Information . Motor Starter Max. 460 www. 12 1C Ordering Information . #§ Without Starter & MCP Cat.

■Fuse clips are arranged for Class H fuses and field modifiable for Class J fuses. 4X. www. consult Eaton's Crouse-Hinds. 12 Single-Speed.NMC Combination Line Starters and Enclosures Corrosion-Resistant Dust-tight Watertight Weatherproof NEMA 3. HP Volts Polyphase AC Symbol AB D G W Information on other starter manufacturers on request. For Class ➁Motor Starters: Manufacturer Allen-Bradley Square D General Electric Cutler-Hammer 1C Motor Starter Max.With Fusible Disconnect Switch NEMA Size Fusible Disconnect Switch Switch SizeFuse Clip Amps Rating-Amps Enclosure With Starter & Disconnect Switch Cat.crouse-hinds. R fuses. #■ Without Starter & Disconnect Switch Cat.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 461 . Non-Reversing 600VAC Heavy Duty 1C Ordering Information . # 3 5 5 240 480 600 0 0 0 30 30 30 30 30 30 NMC1024D ➀3030 ➁6230 NMC1024D ➀3030 ➁6430 NMC1024D ➀3030 ➁6530 NMC1024D ➀ NMC1024D ➀ NMC1024D ➀ 71/2 71/2 10 10 10 10 240 240 480 480 600 600 1 1 1 1 1 1 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 60 30 60 30 60 NMC1024D NMC1024D NMC1024D NMC1024D NMC1024D NMC1024D ➀3030 ➀3060 ➀3030 ➀3060 ➀3030 ➀3060 ➁6231 ➁6231 ➁6431 ➁6431 ➁6531 ➁6531 NMC1024D NMC1024D NMC1024D NMC1024D NMC1024D NMC1024D ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ 15 15 25 25 25 25 240 240 480 480 600 600 2 2 2 2 2 2 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 100 60 100 60 100 NMC1426D NMC1426D NMC1426D NMC1426D NMC1426D NMC1426D ➀6060 ➀6010 ➀6060 ➀6010 ➀6060 ➀6010 ➁6232 ➁6232 ➁6432 ➁6432 ➁6532 ➁6532 NMC1426D NMC1426D NMC1426D NMC1426D NMC1426D NMC1426D ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ 30 50 50 50 240 480 480 600 3 3 3 3 100 100 100 100 100 100 200 100 NMC2426D NMC2426D NMC2426D NMC2426D ➀1010 ➀1010 ➀1020 ➀1010 ➁6233 ➁6433 ➁6433 ➁6533 NMC2426D NMC2426D NMC2426D NMC2426D ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀Disconnect Switches: Manufacturer Switch Type Symbol General Electric Square D Cutler-Hammer Type QMW Class 9422 Type DS G D W NOTE ON HUBS: See page 458.

crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business . # Outside Dimensions l w d Mounting Dimensions mw ml Door Opening Dimensions dl dw NMC1024 NMC1426 2513/32 2713/32 1113/32 1513/32 823/32 923/32 77/8 117/8 253/8 271/4 227/8 2311/16 511/16 911/16 NMC2426 2713/32 2513/32 923/32 213/4 271/4 2311/16 1911/16 462 www.1C NMC Combination Line Starters and Enclosures Dimensions 1C In Inches: NMC Cat.

crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 see page 471 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 463 2C EMN NEMA Series EMN IEC Series EMN Series NMN Series . Application/Selection see page 464 Magnetic Line Starters & Enclosures Single speed. non-reversing EBMS Series EPC Series NMG Series see pages 465–466 see pages 469–470 see pages 488–489 Manual Line Starters & Enclosures see pages 472–473 see page 474 see page 475 see page 487 Manual Motor Starting Switches & Enclosures GUSC Series EFD Series MC Series EDS Series GHG 635 Series NSSC / NFSC see page 476 see page 477 see pages 483–484 see pages 478–480 see pages 481–482 see page 485 Special Feature Kits For EPC Series www.2C Motor Starters Hazardous and Non-hazardous Description Page No.

C.E. 9(EFG) Manual 0-1P DC and Single and Poly-AC G. I. III 3. ‡For factory sealed units see pages 536–537. Cl. 2. Groups E. Square D Bolted/ Ground Joint GUSC Cl. F. C. II. many of which are available in kit form for field addition to existing units. I. Div. F. 9EFG. D Cl. 4X. Groups E. F.E. Div. G II. G III 3. 1 & 2. 2. 1 & 2. 15. Div. 7CD. 9EFG. 9EFG. Groups C. Groups E. Cutler-Hammer Bolted/ Ground Joint EFD Cl. 7BCD. 1. Cl. D II. Div. Cl. Cl. Groups C. 9EFG. D II. C. F.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business Threaded . D II. Cl. Groups E. Cl. 12 Manual DC and Single and Poly-AC G. 1 & 2. G III 3. 7(CD). Groups E. 2. 4. 1 & 2. 2. Groups F. F. G II. Groups F. 1. 4X†. Div.Motor Starters 2C Application and Selection Quick Selector Chart Applications: Selection: Options: Line starters are housed in enclosures suitable for specific environments. Cl. Div. Groups F. I. Square D Bolted/ Ground Joint NSSC / NFSC None 3. Div. Cl. 7CD. Div.E. G III 3. 7BCD. Div. Square D Cutler-Hammer Bolted/ Ground Joint/ Gasketed EMN NEMA Cl. G III 3. 1 & 2. I. Div. D II. Cl. screw and gasket *Check listings for Group B suitability. Div. 4X†. 12 Starter Type Manual NEMA/EEMAC Size Starters Single Speed Non-reversing Motor Phase and Type Single-AC Manufacturers Equipment Enclosed – Starter Cutler-Hammer Cover Type Gasketed EPC Cl. †NEMA 4X rated when ordered with epoxy powder coating. 20 Single-AC EDS. 4. Div.E. G Cl. Cl. Groups B. Square D Bolted EMN IEC Cl. 7CD. Square D Threaded EBMS Cl. 4X. Groups C. G Cl. I. Groups F. 4X. 9(EFG) Manual Single and Poly-AC Cutler-Hammer Bolted EMN Cl. G II. Cl. Square D Cutler-Hammer Screw and gasket NMN None 3. 12 Magnetic 0-2 Poly-AC Allen-Bradley Cutler-Hammer G. and are used for: • Across-the-line starting of motors • Motor running protection • Undervoltage protection • Remote or manual starting and stopping Considerations for selection of proper enclosure: • The environment of the enclosure location in accordance with NEC/CEC and NEMA/EEMAC requirements • The characteristics of the starter to be enclosed • See "Quick-Selector" below for guidance Many options are available on: • Material and finishes where special atmospheric conditions prevail • Special features for specific applications. D II. F. Cl. Groups E. Div. II. G III 3. 464 www. G II.crouse-hinds. Div. 4. 12 Manual 0-4 Poly-AC Allen-Bradley G. 1. 12 Manual 0-1P Single and Poly-AC Allen-Bradley Cutler-Hammer G. Groups E. 1 & 2. Groups B. Quick Selector Chart 2C Enclosures for Starters Enclosures MC NEC/CEC – Hazardous Area Compliance None NEMA/ EEMAC Enclosure Type 3. Groups C. Div. 9EFG. Cl. 12 Manual DC and Single AC Allen-Bradley G. 1. Div. Div. Cl. 7(CD). Square D Screw and gasket NMG None 3. I. 71/ 2. I. Groups E. 12 Manual DC and Single and Poly-AC Allen-Bradley G. Groups B*. G III 3. Groups F.E. 2. 2. Groups F. F. 1 & 2. 1 & 2. Cl. D Cl. 4. G II. Cl.E. Square D Cutler-Hammer Westinghouse Hinged. Groups C. See individual listings for available options. 1. 7CD. Cl. Div. 12 Manual 0-1P Single AC Allen-Bradley G. G II. Div. D II. 4. Div. Div.E. 1 & 2. III 3. I. 12 Manual 3. 1 & 2.E. Div. F. 12 Magnetic 0-5 Poly-AC Allen-Bradley G. Cl. EDSC‡ Cl. 1. 9EFG.E.

• Optional EMPS control devices may be added to enclosure cover. corrosion resistant.crouse-hinds. • Motor starter operating handle located through the right side wall of the body permits visual confirmation of correct component assembly and operation. I. washers and retractile springs – stainless steel Electrical Rating Range: • Motor starters – NEMA/EEMAC sizes 0–5 ‡Enclosure not suitable for NEMA 4 or 4X with cover mounted operators. 9EFG. Groups B.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 465 . F. • To provide motor overload and undervoltage protection. 1. • For across-the-line starting. • Minimum enclosure-to-enclosure spacing with little interference between the opened cover and an adjacent enclosure. 30 Standard Materials: • • • • • Body and cover – copper-free aluminum Operating handle – copper-free aluminum Operating shaft and bushing – stainless steel Interior parts – sheet steel. captive. G Cl. Groups E. 1 & 2. 4‡. cast copper-free aluminum construction (less than 0. wet. D Cl. Division 1. 7BCD. Groups F. Division 1 & 2. F. with an external flanged ground joint between body and cover makes interior components more accessible. Groups B.2 No.4 of 1%). Removable reducers are supplied as standard. 4‡. C. dirty. Certifications and Compliances: • NEC/CEC Class I. G Class III • UL Standards: UL1203 • NEMA: 3. 7BCD. • Total compliance to the wiring end room requirements of the National Electrical Code® and Canadian Electrical Code. • Bodies have top and bottom drilled and tapped entrances for power conduits plus one at the bottom for control conduit.EBMS Magnetic Line Starters and Enclosures Cl. 4X††. speed changing and reversing of polyphase AC induction motors. C. • Versatile. • Tap-on mounting feet. • Copper-free aluminum hinges allow the cover to swing well out of the way. 4X††. 2. 12 • CSA Standard: C22. electrogalvanized Cover bolts. National Electrical Code is a Registered Trademark of the National Fire Protection Association. internal operating mechanisms allow for field adjustment to accommodate popular manufacturers' starters. • In areas where frequent washdowns are necessary or where heavy rain or water spray is prevalent. Stainless steel springs provide clear indication cover bolts are fully retracted from body. 12 Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight 2C Applications: Spectrum™ EBM hinged cover motor control enclosures are used: • For general motor control – indoors or outdoors – in damp. III NEMA 3. www. hex head cover bolts. 3R. Spectrum EBM motor control enclosures accommodate popular makes of starters. Mounting plate also field removable. Div. • Steel bracket for lifting larger enclosures during installation supplied as standard. G Class II. 9EFG. Features: 2C • Rugged. II. • Neoprene cover gasket permanently attached to the cover seals out moisture. to accommodate smaller size conduits. Div. Groups E. II. quick release. • Semi-clamshell enclosure design. Groups F. • On switchracks or other assemblies where it's desired that motor control be centrally located. ††With S752 or S753. Division 2. Div. All conduit entrances are plugged. straightforward installation of starter on pre-drilled mounting plate within enclosure. without the need for a protective shelter. stopping. • Simple. • Stainless steel. 3R. dusty hazardous locations. D Class II. G Cl.

. ➁ 12 Point Term................ 120VAC......... Groups B. 240 Volt......................................... Contacts on starter 1 N. ➀ • Std................................................... ➀ • External Epoxy Finish ........................ 3R..................................... F............. 50 / 60 Hertz.......... Class I.......................................... Details on specific makes and sizes on request......... Class II......) Aux............................ & 3 N..................................................... Suffixes are added alphanumerically............................................................................ ➀ • Space Heater....................... ➁ Aux............................... Class III ....... ➀ • Automatic Reset Overload Relay ................. C............. ➀ • Space Heater........ EF&G... non-reversing starters only (number limited by design of starter........................... Groups F....................................C....................................................................... w/blank indicating plate ............................ ➀ • On-Off Selector Switch ................................. ➀ • Std......................................... Contacts on starter 3 N. 300VA for NEMA/EEMAC size 4......................................................... 2C ➁ Options in this position are modifications to the motor starter and should be listed alphanumerically................... 25 Watts .................................. ➀ • Space Heater........... 25 Watts .. 50 / 60 Hertz....................... 12 Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight Options: The following options are available from the factory by adding suffix to catalog number.................... Red Jewel............. ➀ • Pilot Light............O............... Catalog Number System Example EBMS1FB-➀-W6413-➁ ➀ Options in this position are additions to the enclosures and should be listed alphanumerically............................................... Drain............ G Cl................ ➀ • Control Circuit Transformer...... Green Jewel.... & 2 C... # • Less Overload Relays (lighting contactor) ... RR3) it is necessary to order DSL Legend Plates for identification and marking of the device(s) being used...... 4X††......................... Div...................... RR2... Block – 30 Amp...................................................O.................................... Class III .... ➀ • Additional control contacts..... with provision for fusing both primary leads and one secondary lead (fuses not included) ...... 4‡..... B........................................ G Cl...................................... Div..... 120 Volt... ➀ • Less Heaters in Starter Overload Relay ...................... Class I............................................................................................................ Use "B" size enclosures....................................... Example: Without Starter 466 Enclosure Enclosure for Cat....... ➀ • Internal and External Epoxy Finish ...........2C EBMS Magnetic Line Starters and Enclosures Cl............................ & 1 N... C&D.........O............ B............................................. 120VAC................................ with provision for fusing both primary leads and one secondary lead (fuses not included) ................................................. II.. ➁ Aux........ 600/480/240–120................. ➀ • General Purpose Control Relay..... Breather & Drain. III NEMA 3... ➀ • Less Overload Relays (motor contactor) ......................................................................... II........ w/blank indicating plate ............ 9EFG... EF&G.... 25 Watts ...................... See page 449 for DSL Legend Plate listings................. 600/480/240–120..................... N......... 7BCD..C.... 480 Volt....... Contacts on starter 2 N................ Groups E.......................................... # EBMSFA S787 EBMSFB www.................crouse-hinds.............com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business S781 S782 S783 S786 S787* ....................... Class II......... * Use of this option with NEMA/EEMAC Size 0 or 1 starters necessitates a larger enclosure.......................... – for single speed....... Description Position in Cat.............................. 1 & 2..................................................................................................... 5 600/480/240–120.............. with provision for fusing both primary leads and one secondary lead (fuses not included) ... ➁ • Start-Stop Pushbuttons (requires 2 spaces) ............................O.................................. 300V .. 200VA for NEMA/EEMAC size 3..........C.................. or N.... ➀ • Hand-Off-Auto Selector Switch ........... coil 120VAC.. ††With S752 or S753.. 100VA for NEMA/EEMAC sizes 0–2................O..................... J3.......................................... 2............ ➀ • Control Circuit Transformer.................... C&D......... PB23.............. 1................................ I.... 50–60 Hz .......................................................... ➀ • Control Circuit Transformer. 50 / 60 Hertz................... ➂ When specifying non-standard markings on any one of the following options with Spectrum™ EBM Motor Controls (J1.................................. contacts rated 10A @ 600V...................... D Cl.... ➀ Suffix CL CM FTPS100 FTPS200 FTPS300 J1➂ J3➂ 0 PB23➂‡ RR2➂‡ RR3➂‡ R11 R22 R44 S1 S756‡ S756V‡ S752 S753 ‡Enclosure not suitable for NEMA 4 or 4X with cover mounted operators................ 4 Pole N................................................................. Div...................................... ➀ • Pilot Light....................................................................................

crouse-hinds. 4X††. Div. • Enclosures without starters may be ordered. 3R. Groups E. type and full load ampere rating of motor – or specify ampere rating of heaters. RPM. # With Starter Cat. F. III NEMA 3. insert the manufacturer's symbol in the designated position (see ‡) of the catalog number. G Cl. 1. 4‡. Select from the listings below. 9EFG. Symbols are shown in the footnotes. D Cl. II. frequency. II. I. 600 VAC Maximum Cl. NEMA sizes 0–5. Div. # § Volts 2 120 0 EBMSFA EBMS0FA ➀613 3 3 120 240 1 0 EBMSFA EBMSFA EBMS1FA ➀613 EBMS0FA ➀623 5 5 480 600 0 0 EBMSFA EBMSFA EBMS0FA ➀643 EBMS0FA ➀663 71/2 71/2 120 240 2 1 EBMSFB EBMSFA EBMS2FB ➀613 EBMS1FA ➀623 10 10 480 600 1 1 EBMSFA EBMSFA EBMS1FA ➀643 EBMS1FA ➀663 15 15 120 240 3 2 EBMSFH EBMSFB EBMS3FH ➀613 EBMS2FB ➀623 25 25 480 600 2 2 EBMSFB EBMSFB EBMS2FB ➀643 EBMS2FB ➀663 30 240 3 EBMSFH EBMS3FH ➀623 50 50 50 480 600 240 3 3 4 EBMSFH EBMSFH EBMSFH EBMS3FH ➀643 EBMS3FH ➀663 EBMS4FH ➀623 100 100 100 480 600 240 4 4 5 EBMSFH EBMSFH EBMSFL EBMS4FH ➀643 EBMS4FH ➀663 EBMS5FL ➀623 200 200 480 600 5 5 EBMSFL EBMSFL EBMS5FL ➀643 EBMS5FL ➀663 2C Max. 2. HP Polyphase EBMS Series starter enclosures are available with magnetic line starters.EBMS Magnetic Line Starters and Enclosures Single-Speed Non-Reversing 3-Pole 60 hertz. § Motor starters are furnished with three heaters when heater ratings are fully specified. • Also specify HP. 12 Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight 2C Ordering Information: • To order an enclosure complete with motor starter. ††With S752 or S753.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 467 . www. 7BCD. voltage. C. 1 & 2. ➀Motor starters: Manufacturer Symbol Allen Bradley Square D General Electric Cutler-Hammer AB D G W ‡Enclosure not suitable for NEMA 4 or 4X with cover mounted operators. EBMS Series Enclosures for Magnetic Line Starters Single Speed Non-Reversing Motor Starter NEMA Size Enclosure Without Starter Cat. Groups F. Groups B. G Cl. Div.

2C

EBMS Magnetic Line
Starters and Enclosures

Explosionproof
Dust-Ignitionproof
Raintight
Wet Locations
Watertight

2C

Dimensions (In Inches)

Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D
Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G
Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G
Cl. III
NEMA 3, 3R, 4‡, 4X††, 7BCD, 9EFG, 12

Dimensions are approximate, not for construction purposes.

Single-Speed Non-Reversing Sizes 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 Starters

G

J**
Conduit Entry
Trade Size
D&T■ w/RE

K

L

M

N

O

14.38

12.13

2"

1.5"

3.25

3.13

10.25

12.63

14.38

12.13

2"

1.5"

3.25

3.13

10.25

6.00
6.00

12.63
14.25

14.06
16.00

12.13
13.54

3"
3"

2.5"
2.5"

3.25
3.25

3.13
3.94

10.25
11.66



12.00
12.00

17.25
17.50

19.88
20.18

11.00
15.00

(2) 3"
(2) 4"

(2) 2.5"
(2) 3.5"

3.25
4.00

3.00
3.50

10.78
13.03


41.50


18.00

Enclosure
Enclosure
Only
Size
Cat. #
Symbol
Size 0,1 FVNR Starter§
EBMSFA
A

A

B

C

D

E

F

18.25

17.25

19.00

6.00

12.63

Size 2 FVNR Starter
EBMSFB
B

25.75

24.75

26.50

6.00

Size 3,4 FVNR Starter
EBMSFD† D
EBMSFH
H

28.25
37.50

27.25
36.50

29.00
38.25

Size 5 FVNR Starter
EBMSFK† K
EBMSFL
L

43.12
53.25

41.50
51.50

42.25
52.88

§Use EBMSFB enclosure when S787 option is ordered with size 0 or 1 starter.
*1" Drilled & Tapped conduit entry for control conductors supplied with PLG plug (top & bottom)
**Conduit entrance for power conductors (top and bottom). (All conduit entrances supplied with RE reducer and PLG plug.)
†For Cutler-Hammer W200 Advantage® starters.
■Drilled & Tapped.
‡ Enclosure not suitable for NEMA 4 or 4X with cover mounted operators.
††With S752 or S753.

468

www.crouse-hinds.com

US: 1-866-764-5454

CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business

EPC Magnetic Line Starters
and Enclosures

Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D
Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G
Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G
Cl. III
NEMA 3, 4, 7CD, 9EFG, 12

Applications:

Standard Finishes:

EPC magnetic line starters and enclosures
are used:
• For across-the-line starting of polyphase
AC induction motors
• In locations made hazardous due to the
presence of flammable vapors, gases or
highly combustible dusts
• In damp, wet or corrosive locations
• Indoors or outdoors at petroleum
refineries, chemical and petrochemical
plants and other process industry
facilities where similar hazards exist
• To provide motor running protection,
undervoltage protection, and remote
starting and stopping

• Copper-free aluminum – natural
• Stainless steel – natural
• Sheet steel – electrogalvanized with
chromate finish

Features:

Options:

• Quick-opening covers – less than two
turns to remove or install
• Three section design for ease of
installation
• Water-shedding construction with female
threads on top cover, male threads on
bottom cover, and top cover skirted
• Specially located stops and locks ensure
adequate thread engagement and
prevent overtightening
• Separate replaceable mounting bracket
attached to the rear of the body provides
three-point suspension for quick
installation and leveling – one keyhole
slot at top and two open slots at bottom
• Bodies have two taper tapped conduit
hubs with integral bushings on the top,
and two more directly below
• Universal mounting plate and reset
mechanism will accommodate any of the
motor starters in catalog listing
• When interior mounting plate is removed,
line and load conductors are easily
pulled into the wiring chamber. The
interior assembly with starter attached is
then replaced, final connections made,
and covers assembled
• Furnished with third overload relay as
standard

The following special options are available
from factory by adding suffix to Cat. No.
and many are available in kit form for field
addition to existing units: See page 471 for
listing of kits

• NEC/CEC
Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups C, D
Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G
Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G
Class III
• NEMA/EEMAC: 3, 4, 7CD, 9EFG, 12
• UL Standard: 1203
• CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30

Standard Materials:

2C

Electrical Rating Range:
• Starter Sizes 0 to 1 inclusive

2C

Certifications and
Compliances:

Explosionproof
Dust-Ignitionproof
Raintight
Wet Locations
Watertight

Description
Suffix
Control circuit transformer 600/480/240–120 volts, 50 or 60 hertz
(Sizes 0 and 1 – 50VA, 100VA) Fusible – Secondary .....................................................
FT
Primary and secondary ............................................................................................. FTPS
Automatic reset overload relay .......................................................................................
S1
Less overload relays (lighting contactor) ........................................................................
CL
Less overload relays (motor contactor) ..........................................................................
CM
Auxiliary Contacts:*
1NO/1NC ................................................................................................................... S781
2NO/2NC ................................................................................................................... S782
3NO/3NC ................................................................................................................... S783
Pilot light holes drilled, tapped and plugged for future addition of pilot lights –
one hole ..................................................................................................................... S541
two holes ................................................................................................................... S542
Side bosses drilled and tapped same size as standard hubs ....................................... S366
Back boss drilled and tapped same size as standard hubs .......................................... S367
Standard Breather (Cl. I, Groups C, D; Cl. II, Groups E, F, G; Cl. III) .............................. S219
Standard Drain (Cl. I, Groups C, D; Cl. II, Groups E, F, G; Cl. III) ........................................ S198
Standard Breather and Drain (Cl. I, Groups C, D; Cl. II, Groups E, F, G; Cl. III) ................... S198V
Universal Breather-Drain (Cl. I, Groups C, D; Cl. II, Groups F, G) ................................... S454‡
(2) Universal-Breather Drains (Cl. I, Groups C, D; Cl. II, Groups F, G) ............................S454V‡
Pushbuttons (heavy duty):
START-STOP ............................................................................................................. PB3‡
Selector switches (standard duty):
ON-OFF ..................................................................................................................... RR2‡
HAND-OFF-AUTO...................................................................................................... RR3‡
Pilot lights:
Red, 120 volt ..............................................................................................................
J1
Green, 120 volt ...........................................................................................................
J3
Pilot light transformers:
240 volt† ....................................................................................................................
T2
480 volt† ....................................................................................................................
T4
600 volt† ....................................................................................................................
T5
Space heaters:
120 volt ......................................................................................................................
R11
240 volt ......................................................................................................................
R22
480 volt ......................................................................................................................
R44
*Application limited by starter or contactor design – consult factory.
†Required for pilot lights on other than 120 volt control circuits. One required for each lamp.
‡Not suitable for NEMA 4.

• Bodies and covers – copper-free
aluminum
• Reset handle – copper-free aluminum
• Reset shaft – stainless steel
• Interior parts – stainless steel
www.crouse-hinds.com

US: 1-866-764-5454

CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business

469

2C

EPC Magnetic Line
Starters and Enclosures

Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D
Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G
Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G
Cl. III
NEMA 3, 4, 7CD, 9EFG, 12

Explosionproof
Dust-Ignitionproof
Raintight
Wet Locations
Watertight

Ordering Information:
To order an enclosure complete with starter, insert the manufacturer's symbol in the
designated position of the catalog number. Symbols are shown in the footnote at the
bottom of this page. Specify HP, voltage, frequency, RPM, type and full load ampere rating
of motor – or specify ampere rating of heaters.
Enclosures only can be ordered. Select from listings.
Motor Starter

Enclosure

2C

Max. HP
NEMA/EEMAC Hub
Polyphase Volts Size
Size in.
2
3
3
5
5
71/2
10
10

120
120
240
480
600
240
480
600

0
1
0
0
0
1
1
1

11/4
11/4
11/4
11/4
11/4
11/4
11/4
11/4

Without With
Int.
Starter Starter
Dia. in. Cat. #
Cat. # §
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7

EPC97
EPC97
EPC97
EPC97
EPC97
EPC97
EPC97
EPC97

EPC970
EPC971
EPC970
EPC970
EPC970
EPC971
EPC971
EPC971

➀613
➀613
➀623
➀643
➀653
➀623
➀643
➀653

➀Motor Starters:
Manufacturer

Symbol

Allen-Bradley
General Electric
Square D
Cutler-Hammer

AB
G
D
W

Dimensions
In Inches*:
Single-Speed Non-Reversing Sizes 0, 1, Starters

Int. Dia.
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
j
k
l
m
n
p

EPC97

EPC97-FT
EPC97-FTPS

7"

7"

Dimensions

Dimensions†

105/ 8
1913/ 16
2513/ 16
1411/ 16
63/ 4
711/ 16
53/ 8
2
4
73/ 8
21/ 16
93/ 8
51/ 4
11/ 4

105/ 8
2413/ 16
3713/ 16
1411/ 16
113/ 4
711/ 16
53/ 8
9
4
73/ 8
21/ 16
93/ 8
51/ 4
11/ 4

*Dimensions are approximate, not for construction.
†For units with Control Circuit Transformer (suffix FT or FTPS).
§ Starters are furnished with three heaters when heater ratings
are fully specified.

470

www.crouse-hinds.com

US: 1-866-764-5454

CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business

Pushbutton stations and selector switches can be assembled in these enclosures in the field. 11" EPC Pilot light assemblies with 7" EPC only transformer and transformer mounting strap (for single pilot light) suffix S541 11" EPC only 2 pilot light assemblies with 2 transformers and transformer mounting strap (for double pilot light) suffix S542 Replacement pilot light transformer only (240V primary) Replacement pilot light transformer only (480V primary) Replacement pilot light transformer only (600V primary) Cat. # EMP015 ➀ KIT EPC87 ➀ ➁ KIT EPC813 ➀ ➁ KIT 2C Description START-STOP pushbutton station assembly Pilot Light Kits 7" EPC only EPC87 ➀ ➀ ➁ KIT 11" EPC only EPC813 ➀ ➀ ➁ KIT All units 15129 A All units 15130 A All units 15131 A ➀Insert color symbol from table below and ➁add primary voltage symbol Example: EPC87-➀-➀-➁-KIT with red and green pilot lights for 480 volts is EPC-J1-J3-T4-KIT. tapped and plugged (Cat.com US: 1-866-764-5454 Symbol Color Symbol J1 J3 J6 Clear Blue J10 J11 Voltage Symbol 240 480 600 T2 T4 T5 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 471 . # EPC PB3 KIT Replacement pushbutton station only for EPC-PB3-KIT 16320 N ON-OFF selector switch assembly (2 position) EPC RR2 KIT Replacement switch only for EPC-RR2-KIT ESWP126 HAND-OFF-AUTO selector switch assembly (3 position) EPC RR3 KIT Replacement switch only for EPC-RR3-KIT ESWP126 When EPC magnetic line starter and EPC combination line starter enclosures have been ordered with pilot light holes drilled. pilot lights can be assembled in the field. Description Pilot light assembly less transformer Applies to 7". No.EPC Magnetic Line Starters and Enclosures 2C Special Feature Kits Pushbutton Station and Selector Switch Kits EPC magnetic line starter and EPC combination line starter enclosures are provided as standard with switch operating shaft holes drilled. tapped and plugged. using kits listed below. suffix S541 and S542). Color Red Green Amber www. using kits listed below.crouse-hinds. Applies to 7" and 11" EPC Cat.

Div. 1. outside and inside Breather (ECD-N4B) and Drain (ECD-N4D) No Top Entries † Add heater suffix. F.25 2. Groups C.94 7.crouse-hinds. 1 & 2. 9(EFG) UL/cUL Listed Explosionproof Wet Locations Applications: • Explosionproof compact across-the-line manual NEMA starters for single and polyphase VAC or VDC motors • Used on drilling rigs for mud agitators and shakers where flammable or explosive gases are present • Also used for fans and blowers.06 2. 7(CD). G Class III NEMA 3. I.81 9.00 2. bearing. In Inches: 6. 9(EFG) UL Standard: 1203 cUL Standard: C22. Groups E. and bolts – stainless steel • O-ring gasket – Buna-N 0 3 1 0 2 DC Electrical Ratings: • NEMA starter sizes 0. and 1P • 1 to 10 HP 1 OPTIONS S752 S753 S198V NTE Dimensions MOTOR VOLTAGE 115 230 115 230 115 230 200-230 380-575 200-230 380-575 115 230 115 230 MAX. BOLTS Top/Bottom View Cover View Side View *NEMA 4X rated when ordered with epoxy powder coating.2C EMN Series Pushbutton Style Compact Manual NEMA Starters Cl.19 11. 4X*. 4. HORSEPOWER SINGLE POLYDC PHASE PHASE 1 2 2 3 3 5 3 5 7-1⁄2 10 1 1-1⁄2 1-1⁄2 2 CATALOG NUMBER EMN25 D20 EMN25 D21 EMN25 D21P EMN25 D30 EMN25 D31 EMN25 D20DC EMN25 D21DC Gray Epoxy Powder Coating. Division 1 & 2. pumps.06 7. 1 & 2. 30 D = Square D and G = GE.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business Bottom View No Top Entry Option . Groups C.35 9.2 No. outside only Gray Epoxy Powder Coating. followed by number of poles and NEMA size NO. III NEMA 3. Div. 7(CD). See next page for heater tables.50 ACCEPTS 5/16" OR 3/8" MTG. D Cl. Groups E. II. 4. 4X*. compressors.00 2X 3/4" CONDUIT ENTRIES 1. OF POLES NEMA SIZE 0 2 1 1P Standard Materials: • Enclosure – copper-free aluminum • Shaft. D Class II. 472 www. Division 1 & 2.94 7. BOLTS ACCEPTS 1/4" OR 5/16" MTG. F. and conveyors 2C Features: • Built to protect from mud and hosedirected water . G Cl.25 4.NEMA 4 • Robust protection for start-stop buttons • Option for no top entries for further protection from water ingress • Pushbutton can be locked in "OFF" position • Versatile mounting footprint accomodates field retrofit Catalog Numbering System: SERIES EMN SERIES EMN STARTER D31 OPTIONS† S198V Explosionproof Compact Manual Motor Starter ENCLOSURE TYPE 25 Compact Pushbutton Enclosure pre-drilled for Square D starter 27 Compact Pushbutton Enclosure pre-drilled for GE starter Certifications and Compliances: • • • • • • ENCLOSURE TYPE 25 STARTER D31 Class I.

23 B188 1.30 11.90 26.52 0.00 32.00 B400 B450 Following Selections for Size M-1P Only 0.80 1.29 1.49 5.18 1.14 0.68 B770 5.20 19.30 Following Selections for Size M-1P Only 23.10 12.55-5. 7(CD).46 10.43-1.43 10.81-2.47 2.60 17.20 29. Groups C.95-4.42 0.55 B240 1.18 3.13-8.62-2. and M-1P Only Following Selections for Size M-0 and M-1 Only B44 0.10 27.00 3.64-0.03-1.50 B370 2.69-5.05 8.11 B167 1.40-0.20-11.20 17.77 B116 0.11-3. Heater Table (Square D) Heater Table (General Electric) Motor Full-Load Current (A) Suffix 1 PH Max.38 1.53-0.82-0.30-33.41-3.20 24.77 0.34 0.40 0.00 B690 4.60 12. 9(EFG) UL/cUL Listed 2C Explosionproof Wet Locations Select heater elements based on motor nameplate listed Full Load Amps (FLA).45 7.81 0.60-0.40 9.15 B128 8. 4X*. 4.24-1.10-36.20-18.com 0.61 2.36-7.78-0.60 B140 9.80 15.30 17.21 B155 10.70-15.59 0.20-7.16 B330 2.10 13.64 1.70-20.10 B360 23.56-1. Groups E.00 B220 14.00 33.49 3.00 16.80 2.88 5.47 B71 0.56 9.06 1.74-0.70 13.18 B820 5.41-0.47 0.70-0.20 24.12 B115 7.66 0.20-29.10 25.70 21.22 1.56 B81 0.37 2.02 0.57 0.70 7.93-2.84-8.60 B320 20.76-1.19-5.97-1.83 6.70 34.50-12.12 1.90-13.85 6.30-26.20 22.70-23.52-6.30-12.00 Following Selections for Size M-1 Only 198B 214B 228B 250B 273B 303B 19.48-0.66 1.15-1.92 B300 2.27 3.00 25.45 2.24 3.74-6.59 9.20-26.98 1.19 B102 7.51-2.51 4.30 11.40-17.40 2C B195 B220 B250 16.16 B485 3.32 B51 0.60 17.03 2.81 B415 3.48-9.30 5.45 0.40 20.48 0.10 1.00-16.20-21.10 B250 16.10 19.94 3.31-2.54 3. II.47 1.69 B103 0. Div.86 B130 0.66 10. I.40-19. F.28 2.89 4.30 4.33-0.00 2.00 778A 867A 955A 104B 113B 125B 137B 151B 163B 180B 198B 214B 228B 250B 273B 303B 330B www.80-24.82-3.29-0.40 B550 3.37-0.22 8.57-0.70 12.60-11.61-9.36 B57 0.33-0.29 0.92-1.22-10.60 B280 17. M-1.98 8.70 19.99 2. 1 & 2. G Cl.16-8.20-1.91 0.29 4.50 11. 1 & 2.67-0.09-7.17-2.60 22.33 1.69 0.01-4.77-4.20 15.37 B210 1.94 6.20-27.66 1.20-17.87 0.35 5.60 US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 8.20-13.80 10.52 0.81 0.20 1.78 2.00-3.40 30. One heater is furnished with two-pole AC or DC starters and three heaters with three-pole starters.10 23.25-4.10 16.63 B92 0.87-0.73 0.89 0.20 B195 12.71 0.40 16.76 B625 4.20 15.51 B910 6.73 4. III NEMA 3.54 3. Div.40 0.34 0.37 0.60 13.96 B145 1.crouse-hinds.00 Following Selections for Size M-1 and M-1P Only 36A 39A 43A 48A 54A 60A 66A 71A 78A 87A 97A 109A 118A 131A 148A 163A 184A 196A 220A 239A 268A 301A 326A 356A 379A 419A 466A 526A 592A 630A 695A 778A 867A 955A 104B 113B 125B 137B 151B 163B 180B 198B 214B B360 B400 B450 B500 11.37-0.63 0.97 1.71 2.60 13.84-10.70 21.50 8.36 0.47 7.90 11.48 1.44 0.39 B63 0.00 12.31 0.30-5.90 5.38-1.42 1.38-3.30-12.08 5.18 2.65-1.83 8.17-3.EMN Series Pushbutton Style Compact Manual NEMA Starters Cl.36 7.12-1.88 9.46-0.00 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 473 . Trip rating of elements is 125% of motor minimum FLA listed for the elements.58 0.64 0.86 4.10 B175 11.87 3.30 15. D Cl.80 21.75 B265 1.52 0. Motor Full-Load Current (A) 3 PH Suffix 1 PH 3 PH Following Selections for Size M-0.76 3.

63-1 1-1.6-2.81 9.crouse-hinds.5 2 1 2 1. 1 & 2.5 10 10 15 20 0.5 2.25-0.16 0. D Class II.25 0.33 0.1 0.16 0.NEMA 4 and robust protection of buttons • Option for no top entries for further protection from water ingress • Pushbutton can be locked in "OFF" position • Versatile mounting footprint accomodates field retrofit SERIES EMN STARTER WP16 OPTIONS S198V Explosionproof Compact Manual Motor Starter ENCLOSURE TYPE 26 Compact Pushbutton Enclosure pre-drilled for Cutler-Hammer™ Starter STARTER WP16 W = Cutler-Hammer™ followed by starter type suffix • WP16 = IEC. 1 & 2. I.5 1 0.25 ACCEPTS 1/4" OR 5/16" MTG. outside only Gray Epoxy Powder Coating. F.00 4. 9(EFG) UL Standard: 1203 cUL Standard: C22. fibers.6 1.75 1. BOLTS 2X 3/4" CONDUIT ENTRIES 1.19 11. G Class III NEMA 3. Groups C.06 7.5 0.6 2. 7(CD).3 6. .4 0. Division 1 & 2. calculate motor rating according to rated current.2C EMN Series Pushbutton Style Compact Manual IEC Starters Cl. or filings accumulate • IEC starters are more precisely rated and.25 0.5 3 5 7.5 0. II.94 7. turbines. as a result.16 0.25 0.3-10 8-12 10-16 16-20 20-25 CATALOG NUMBER 0.16-0.5-4 4-6. 4X†. Division 1 & 2. save users money during operation • Sophisticated IEC design reduces risk of motor damage during a fault Catalog Numbering System: SERIES EMN 2C Features: • Built to protect from mud and hosedirected water .00 2. and bolts – stainless steel • O-ring gasket – Buna-N Electrical Ratings: 200-208V * * * * * * 0.25 ACCEPTS 5/16" OR 3/8" MTG.06 2.5 0.5 * 0.1-0. Div. outside and inside Breather (ECD1-N4B) and Drain (ECD1-N4D) No Top Entries 6.75 1 2 3 3 5 5 Three Phase 230V 480V * * * * * * * * * 0.6A • W012 = IEC. Groups E.5 3 2 3 Standard Materials: • Enclosure – copper-free aluminum • Shaft.5 4 6. 7(CD). 1. and conveyors where ignitable dusts. Groups E. 9(EFG) UL/cUL Listed Explosionproof Wet Locations Applications: • Explosionproof compact across-the-line starting and stopping for small single and polyphase AC motors • Used for small machine tools. BOLTS Top/Bottom View Cover View 2. 4. fans and blowers. D Cl. 4X†.2 No. 474 www. compressors.4 0.94 9.50 Side View †NEMA 4X rated when ordered with epoxy powder coating.75 0.250.12 0. III NEMA 3.63 0.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business Bottom View No Top Entry Option .5 0.75 2 1 3 3 5 3 7. 12A Certifications and Compliances: • • • • • • ENCLOSURE TYPE 26 RATED ADJUSTMENT UNINTERRUPTED RANGE FLA CURRENT MAXIMUM HORSEPOWER Class I. • IEC Cutler-Hammer™ Type XTPB Manual Starter • 1 to 15 HP OPTIONS S752 S753 S198V NTE Dimensions In Inches: Gray Epoxy Powder Coating.5 1.5 5 10 5 10 7.63 1 1.35 7.5 15 600V * * * * 0. G Cl. 30 Single Phase 115V 230V 0.16A • W1P6 = IEC. Div. bearing. pumps. Groups C.4-0. 4.3 10 12 16 20 25 EMN26 WP16 EMN26 WP25 EMN26 WP40 EMN26 WP63 EMN26 W001 EMN26 W1P6 EMN26 W2P5 EMN26 W004 EMN26 W6P3 EMN26 W010 EMN26 W012 EMN26 W016 EMN26 W020 EMN26 W025 *In this range. F. Specifi ed values to NEC Table 430.

EMN Series Manual Line
Starters and Enclosures

Explosionproof
Dust-Ignitionproof
Raintight
Wet Locations

Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D
Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G
Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G
Cl. III
NEMA 3, 7CD, 9EFG, 12

600VAC Maximum
Applications:

Options:

EMN manual line starters and enclosures
are used:
• For manual across-the-line starting of
single and polyphase AC motors
• To provide motor running protection and
manual starting and stopping
• In locations made hazardous due to the
presence of flammable vapors, gases, or
high combustible dusts
• For installation in petroleum refineries,
chemical and petrochemical plants, and
other process industry facilities
• In damp, wet, or corrosive locations

The following special options are available
from factory by adding suffix to Cat. #:
Description
Suffix
Standard Breather (Cl. I, Groups C,
D; Cl. II, Groups E, F, G; Cl. III) ........ S219
Standard Drain (Cl. I, Groups C, D;
Cl. II, Groups E, F, G; Cl. III) ............ S198
Standard Breather and Drain (Cl. I,
Groups C, D; Cl. II, Groups E, F, G;
Cl. III) ................................................ S198V
Universal Breather-Drain (Cl. I,
Groups C, D; Cl. II, Groups F, G) .... S454
(2) Universal Breather-Drains (Cl. I,
Groups C, D; Cl. II, Groups F, G) .... S454V

2C

• Compact, rectangular enclosure makes
optimum use of internal space
• Operating handle may be padlocked in
either "ON" or "OFF" position
• Compact design allows installation in
area where space is limited
• Furnished with drilled and tapped
conduit openings
• Polyphase manual starters are furnished
with third overload relay as standard

2C

Ordering Information:

Features:

Specify HP, voltage, frequency, number of
phases, RPM, type and full load ampere
rating of motor – or specify ampere rating
of heaters.
Two pole starters require one heater; three
pole starters have three heaters.

Motor Starter

Certifications and
Compliances:
• NEC/CEC
Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups C, D
Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G
Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G
Class III
• NEMA/EEMAC: 3, 7CD, 9EFG, 12
• UL Standard: 1203
• CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 14

NEMA
Size

Poles
(Phase)

Max. AC HP Ratings
208/
115V
240V

M-0
M-1
M-1P
M-0

2
2
2
3
3
3

1
2
3
2
2
3

M-1

(1PH)
(1PH)
(1PH)
(3PH)
(1PH)
(3PH)

2
3
5
3
3
71/2

480/
600V

Enclosure With Starter
Cat. #
EMN24 W20
EMN24 W21
EMN24 W21P

5
10

EMN24 W30
EMN24 W31

Enclosure Without Starter
Starter Manufacturer

Enclosure Cat. #†

Standard Materials:

Cutler-Hammer

EMN24

• Bodies, covers and toggle operator –
copper-free aluminum
• Operating shaft – stainless steel
• Internal operating bail – sheet steel or
aluminum

Dimensions*
In Inches:

Standard Finishes:
• Copper-free aluminum – natural
• Stainless steel – natural
• Sheet steel – electrogalvanized with
chromate finish

Electrical Rating Ranges:
• Starter sizes 0, 1, 1P

†Enclosures are furnished with two 11/ 4" drilled and tapped openings with 11/4" to 1" reducers.
*Dimensions are approximate, not for construction purposes.

www.crouse-hinds.com

US: 1-866-764-5454

CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business

475

2C

GUSC Enclosures

2C

with Manual Motor Starters

Explosionproof
Dust-Ignitionproof
Raintight
Wet Locations

Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D
Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G
Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G
Cl. III
NEMA 3, 7CD, 9EFG, 12

Applications:

Size Ranges:

GUSC manual motor starters are used:
• In a rigid metallic conduit system for
surface mounting adjacent to or remote
from the equipment being controlled
• To prevent arcing of the enclosed
switches from causing ignition of a
specific hazardous atmosphere, or
atmospheres, external to the enclosure
• In industrial areas such as chemical
plants, oil and gas refineries, paint and
varnish manufacturing plants, gasoline
bulk loading terminals, grain elevators,
grain processing industries, coal
processing or handling areas, or metal
handling or finishing areas where the
atmosphere may contain hazardous
gases and/or dust
• In non-hazardous areas where sturdy,
durable enclosures are required

• Hub size – 3/4" (through feed
arrangement)

Features:

Cat. #

Style

• Enclosures are of rugged metal
construction with mounting lugs and
taper tapped hubs with integral
bushings, in a through feed or bottom
feed arrangement, for connection to the
rigid metallic conduit
• Cover is threaded, which provides for
fast and proper assembly
• Provided with a threaded operating shaft
and bushing
• Provision is made to use a padlock with
1
/4" hasp, to lock the operating lever in
an "ON" or "OFF" position
• Body and cover threads treated with
lubricant at factory to provide
raintightness

GUSC2013-MS*

3-Pole 30A

Electrical Rating Ranges:
• See below

Ordering Information:
Rating/Horsepower
120VAC /
3 HP

240VAC /
71/2 HP

480VAC /
15 HP

600VAC /
15 HP

30A

30A

20A

Hub Size
/4"

3

Rating/Horsepower
Cat. #

Style

120VAC /
3 HP

GUSC2036-MS

3-Pole

40A

240VAC /
71/2 HP

480VAC /
15 HP

600VAC /
20 HP

40A

40A

40A

Hub Size
/4"

3

*Also rated for 30A, 250VDC, 15 HP.

Dimensions
In Inches:

Certifications and
Compliances:
• NEC/CEC:
Class I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D
Class II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G
Class II, Div. 2, Groups F, G
Class III
• NEMA/EEMAC: 3, 7CD, 9EFG, 12
• UL Standard: 1203
• CSA Standard: C22.2, No. 30

Standard Materials:



Body – Feraloy® iron alloy
Cover – copper-free aluminum
Shaft – stainless steel
Shaft bushing – stainless steel

Standard Finishes:

Dimensions are approximate, not for construction purposes.

Type
Size
Through Feed Hubs – Fig. 1
3-Pole

a

b

c

d

e

f

63/16

61/16

47/8

41/8

53/8

3

• Feraloy iron alloy – electrogalvanized
and aluminum acrylic paint
• Copper-free aluminum – natural
• Stainless steel – natural
476

www.crouse-hinds.com

US: 1-866-764-5454

CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business

EFD Series Manual Motor Starting
Switches and Enclosures

Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B*, C, D
Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G
Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G
Cl. III
NEMA 3, 7B*CD, 9EFG, 12

2C

Explosionproof
Dust-Ignitionproof
Raintight
Wet Locations

Applications:
EFD manual motor starting and stopping
switch enclosures are used:
• For manual starting of small AC or DC
motors
• In locations made hazardous due to the
presence of flammable vapors, gases or
highly combustible dusts
• For installation at petroleum refineries,
chemical and petrochemical plants and
in other process industry facilities where
similar hazards exist

Features:
EFD dead end

• NEC/CEC
Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups B*, C, D
Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G
Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G
Class III
• NEMA: 3, 7B*CD, 9EFG, 12
• UL Standard: 1203
• CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30

EFDC through feed

Electrical Ratings
Without Overload Protection
With Switches
Poles Cat. #

Certifications and
Compliances:

2C

• Enclosure is small and compact
• Accurately ground flange on both body
and cover for flame-tight joint
• Switch can be padlocked in either "ON"
or "OFF" positions
• Dead end (EFD) or through feed (EFDC)
hubs in 3/4" to 1" size

Switch Ratings Amps

HP

2

Square D
Class 2510
Type KO-1

250VAC
30

115VAC
1

3

GE TC2368S

30A., 240VAC, 7-1 / 2 hp
20A., 600VAC, 15 hp

600VAC
20

230VAC
2

460–575VAC
3

Ordering Information
Through feed

Dead end
Poles Hub Size in. With Switch Cat. #
2

EFD218 T8
EFD318 T8

2

/4
1

EFD2419
EFD3419

3

Standard Materials:

3

• Bodies and covers – Feraloy iron alloy
• Operating handle – type 6 / 6 nylon
• Operating shaft – stainless steel

Dimensions

3

®

Poles Hub Size in. With Switch Cat. #

/4
1

3

3

/4
1

EFDC218 T8
EFDC318 T8

/4
1

EFDC2419
EFDC3419

3

In Inches:

Standard Finishes:
• Feraloy iron alloy – electrogalvanized and
aluminum acrylic paint
• Type 6 / 6 nylon – natural (black)
• Stainless steel – natural

Options:
The following special options are available
from factory by adding suffix to Cat. #:
Description
Suffix
For use in Group B hazardous areas GB*

Dimensions are approximate, not for construction purposes
Hub Size
3
/4
1

Dim. "h"

Dim."a"

/8
1

13

7

/16
/16

15

*Add GB suffix. Seals must be installed within 11/2" of each
conduit opening for Group B usage.

www.crouse-hinds.com

US: 1-866-764-5454

CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business

477

not for construction purposes. 7B*CD. G Cl. Division 2. G Class II. G Cl. II. coal processing or handling areas. F. oil and gas refineries. motor running protection EDSC2199 Standard Materials: Standard Finishes: • Bodies – Feraloy® iron alloy (U. II. F.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business .2 No. 9EFG • UL Standard: 1203 • CSA Standard: C22. paint and varnish manufacturing plants. Groups E. D Cl. or metal handling or finishing areas where atmosphere may contain hazardous gases and/or dust • In non-hazardous areas where sturdy. Div. Groups E. III NEMA 3.). copper-free aluminum (Canada) • Shafts & bushings – stainless steel • Sealing enclosures – copper-free aluminum • Feraloy iron alloy – electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint • Copper-free aluminum – natural • Type 6 / 6 nylon – black • Stainless steel – natural Dimensions Options: In Inches: Description Suffix For use in Group B hazardous areas GB* Bodies and covers (single and two gang units) – copper-free aluminum SA Side View Features: Factory sealed devices have many distinct advantages: • Reduce installation problems • Eliminate external seals • Lower installation costs • Improve safety • Mounting lugs and taper tapped hubs with integral bushings • Large machine screws for fastening covers to bodies • Lockout hole for padlock having 1/ 4" hasp is provided • Close tolerances in machining of wide. "i" /8 1 13 7 /16 /16 15 Front View Single gang Two gang Certifications and Compliances: • NEC/CEC Class I. D Class II. Division 1 & 2. Groups F. C. Groups B*. Division 1. Dimensions are approximate. I. grain elevators. 2. in the case of units with heaters. Groups F. Div. C. 7B*CD. 9EFG Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations 2C Applications: Factory sealed enclosures are installed in a rigid metallic conduit system for surface mounting adjacent to or remote from equipment being controlled and are used: • To prevent arcing of enclosed device from causing ignition of a specific hazardous atmosphere or atmospheres external to the enclosure • In industrial areas such as chemical plants. Groups B*. Div. durable enclosures are required • In conjunction with magnetic starters or contactors for remote control of motors Manual motor starting switch enclosures are used: • For manual starting of small AC or DC motors • To provide manual starting and stopping and. 1. gasoline bulk loading terminals.S. 30 Surface covers have same length and width as single & 2 gang bodies. grain processing industries. 1 & 2.EDS Series Factory Sealed Manual Motor Starting Switches and Enclosures 2C Cl. G Class III • NEMA/EEMAC: 3. *Seals must be installed within 11/2" of each conduit opening in Division 1. "h" Dim. mating flanges and journalled shafts and bearings produce flametightness of enclosure joints • Dead end (EDS) or through feed (EDSC) hubs – 3/4" or 1" sizes EDS2299 Hub Size 3 /4 1 Dim.crouse-hinds. 478 www.

63 1.09 3.90 6.75 1.0 13. Select heater from the table below individual listings and use symbol number as second section of the Cat.92 3. D Cl.77 4. # /4 hp 1 hp GE CR101 Y GE CR101 H 1 2 1 hp 1 hp 115–230 Volts DC Cat. multiply full load motor current by 0.4 12. Insert symbol 0 (zero) to omit heater.79 0. G Cl.8 12.57 0.13 2. These heaters are for motors rated 40°C continuously.03 6. Groups F.01 3.87 0.60 5.2 P22 P23 P24 P25 P26 P27 P28 P29 P30 P31 P32 P33 P34 P35 P36 P37 P38 P39 . # EDS2199 ➀ EDS3199 ➀ EDSC2199 ➀ EDSC3199 ➀ 3 /4 1 EDS21100 ➀ EDS31100 ➀ EDSC21100 ➀ EDSC31100 ➀ 1 /4 1 EDS2299 ➀ EDS3299 ➀ EDSC2299 ➀ EDSC3299 ➀ 2 3 /4 1 EDS22100 ➀ EDS32100 ➀ EDSC22100 ➀ EDSC32100 ➀ 2 Two Gang 3 1 hp 1 hp Hub Size Poles in.14 1.8 16.46 0. G Cl.EDS Series Factory Sealed Manual Motor Starting Switches and Enclosures Cl. I.27 3.40 2.72 8. # Through feed Cat.43 6.9 and use this value to select heaters.53 .6 14.19 1. II.60 8.83 7.crouse-hinds. Motor Full-Load Amps Eaton's Crouse-Hinds Symbol Number Max. 1 & 2. II. No.32 3. C.98 1.04 1.88 2.88 4.41 6.37 1.25 8. *Add GB suffix.48 .78 . Groups B*. # EDS21093 ➀ EDS31093 ➀ EDSC21093 ➀ EDSC31093 ➀ /4 1 EDS21094 ➀ EDS31094 ➀ EDSC21094 ➀ EDSC31094 ➀ /4 1 EDS22093 ➀ EDS32093 ➀ EDSC22093 ➀ EDSC32093 ➀ /4 1 EDS22094 ➀ EDS32094 ➀ EDSC22094 ➀ EDSC32094 ➀ 3 2 1 2C Dead end Cat.71 0. Div. # Maximum HP Ratings 115–230 115 Poles Volts AC Volts DC /4 hp A B BUL 600 TOX4 A B BUL 600 TOX5 1 2 3 Hub Poles Size in. # 1 hp 1 hp Two Gang 3 1 3 2 Heater Table (General Electric) Heater Table (Allen-Bradley) Max. Single Gang 3 /4 1 1 Through feed Cat.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 479 . Single Gang 3 /4 1 1 Dead end Cat.58 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P9 P10 P11 P12 P13 P14 P15 P16 P17 P18 P19 P20 P21 2.24 8. Motor Full-Load Amps Eaton's Crouse-Hinds Symbol Number Max. 9EFG Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations 2C Ordering Information With Allen-Bradley Bulletin 600 Switches With General Electric Switches Maximum HP Ratings 115–230 Poles Volts AC 230 Volts DC Cat. 2.86 .95 2.08 1.75 10.0 G22 G23 G24 G25 G26 G27 G28 G29 G30 G31 G32 G33 G34 G35 G36 G37 G38 G39 G40 G41 G42 ➀ Includes one interchangeable heater.95 1.13 2.49 1. Motor Full-Load Amps Eaton's Crouse-Hinds Symbol Number 0.17 0.98 7.25 0. 7B*CD.6 11. Motor Full-Load Amps Eaton's Crouse-Hinds Symbol Number Max.9 9.76 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 G7 G8 G9 G10 G11 G12 G13 G14 G15 G16 G17 G18 G19 G20 G21 3. 1. Div.51 4.32 0.00 5.25 1. III NEMA 3.30 1.39 0. Div.43 5.22 4.6 10. F.78 1. www.58 1.71 .5 13.32 2.5 15.93 5.53 2. Symbol 0 (zero) must be used to indicate heater omitted.56 3.43 1. Groups E. For motors rated 50°C or 55°C.21 0.95 9.16 4.65 .58 . Example: EDS2199-P5. Seals must be installed within 11/ 2" of each conduit opening for Group B usage.

39 7.03 7.71 W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6 W7 W8 W9 W10 W11 W12 W13 W14 W15 W16 W17 W18 W19 W20 2.78 .00 W21 W22 W23 W24 W25 W26 W27 W28 W29 W30 W31 W32 W33 W34 W35 W36 W37 W38 W39 ➀ Includes one interchangeable heater.46 9.79 5. F.26 5.12 16.2C EDS Series Factory Sealed Manual Motor Starting Switches and Enclosures Cl. Div. Groups F. # /4 hp 1 hp 1 1 /4 hp /4 hp 3 WEST MST01 WEST MST02 Dead end Cat.35 10. Single Gang 3 /4 1 1 /4 1 3 2C 2 Two Gang 3 /4 1 1 /4 1 3 2 120 Volts DC 240 Volts DC Cat. I.47 2.03 1.83 1. III NEMA 3. G Cl.23 2.99 2.95 1.67 1. # Through feed Cat.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations . Example: EDS2199-P5.35 12. No.53 .74 8.48 .47 13.71 .39 4. G Cl. II. 7B*CD.99 4. These heaters are for motors rated 40°C continuously.83 6. Motor Full-Load Amps Eaton's Crouse-Hinds Symbol Number Max.95 3. Select heater from the table below individual listings and use symbol number as second section of the Cat. C. Groups E. Motor Full-Load Amps Eaton's Crouse-Hinds Symbol Number .58 . Div. # EDS21101 ➀ EDS31101 ➀ EDSC21101 ➀ EDSC31101 ➀ EDS21102 ➀ EDS31102 ➀ EDSC21102 ➀ EDSC31102 ➀ EDS22101 ➀ EDS32101 ➀ EDSC22101 ➀ EDSC32101 ➀ EDS22102 ➀ EDS32102 ➀ EDSC22102 ➀ EDSC32102 ➀ Heater Table (Cutler-Hammer) Max. Groups B*.43 . Seals must be installed within 11/ 2" of each conduit opening for Group B usage.27 1. II.30 11.crouse-hinds.27 3.15 1.35 1. For motors rated 50°C or 55°C.87 . 2. Div. 480 www.59 3. 1. 9EFG With Cutler-Hammer Switches Maximum HP Ratings 120–240 32 Poles Volts AC Volts DC 1 2 /4 hp /4 hp 1 hp 1 hp 1 1 Poles Hub Size in. multiply full load motor current by 0.67 15.51 1. Insert symbol 0 (zero) to omit heater. Symbol 0 (zero) must be used to indicate heater omitted. *Add GB suffix.64 .9 and use this value to select heaters. D Cl. 1 & 2.

crouse-hinds. C.Impact-resistant thermoplastic • Cover Screws . Zones 1 and 2 IP66. Zones 1 and 2. Div. Groups E. T6 Class II.PTB 99 ATEX 1162 Certified Ex de IIC. G (cUL) CENELEC . Groups A. NEMA 4X 2C Applications: • Explosion protected manual motor starters are used in a metallic conduit or cable system for surface mounting to protect motors against overload and phase failure. 1. IP66 Protection Enclosure meets UL 94-VO UV rated • Enclosure Gasket . F. T6 Up to 690 VAC Up to 25 A 2A See table on next page Tripping at 15% – 75% V-rated Switching . Division 2. C. Aux./2.PTB 99-ATEX 1162 Ex de IIC. Aux. T6. I.Fiberglass-reinforced polyester Nonmetallic. Contact Short Circuit Under Voltage Trip (A)Ex ed IIC T5. AEx de IIB + H2.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 481 .5 Ibs. I. Groups A. Ex de IIB+H2.Silicon • Handle . T6 25 Amp. F. Features: Certifications and Compliances: • • • • • • • UL/cUL Listed Class I. T6 Zones 21 and 22 IP66. D Class I.5 Kg. 2. Standard Materials: • Enclosure . Div.GHG 635 Series Explosion Protected Manual Motor Starters UL/cUL Listed Cl.Stainless steel • Conduit Entries . Groups E. B. making installation quick and easy • Switch handle provides clear indication of switch position • Lockable handle meets OSHA lockout/tagout requirements. T6.Ground continuity www. II. Zones 1 and 2. corrosion resistant Increased safety Ex-e protection Impact Resistant NEMA 4X. Division 1.on when V> 80% V-rated Connection Terminals Connection Terminals.5 mm2 2 x 3/4" Myers hubs 5. Contact Conduit or Cable Entries Weight Up to 10mm2 2 x 2. D Cl. T5.Zinc Myers Hubs • Brass Mounting plate . provision for 3 padlocks • Large rotary handle provides easy gripping with gloved hands • Captive cover screws Technical Data Type of Protection Rated Voltage Rated Current Rated Current. Zones 1 and 2 Ex de IIC. G (cUL) CENELEC . NEMA 4X 2C • Explosion protected factory sealed circuit breaker and manual motor starter • Innovative break-line in cover allows full wiring access. 690 VAC Non-metallic Enclosure Cl. B.

6 A 1. Div. T5. 1102. 2C Ordering Information Setting Range or rated current Cat.40 – 0.6 A – 2. Groups A. II. contacts.0 A – 6.5 – 16 A 16 – 20 A 20 – 25 A GHG GHG GHG GHG GHG GHG GHG GHG GHG GHG GHG GHG GHG GHG 635 635 635 635 635 635 635 635 635 635 635 635 635 635 1101 1101 1101 1101 1101 1101 1101 1101 1101 1101 1101 1101 1101 1101 L0101 L0102 L0103 L0104 L0105 L0106 L0107 L0108 L0109 L0110 L0111 L0112 L0113 L0114 Accessory Options† 1 = without aux.63 A 0.5 A 12.6 A 1.5 A 2.0 A 4.0 A – 12.5 A 12. No back-up fuse required. contact 1 NO + 1NC 3 = with aux.3 A – 9.PTB 99 ATEX 1162 Certified Ex de IIC. 2. I. T6 Zones 21 and 22 IP66.3 A 6.0 A N/A* N/A* N/A* N/A* N/A* 75 60 55 50 N/A* N/A* 60 40 30 27 25 22 20 N/A* 40 10 7 5 4.5 A – 4. 690 VAC Non-metallic Enclosure UL/cUL Listed Cl. T6 Cl.40 A 0. contact 2 NO †Catalog numbers on this page are shown without auxiliary contacts. contact 2 = with aux. Div.5 A – 16.0 A – 20.crouse-hinds.25 – 0. NEMA 4X Short Circuit Protection Setting Range 400 VAC AIC 500 VAC AIC 690 VAC AIC 0.16 A 0.0 A – 25. C. Wiring Diagram Dimensions In Inches: 482 www. AEx de IIB + H2.0 – 12. I. Zones 1 and 2 Ex de IIC. To add aux.16 – 0.63 – 1. G (cUL) CENELEC .25 A 0. B.0 A 20.0 – 1.0 A 1. T6.0 A 4. D Cl. Ex.0 A 9.1 A – 1.0 A 9.1 – 0.3 – 9.0 A 16. change last number in "1101" to a 2 or 3.5 4 3.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business .0 – 6. F.5 3 * Short-circuit proof. Groups E.3 A 6. Zones 1 and 2. 1.5 A 2. # 0.GHG 635 Series Explosion Protected Manual Motor Starters 2C 25 Amp.6 – 2.5 – 4.

com US: 1-866-764-5454 1 /2 3 /8 5 /8 7 7 /4 /8 /4 3 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 483 . 4.MC Series Manual Motor Starting Switches and Enclosures NEMA 3.crouse-hinds. not for construction purposes.2 No. chemical plants and outdoor locations • To provide motor running protection and manual starting and stopping Features: MC dead end 2C • Enclosure is compact and gasketed to meet NEMA/EEMAC 4 requirements for watertightness • Switch can be padlocked in either the "ON" or "OFF" positions • Provided with dead end (MC) or throughfeed (MCC) hubs – 1/2" and 3/4" sizes – with mounting feet MCC through feed Dimensions In Inches*: Certifications and Compliances: • NEMA/EEMAC: 3. Hub Size a b www. 14 Standard Materials: • Body and cover – Feraloy® iron alloy • Operating handle – copper-free aluminum • Operating shaft – stainless steel Standard Finishes: • Feraloy – electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint • Copper-free aluminum – natural • Stainless steel – natural *Dimensions are approximate. 12 Raintight Wet Locations 2C Applications: MC manual motor starting switches and enclosures are used: • For manual starting of small AC and DC motors of one horsepower or less (see next page for ratings) • In damp. meat packing plants. 12 • UL Standard: 508 • CSA Standard: C22. 4. wet or corrosive locations such as dairies.

70 10. # ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ MCC1212B MCC2212B MCC1212B MCC2212B Heater Rating Eaton's Crouse-Hinds Symbol Number .64 .24 – 2.12 15.95 2.45 1.70 12.75 – 8.60 W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6 W7 W8 W9 W10 W11 W12 W13 W14 W15 W16 W17 W18 W19 W20 W21 W22 W23 W24 W25 W26 W27 W28 W29 W30 W31 W32 W33 W34 W35 W36 W37 W38 W39 ➀ Includes one interchangeable heater.39 6.71 .60 11.30 10.36 – 12.72 – . No.72 – 2.2C MC Series Manual Motor Starting Switches and Enclosures MC Manual Motor Starting Switches Heater Table Manufacturer Poles Cat.40 – .27 – 5.10 3.99 2.48 – 2.MC 2C NEMA 3.74 .99 4.60 1.16 – 1.00 6.65 – .60 7.89 .36 – 1.26 5.20 1.96 – 3.70 4.28 – 1.9 and use this value to select heaters.79 4.44 – .83 5.68 – 1.40 3.54 – .15 1.35 1.61 .71 2.50 5.35 9.49 – .13 – 16.95 .79 – .47 – 9.84 – 1.00 5.MCC Single Gang (Through Feed) Poles Hub Size in.43 .30 8. Symbol 0 (zero) may be used to indicate heater omitted.31 – 11.74 7. multiply full load motor current by 0.10 1. # Cutler-Hammer Cutler-Hammer 1 2 MST01 MST02 Full Load Motor Current .96 – 1.58 .83 1. Enclosure With Switch Cat.36 – 10.27 1.90 14. Select heater from table above and use symbol number as second section of the Cat.50 2.80 9.68 – 15.10 2.30 1. # ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ MC1212B MC2212B MC1212B MC2212B Ordering Information .81 . # 1 1 2 2 1 /2 /4 /2 3 /4 MCC1211 MCC2211 MCC1212 MCC2212 3 1 Without Switch Cat.98 1.00 Maximum Horsepower Ratings Volts 1-Pole 2-Pole 120 / 240 AC 32 DC 120 / 240 DC 240 DC 1 1 /4 1 1 /4 1 /4 1 Ordering Information .27 3.53 .78 .84 – 6.47 2.35 11.crouse-hinds.10 18.20 15.88 – .47 12.04 – 1.03 7.46 8.03 1.55 .04 – 7.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business .10 4.59 3.00 – 2.00 – 4.40 – 7. 4.52 – 1. Example: MC1211-W5.67 1. These heaters are for motors rated 40°C continuously.40 – 4.51 1.39 4.50 6.80 3.00 8.70 1.30 2.60 – 3.50 .67 13.60 17.48 – 13.59 – .67 .90 2.28 – 3. Enclosure With Switch Cat.23 2. # 1 1 2 2 1 /2 /4 /2 3 /4 MC1211 MC2211 MC1212 MC2212 3 1 Without Switch Cat.87 . For motors rated 50°C or 55°C.48 .80 – 5. 484 www. 12 Raintight Wet Locations Single Gang (Dead End) Poles Hub Size in.

2C Corrosion-Resistant Dust-tight Watertight Weatherproof NEMA 3. Not to be used for construction purposes unless approved. HP Rating 115 VAC 200–230 VAC 460–575 VAC Max.crouse-hinds. and 12 Options: 2 71/2 /2 /4 NSSC D12 NSSC D22 /2 /4 NSSC D13 NSSC D23 1 2 3 1 3 3 Enclosures Only Enclosure Type Hub Size Through Feed Cat. # Manual Motor Starting Switch 1 /2 NSSC1 /4 NSSC2 /2 NFSC1 /4 NFSC2 3 Fractional HP Starter 1 3 Dimensions* In Inches: *Dimensions are approximate. 1/2" or 3/4" size • Indicating plate is made of stainless steel Ordering Information NSSC Series Manual Motor Starting Switch Without Overload Protection With Square D Switches Poles Max. # • NEMA 3. NFSC) hubs. 4X. Ratings 250 VDC 600 VDC 2 3 1 2 30 30 Poles • Grounding plate or bushing – see page 677 3 10 20 20 Enclosure With Switch Hub Through Size Feed Cat. Amp. 12 NSSC Series Manual Motor Starting Switches and NFS Series Fractional HP Starters and Enclosures Applications: • Motor Starting Switches are used in manual "ON" and "OFF" control of DC and single-phase or three-phase AC motors where overload protection is not required or is provided separately • NFSC Fractional Horsepower Starters are used in manual "ON" and "OFF" control and overload protection of small single phase motors • Both are suitable for use in wet and/or corrosive environments Features: Certifications and Compliances: 2C • Enclosures are made of Eaton's CrouseHinds high-impact strength Krydon® fiberglass-reinforced polyester material which has excellent corrosion resistance and stability to heat • Provided with a toggle lever with a molded-in stainless steel shaft • Factory installed through feed (NSSC. 4X.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 485 . www.

99 4.85–3.99 A2.75 2.81 A3. # 1 Heater Table (Cutler-Hammer) 115–230 Volts DC CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business Full-Load Motor Current Eaton's Crouse-Hinds Symbol Number 2.76–2.71 0.59 3. # 2C 1 Poles NFSC AB11 ➀ NFSC AB21 ➀ /2 3 /4 1 1 hp 1 hp 115 VDC 230 VDC /4 hp /4 hp 1 hp 1 hp 1 /4 hp 1 hp 1 1 Enclosure With Starter Hub Through Size Feed Cat.16–2.56 1.04 1.45–0.43 .95 A4.07 4.63 A1.8 A16. # /2 /4 1 1 32 VDC 3 NFSC G11 ➀ NFSC G21 ➀ /2 NFSC AB12 ➀ /4 NFSC AB22 ➀ Heater Table (see pages 479–480) /2 NFSC G12 ➀ /4 NFSC G22 ➀ Heater Table (see pages 479–480) With Cutler-Hammer Switches With Square D Switches 1 2 Maximum HP Ratings 115–230 Poles Volts AC 1 1 hp 2 1 hp Poles 1 hp Enclosure With Starter Hub Through Size Feed Cat.27 3.1 A14.71 A.17–1.79–0.95 3.30 A5.48 .96–2.39 4.9 A19.35 12.1 13.2 A14.2 A17.37 1.58 . Motor Full-Load Amps Eaton's Crouse-Hinds Symbol Number Max.02 A1.95 A1.78 A6. Select heater suffix from table and add to catalog number.44 0.71–4.95 9.03 1.38 2.08–4.78 A.97–1.54 A1.70 3.25 A1.15 8.74 8.com US: 1-866-764-5454 /4 hp 3 Enclosure With Starter Hub Through Size Feed Cat.49 0.42–6.8 A21.20 A6.15 A2.54 A.35 5.0 A11.1–16.50–0.99 A7.95 1.65 1.96–10.90 4.33–4.51 1.68–9.71 W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6 W7 W8 W9 W10 W11 W12 W13 W14 W15 W16 W17 W18 W19 W20 2.46–3.84 A.16 1.0–15.36–5.87 .16–8.79 1. # Poles /2 3 /4 NFSC C11 ➀ NFSC C21 ➀ 1 /2 /4 NFSC C12 ➀ NFSC C22 ➀ 2 1 2 3 3 Maximum HP Ratings 115–230 Poles Volts AC 1 1 hp 2 1 hp 115–230 Volts DC 1 1 1 2 3 /2 /4 NFSC D11 ➀ NFSC D21 ➀ /2 /4 NFSC D12 ➀ NFSC D22 ➀ 3 1 3 Heater Table (Square D) Max.30 11.64 .79 A5.91–5.00 W21 W22 W23 W24 W25 W26 W27 W28 W29 W30 W31 W32 W33 W34 W35 W36 W37 W38 W39 Full-Load Motor Current Eaton's Crouse-Hinds Symbol Number 0.1 12.99–9.31 A2.83 1.16 A1.39 A1.86–0.2C Corrosion-Resistant Dust-tight Watertight Weatherproof NEMA 3.0 A3.3 A25.78 0.07–3. Motor Full-Load Amps Eaton's Crouse-Hinds Symbol Number .66–0.80–1.53 0.38 A9.49 486 www.86 A.27 1.32 4.47 13.29 1.61 ➀ Includes one interchangeable heater.06 3.39–2.41–0.2 .32 A4.65 A.9–12.65 0. 4X.8 10.03 7. Example: NFSC-D11A.57 A2.48–1.15 1.35 10.83 6.49 A.57–1.57 7.67 1.47 1.41 6.72–0.2–13.58 0.15 2.99 2.46 9.05–1.78 .75 A1.98 8.26 5.79 6.0 15.59 A.crouse-hinds.47 2.96 0.65 A8.59–0.95 1.25 A9.86–6.80–7.67 9.35 1.58–8.86 A1.30–1.9 14.53 .38–1. 12 NSSC Series Manual Motor Starting Switches and NFS Series Fractional HP Starters and Enclosures Ordering Information NFSC Series Fractional HP Starters With Overload Protection With Allen-Bradley Bulletin 600 Switches With General Electric Switches Maximum HP Ratings 115–230 Poles Volts AC 1 1 hp 2 1 hp 115–230 Volts DC Maximum HP Ratings 115–230 Poles VAC /4 hp 1 2 Poles 3 Enclosure With Starter Hub Through Size Feed Cat.85 A11.39 7.66–1.12 16.54–0.67 15.79 5.2–13.23 2.85 5.85 0.45 3.9 A13.71 .

. HP 115V 230V M-0 M-1 M-1P M-0 M-1 2 2 2 3 3 3 1 2 3 2 2 3 (1 (1 (1 (3 (1 (3 PH) PH) PH) PH) PH) PH) 2 3 5 3 3 71/2 460/575V Dead End Cat # 5 NMN NMN NMN NMN 10 NMN ➀231 ➀220 ➀221 ➀221P ➀230 1" Hubs Through Feed Cat # NMNC NMNC NMNC NMNC ➀220 ➀221 ➀221P ➀230 Dead End Cat # NMN NMN NMN NMN ➀320 ➀321 ➀321P ➀330 Through Feed Cat # NMNC NMNC NMNC NMNC ➀320 ➀321 ➀321P ➀330 NMNC ➀231 NMN ➀331 NMNC ➀300 Enclosure Only* NMN ➀200 NMNC ➀200 NMN ➀300 NMNC ➀300 ➀Motor Starters: Insert appropriate symbol in Cat..com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 487 .... 12 600VAC Heavy Duty Applications: Electrical Rating Ranges: • NMN manual line starters are for use in across-the-line starting of motors....crouse-hinds.... • Factory installed dead end (NMN) or through feed (NMNC) hubs............. Manufacturer Symbol Allen-Bradley General Electric Square D AB G D Dimensions In Inches: NMN *Furnished with mounting plate and operator installed....NMN Series Manual Line Starters and Enclosures Corrosion-Resistant Dust-tight Watertight Weatherproof NEMA 3. • Insulated........ Suffix 2C Certifications and Compliances: • NEMA/EEMAC 3.. www..... 4X.. S618 2C Options: Description • Enclosures are made of Eaton's CrouseHinds high-impact strength Krydon® fiberglass-reinforced polyester material which has excellent corrosion resistance and stability to heat..... • Starter sizes 0... 1P Features: • Undervoltage protection... U • Grounding plate – see page 677. 4X and 12 Toggle-operated manual starter with knockout Ordering Information Enclosure with Starter 3 /4" Hubs Starter NEMA Size Poles Max.... motor protection and manual starting and stopping..... groundable type terminal block for grounded or ungrounded neutral can be supplied .. No............. 3/4" and 1" sizes..... 1......... Available with toggle operator only .........

............... Less overload relays (contactor)................. 2....... S618 Information on other options or combination of options for a specific enclosure size is available on request. groundable type terminal block for a grounded or ungrounded neutral can be supplied........... 4X and 12 Electrical Rating Ranges: • Starter sizes 0....... 60 hertz.............. Selector switches (heavy duty): ON-OFF........... two device holes maximum. use next larger enclosure size.... strong and durable enclosure construction provides longer service life for equipment............ JOG-RUN-OFF.... Automatic reset overload relay................ 3NO/3NC... size 4–300VA): Fusible Secondary................... 120 V primary – specify other primary voltages as required: Red pilot light...... 50 or 60 hertz... • Unitized... Suffix NH J1* J3* LED PB13* RR17* RR18* RR19* S708 Description Suffix Time delay low voltage release for 3-wire control with 2...................... LVR1 240 volt............................ FT FTPS S1 C S781 S782 S783 †Type GP grounding plate only in NMG0710 enclosure...................... Pushbutton (heavy duty........... 1................................................ undervoltage protection and remote starting and stopping 2C Features: • Enclosures are made of Eaton's CrouseHinds high-impact strength Krydon® fiberglass-reinforced polyester material which has excellent corrosion resistance and stability to heat.. LVR2 480 volt.....2C Corrosion-Resistant Dust-tight Watertight Weatherproof NEMA 3....... 3... For NMG0714.... Primary and Secondary.............crouse-hinds................................ uses two device holes): START-STOP.................................................... Options: Description Hinged cover.................... 4 or 6-second adjustment................. 4X....... 488 www..... LED pilot lights in place of standard incandescent pilot lamps........... HAND-OFF-AUTO... Auxiliary Contact on Starter or Contactor: 1NO/1NC... Control circuit transformer 480 / 240-120 volts. Padlock attachment for: Pushbutton..... size 3–150VA................ Pilot lights......... 60 hertz.... 4 Magnetic line starter with optional hinged cover with START-STOP pushbuttons..... size 2–100VA................ nonreversing starters only. Control circuit voltage: 120 volt............. 60 hertz......com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business .... 2NO/2NC........... LVR3 Hubs (see "Note on Hubs") – see page 677 Grounding plate or bushing† – see page 677 Insulated..... 12 NMG Series Magnetic Line Starters and Enclosures 600VAC Heavy Duty Applications: NMG magnetic line starters are used: • For magnetic across-the-line starting of motors and remote starting and stopping • For across-the-line starting of polyphase AC induction motors • To provide motor running protection.. (sizes 0 and 1–50VA... Certifications and Compliances: • NEMA/EEMAC: 3.. • Exterior parts of RESET button made of Krydon material...... *For optional devices or control circuit transformer........ For single-speed. Green pilot light....

NMG1426-W6434-PB13. # w/Options 0. ➀ Motor Starters: Manufacturer Allen-Bradley Square D Cutler-Hammer General Electric Westinghouse Enclosure Cat. 1 NMG0710 NMG0714 2 NMG0714 NMG1018 3 NMG1018 NMG1024 4 NMG1024 NMG1426 Example: A NEMA size 4. Enclosures only can be ordered. 4X. Note on Hubs: The following number and sizes of hubs (not mounted) are included when magnetic starters are ordered complete. Symbols are shown in the footnote at the bottom of this page. frequency. 480 V Westinghouse starter with STARTSTOP pushbuttons would be Cat. type and full load ampere rating of motor – or specify ampere rating of heaters. HP Volts NEMA With Polyphase (AC) Size Starter Cat. insert the manufacturer’s symbol in the designated position of the catalog number. 12 600VAC Heavy Duty Ordering Information Dimensions† To order an enclosure complete with starter. Starter Size Number Included Hub Size 0 3 3 1 1 2 /4 1 2 1 2 3 /4 11/2 3 1 2 3 /4 2 4 1 2 3 /4 21/2 /4 3 www. hubs must be ordered separately (see "Options").crouse-hinds. voltage. the base catalog number must be changed according to the table below. # NMG1018 & 1024 *NEMA Size 4 Allen-Bradley starter must be in NMG1426 enclosure.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 489 . No. Ordering Information when adding options 71/2 71/2 1113/32 1113/32 7 7 823/32 823/32 63/8 63/8 77/8 77/8 †Not to be used for construction purposes unless approved. If enclosures only are ordered. Select from listings. # 120 120 240 480 600 120 240 480 600 120 240 480 600 240 240 480 600 480 600 0 1 0 0 0 2 1 1 1 3 2 2 2 3 4 3 3 4 4 NMG0710 NMG0710 NMG0710 NMG0710 NMG0710 NMG0714 NMG0710 NMG0710 NMG0710 NMG1018 NMG0714 NMG0714 NMG0714 NMG1018 NMG1024 NMG1018 NMG1018 NMG1024 NMG1024 ➀6130 ➀6131 ➀6230 ➀6430 ➀6530 ➀6132 ➀6231 ➀6431 ➀6531 ➀6133 ➀6232 ➀6432 ➀6532 ➀6233 ➀6234* ➀6433 ➀6533 ➀6434* ➀6534* NMG0710 NMG0710 NMG0710 NMG0710 NMG0710 NMG0714 NMG0710 NMG0710 NMG0710 NMG1018 NMG0714 NMG0714 NMG0714 NMG1018 NMG1024 NMG1018 NMG1018 NMG1024 NMG1024 NMG0710 & 0714 2C 2 3 3 5 5 71/2 71/2 10 10 15 15 25 25 30 50 50 50 100 100 Without Starter Cat. # Outside Dimensions l w d Mounting Dimensions ml mw NMG0710 NMG0714 NMG1018 NMG1024 101/2 141/2 1913/32 2513/32 93/8 133/8 193/8 253/8 Symbol AB D C G W Information on other starter manufacturers on request. When adding options to NMG series enclosures.NMG Series Magnetic Line Starters and Enclosures Corrosion-Resistant Dust-tight Watertight Weatherproof NEMA 3. Specify HP. NEMA Enclosure Enclosure Size Cat. Single-Speed. In Inches: 2C Starters are furnished with three heaters. Non-Reversing Motor Starter Enclosure Max. RPM.

crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business .2C 2C 490 www.

Circuit Breakers Hazardous 3C Description Page No.com US: 1-866-764-5454 see pages 494–495 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 491 3C 100 / 150 ampere frame . Application/Selection see page 492 Auxiliary Circuit Breakers & Enclosures EFD. EFDC Series see page 507 Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers & Enclosures General Information and Dimensions EPC Series FLB Series EBMB Series see pages 498–499 see page 502 see pages 494–497 Non-Interchangeable Trip EPC Series FLB Series EBMB Series EIB Series NCB Series see page 500 see page 503 see pages 494–495 see page 493 see page 508 225 / 250 ampere frame FLB Series EBMB Series NCB Series see page 506 see pages 494–495 see page 508 400 ampere frame EBMB Series see pages 494–495 Interchangeable Trip 225 / 250 ampere frame FLB Series EBMB Series see page 506 see pages 494–495 400 ampere frame EBMB Series NCB Series see pages 494–495 see page 508 600 / 800 ampere frame EBMB Series see pages 494–495 1000 ampere frame EBMB Series www.crouse-hinds.

1. Groups E. 1 & 2. Groups F. LAL Cut. MAL Cut. D – FAL. Groups E. Div. I. TJK. D Cl. D Cl. TKMA Sq.-Ham. III NEMA/ EEMAC Encl. Groups C. Groups E. FDB. Div. 9EFG. – TEB. – EHD. JD. 1 & 2. Div. 2. III 3. Div. EFD. G Cl. EHB. TED. Div. FDB. D Cl. Div. 9EFG EIB Cl. FDB. Groups F. – TEB. 1. 2. JD. 12 ThermalMagnetic 15-400 Encl. KAL. 3 Yes Bolted/ Ground Joint/ Gasketed G. – EHD. TFJ. G Cl. 7BCD. 4. EHD. LAL. 7CD. Ham.-Ham. 2. 4X. Div. 7BCD. C. F. 12 Cl. TJJ. FD. TFK Sq.E. Groups E. lighting. heating. II.E. TFK. See individual listings for available options 3C Quick Selector Chart Enclosures for Circuit Breakers Circuit Breaker NEC/CEC – Hazardous Area Certifications and Compliances Cl. II. II. III 3. II. II. I. 7CD. Groups E. 9EFG Magnetic 15–100 NCB N/A 3.E. KAL Cut. Groups B.crouse-hinds. Div. 2. 9EFG Cl. 1 & 2. 1 & 2. D – QOU No. 3 Yes Threaded 480AC to 600AC Cut. KAL. EFDC EBMB EPC FLB 492 www. Div. Groups F.-Ham. II. Type 3. Groups C. 3R. KAL Cut. Div. 1. 2. III 3. D Cl. – TEB.E. FD. G Cl. G Cl. 9EFG Cl. F.-Ham. JDB 2. FD. FDB. Zones 1 & 2 Cl. Div. 1 & 2. KDB. TED. – EB. TFJ Sq. 2. I. D – FAL. 1. – TEB. D Cl. 4. I. 3 Yes Threaded G. F. 1. III 3R. I. 2. 4. – EG 3 No Bolted/ Ground Joint 240AC to 600VAC 250DC G. screw and gasket 125DC to 250DC ThermalMagnetic 15–150 120AC to 600AC 125DC to 250DC ThermalMagnetic 15–225 120AC to 600AC 125DC to 250DC US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business Enclosure Cover Construction Bolted/ Ground Joint . D – FAL. JDB 1. 1. Div. TFJ Sq. of Poles 1 Interchangeable Trip No 120AC to 600AC G. KD. wet. F. Groups B. G Cl. appliance and motor protection circuits • To provide disconnect means • For short circuit protection and thermal time delay overload protection • In various types of damp. II. JD. FD. – EHD. TED. II. Groups B. C. Div.com Type ThermalMagnetic ThermalMagnetic Ampere Rating Range 15–30 15–800 Voltage Range 120AC Manufacturer and Frame Size Sq. C. TFJ. G Cl. F. 7BCD. II. JDB 1. 3 Yes Hinged. JDB. D – FAL. G Cl.Circuit Breakers 3C Application and Selection Quick Selector Chart Applications: Considerations for Selection: Circuit breakers and their appropriate enclosures are used: • In conjunction with service entrance. Div. JD. G Cl. G Cl. I. Groups F. corrosive and hazardous areas Options: Considerations for selection of proper enclosure: • The environment of the enclosure location in terms of NEC/CEC compliance and NEMA/EEMAC type required • The size and type of circuit breaker required for the particular application • See "Quick Selector" below for guidance Many options are available on: • Material and finishes where special atmospheric conditions prevail • Special features for specific applications. TED.

..13" 7.... C & D Class I....0" 9. S146 Grounded Neutral Lug Kit with Connectors for 50.no need to replace the entire enclosure if a mounting foot is broken • Stainless steel hinges provide extreme durability and easy access to inside of enclosure for wiring and maintenance • (2) 11/2" NPT conduit entries.. Division 1.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 493 3C • Small compact footprint requires less mounting space and reduces enclosure cost • Rotary handle operator mounted on cover assembly provides clear indication of on...... 7BCD. III NEMA 3. I... NEMA 4 environmental protection and Class I..47" 12.. off and trip positions • No internal fork operator. For field addition of breather and/or drain....480V: 25k AIC .... Zones 1 & 2 Class II.crouse-hinds.... Div. 3R. Circuit breaker protection is available from 15 to 100 amps..........2 No....Eaton Type EG Breaker AIC ratings: .. 9EFG NEMA 3. Group B.. 9EFG UL Standard 1203 cUL to CSA C22.. 4..240V: 35k AIC . Groups B. 7BCD. Division 1..0" 11........ S753 Ordering Information Electrical Ratings: Circuit Breaker Rating (amps) Enclosure Enclosure with Only Circuit Breaker 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 60 70 80 90 100 EIBA EIBA EIBA EIBA EIBA EIBB EIBB EIBB EIBB EIBB EIBB EIBB EIBB • 600V maximum • 3 poles • Ampere Interrupting Capacity: ....600V: 18k AIC EIBA3015 EIBA3020 EIBA3025 EIBA3030 EIBA3035 EIBB3040 EIBB3045 EIBB3050 EIBB3060 EIBB3070 EIBB3080 EIBB3090 EIBB3100 Weights: EIBA EIBB 39 lbs.....Cl....13" 5..... 9EFG UL Standard: 1203 cUL to CSA C22........ Zones 1 & 2 Cl.. 30 EIB Series Compact Circuit Breaker Assemblies With Covers The EIB Series Compact Circuit Breaker Assemblies are an innovative line of explosionproof motor control now being offered by Eaton's Crouse-Hinds.... 1. The EIB series is a costeffective solution for circuit breaker protection and utilizes the Cutler-Hammer Type EG circuit breakers......... Groups E..... G Cl.. S178 External Ground Stud ..... 7BCD... holes come plugged 3C ... 3R.... Groups E. Features: Options: Description Suffix Insulated Neutral Lug .. 4. one on top and one on bottom for easy top or bottom feed of conductors...53" 16.... II..... Dimensions In Inches: Certifications and Compliances: • • • • • • • • Class I... 4.. 58 lbs..66" 7 /16" Finishes: • Copper-free Aluminum – Natural • Steel – Electrogalvanized www.......... The EIB series utilizes the EJB style D enclosure with its bolted construction... F and G Class III Enclosure type 3....All EIB enclosures are rated to 10k AIC . eliminating potential damage to breaker toggle • Trip position easily identified from a distance • Neoprene cover gasket provides UL Type 4 (hosetight) environmental rating • Detachable mounting feet offer flexible mounting alternatives . C and D hazardous area ratings.. F.. I.... 100 & 225 Amps .... Groups B. C.... 1 & 2.. Divisions 1 & 2... Div.....6" 7 /16" 12... S756V Epoxy Powder Coat Finish (exterior only) .47" 11. S214 Breather and Drain .........53" 15.. 3R.2 No....... 30 Standard Materials: • • • • • Body and Cover – Copper-free aluminum Gasket – Neoprene Cover Bolts – Steel Hinges – Stainless Steel Mounting Plate Sheet – Aluminum Dimension Size A Size B aa bb xx yy zz Mounting Holes 10.... S752 Epoxy Powder Coat Finish (exterior and interior) .. D Cl......

12 Standard Materials: • Body and cover – copper-free aluminum • Operating handle – copper-free aluminum • Operating shaft and bushing – stainless steel • Interior parts – sheet steel. 800.3C EBMB Series Circuit Breakers and Enclosures Cl.4 of 1%). 12 Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight Applications: Spectrum™ EBM hinged cover motor control enclosures are used: • For general motor control and circuit protection – indoors and outdoors – in damp. electrogalvanized • Cover bolts. • Semi-clamshell enclosure design. • Steel bracket for lifting larger enclosures during installation supplied as standard. cast copper-free aluminum construction (less than 0. 3C Features: • Rugged. • Bodies have top and bottom drilled and tapped entrances for power conduits and control conduits. G Cl. hex head cover bolts. 225. Spectrum EBM motor control enclosures accommodate popular makes of circuit breakers. 400. III NEMA 3. 800 ampere trip) National Electrical Code is a Registered Trademark of The National Fire Protection Association. with an external flanged ground joint between body and cover makes interior components more accessible. D Class II. • For service entrance. 4X††. • To provide line disconnect means and short circuit protection. washers and retractile springs – stainless steel Electrical Rating Ranges: • Circuit breakers – 100. 3R. 4‡. ††With S752 or S753. Div. 150.000 RMS Symm. dusty hazardous locations without the need for a protective shelter. Groups B. II. Division 1. *1000 Ampere Frame (max. 9EFG. • Versatile. Division 1 & 2. 600. 3R. • On switchracks or other assemblies where it’s desired that motor control be centrally located. 4X††. Certifications and Compliances: • NEC/CEC: Class I.000 RMS Symm. captive. 2. • Copper-free aluminum hinges allow the cover to swing well out of the way. dirty. II. • Total compliance to the wiring end room requirements of the National Electrical Code®. Amperes 600V 25. Removable reducers are supplied. Div. C. Amperes 480V 50. 1000* ampere frame sizes ‡Enclosure not suitable for NEMA 4 or 4X with cover mounted operators. 30 • UL Subject 2062 . 250. quick release. G Class II. Groups E. • Minimum enclosure-to-enclosure spacing with little interference between the opened cover and an adjacent enclosure. Groups B. F.000 RMS Symm. G Class III • UL Standards UL1203 – Hazardous (classified) locations/CSA Standards: C22. • Tap-on mounting feet. Mounting plate also field removable. 7BCD. Groups F. • Simple. 4‡. • Optional EMPS control devices may be added to enclosure cover. C. • In areas where frequent washdowns are necessary or where heavy rain or water spray is prevalent. Div. G Cl. internal operating mechanisms allow for field adjustment to accommodate popular manufacturers' breakers. 9EFG. heating.2 No. • Neoprene cover gasket permanently attached to the cover seals out moisture. appliance and motor circuits. straightforward installation of breaker on pre-drilled mounting plate within enclosure. Division 2. • Circuit breaker external operating handle can be padlocked in either "ON" or "OFF" positions. as standard. 494 www. Groups F. I.High AIC rating (Interrupting Capacity) For Groups C & D only 240V 65.crouse-hinds. 1 & 2. All conduit entrances are plugged. Stainless steel springs provide clear indication cover bolts are fully retracted from body. wet. feeder or branch circuit protection for lighting. to accommodate smaller size conduits. 1. D Cl. Amperes • NEMA 3. • Stainless steel. Groups E.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business . • Circuit breaker operating handle located through the right side wall of the body permits visual confirmation of correct component assembly and operation. corrosion resistant. 7BCD. F.

... Class III.......... II......... I. 1.......... 480 volt. 240 volt.......... switch on circuit breaker... II... Class II................................. Catalog Number System EBMBB-➀-WT30FDB36-➁ ➀ Options in this position are additions to the enclosure and should be listed alphanumerically.......... ‡Enclosure not suitable for NEMA 4 or 4X with cover mounted operators................ drain....... E.. 9EFG....... 50–60 Hertz....... C & D..... 25 watts........ 7BCD.......... 4X††...... C & D.... 120 volt......... ††With S752 or S753........ 100.... contacts rated 10A @ 600V... • Std.................. 225 amp).......... Suffixes are added alphanumerically...... III NEMA 3........ 25 watts............................. Class I...com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 495 ..... 2A & 2B contacts........... 1A & 1B contacts.......... Class III............................... 1 & 2..... G Cl. Groups B............ 25 watts........ # Suffix ➁ AC ➀ J1† ➀ J3 † ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ LED PB23 †‡ R11 R22 R44 S146 ➀ S178 ➀ S756 ‡ ➀ ➀ ➀ S756V ‡ S752 S753 ➁ S784 ➁ ➀ S785 S786 ➀ S787 3C • Ambient compensated circuit breaker trip setting.... EBMB Series circuit breaker enclosures are available with breakers from 100 to 1000* amp frame sizes........... 2................... switch on circuit breaker............. • Space heater. 800 ampere trip......... E F & G... Description Position in Cat. • Aux. • 12 point term..............O.... *1000 Ampere Frame (max.. B................ breather & drain.................. • Insulated neutral w/2 connectors................... Class II......... • Pilot light.......... w/blank indicating plate....... • General purpose control relay................ green jewel...... markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number..............crouse-hinds. • Grounded neutral stud w/3 connectors (50............ • Std... 300 V......... www... w/blank indicating plate.... G Cl...... • Space heater..EBMB Series Circuit Breakers and Enclosures Cl................... D Cl. B...... • Space heater................... • External epoxy finish.... • Aux.. F.................................. Select from the list of standard markings and DSL Legend Plate listings see page 449............................................. 12 Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight 3C Options: The following options are available from factory by adding suffix to catalog number.. • Pilot light........... red jewel............... • Start-stop pushbuttons (requires 2 spaces).............................. 3R........... Div.......... 120VAC........................... Groups E......... Class I. Groups F.... block – 30 amp... coil 120VAC... C..............) †If desired....... • LED pilot lights in place of standard incandescent pilot lamps.................... Div............. 120VAC......... Div..... • Internal and external epoxy finish..... ➁ Options in this position are modifications to the circuit breaker and should be listed alphanumerically....... 4‡.................. F & G..... 4 pole N....................

TED frame available 10 through 150 amp. 25. Information available upon request. 400 Amp. D Cl. 15. 35. Div. 9EFG. § General Electric TEB frame available 10 through 100 amp. General Electric TJJ and TJK frames available 125 through 400 amp. 350. Amp. 7BCD. 600. 45. 1. Amp. Amp. 110. 200. G Cl. 110. insert the manufacturer's symbols in the designated positions of the catalog number. 100 Amp. 496 www. 225. # EBMBA EBMBA EBMBA EBMBA EBMBA EBMBB EBMBB EBMBB EBMBB EBMBB EBMBG EBMBK EBMBL EBMBL * † § * † § † § ■ * † § * † § † § ■ ✪ ▲ ▼ ♠ ♥ Circuit Breaker Amp Rating With Circuit Breaker Cat. Select from listings below. 80. III NEMA 3. II. ♥ Westinghouse MD frame available 400 and 500 through 800 amp. 450. Frame 600VAC 800 Amp. 350. C. 300. 150. Amp. 35. 100 and 125 through 250 amp. KDB. TKMA)♥ – 300. 500.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business . 125. frame. 100. available 70 though 225 amp. 350. Frame Frame Frame Frame Frame Frame Frame Frame Frame Frame Frame Frame Frame Frame Without Circuit Breaker Cat. Frame (LD. trip. 400. trip.crouse-hinds. 50. trip. 80. 3R. ††With S752 or S753. 40.EBMBB WT100EDH34 becomes EBMBB WT100EDH24. trip. EBMBB will accept 15 through 100 amp. 70. Amp. • Enclosures can be ordered without circuit breakers. Amp. Amp. 1 & 2. trip. 40. ✪ General Electric TFJ and TFK types are 225 amp. EBMB Series Enclosures for Circuit Breakers 3C Circuit Breaker Enclosures Poles✠ Voltage Rating Circuit Breaker Frame Size 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 240VAC 240VAC 480VAC 480VAC 600VAC 240VAC 240VAC 480VAC 480VAC 600VAC 600VAC 600VAC 600VAC 600VAC 100 150 100 150 150 100 150 100 150 150 250 400 600 800 or or or or 125–250VDC 125–250VDC 250VDC 250VDC or or or or 125–250VDC 125–250VDC 250VDC 250VDC or 250VDC or 250VDC or 250VDC ➀Circuit Breakers: Manufacturer Symbol Cutler-Hammer General Electric WT TT Amp. frame. Example of an adjusted part number . 20. # 15A through 70A 10A through 70A 15A through 70A 10A through 70A 10A through 70A 15A through 100A 10A through 150A 15A through 100A 10A through 150A 15A through 150A 70A through 250A 100A through 400A 250A through 600A 300A through 800A EBMBA TT➁TEB32 EBMBA TT➁TEB32 EBMBA ➀➁➂34 EBMBA TT➁TED34 EBMBA ➀➁➂36 EBMBB TT➁TEB32 EBMBB TT➁TEB32 EBMBB ➀➁➂34 EBMBB TT➁TED34 EBMBB ➀➁➂36 EBMBG ➀➁➂36 EBMBK ➀➁➂36 EBMBL WT➁➂36 EBMBL WT➁➂36 ➁ Select Trip Setting from below: 100 150 225 400 600 800 Amp Frame (EHD)* – 15. 200. 600 amp. 90. G Cl. 30. 12 Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight Ordering Information: • To order an enclosure complete with circuit breaker. Frame✪▲ Frame 600VAC 600VAC 600 Amp. 90. 60. Amp. Amp. II. trip. ■ Westinghouse FDB frame available 15 through 150 amp. 250. * EBMBA will accept 15 through 70 amp. voltage. Frame 600VAC FDB JD✡ JDB✜ KD✡ KDB✜ LD MD TED TFK✡ TFJ✜ TJK✡ TJJ✜ TJK TKMA 600VAC 150 Amp. 400. TFJ. 600 Amp Frame (MD. Groups E.EBMB Series Circuit Breakers and Enclosures 3C Cl. JDB. Amp. F. available 70. 90. 30. 700. Groups F. trip. trip. 450. Groups B. ▼ Westinghouse KD and KDB frames available 100 through 400 amp. 4‡. trip. Amp. 20. ▲ Westinghouse JD and JDB types are 250 amp. I. 225. ✠ Depending on availability from the circuit breaker manufacturer 1 and 2 pole can be furnished. TJK)▼ – 100. trip. 90. Frame (TDB. trip. 125. Frame (KD. Div. Amp. 250 Amp. 150 / 250 Amp Frame (JD. ♠ Westinghouse LD frame available 300 through 400 and 500. 45. trip. 400 Amp. 60. EBMBB will accept 10 through 150 amp. Symbols are shown below. 70. TED)†§■ – 10. 175. 25. 100. 50. 300. 500. 125. trip. Frame 240VAC 480VAC — TEB 250 Amp. TEB. Frame 240VAC 480VAC 600VAC EHD — — — — — — TED ✡–Interchangeable Trip Unit ✜–Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit ‡ Enclosure not suitable for NEMA 4 or 4X with cover mounted operators. 2. 150. 80. Div. 175. and manufacturer desired: Manufacturer Cutler-Hammer General Electric 100 Amp. Amp. TJJ. TFK)✪▲ – 70. 4X††. 800 ➂Select Circuit Breaker Frame Type based on frame size. TJK)♠ – 250. † EBMBA will accept 10 through 70 amp.

40 29.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 497 .50 39. G Cl. ††With S752 or S753.23 600. Breather and drain entries must be plugged for NEMA 4 rating.06 400 Amp Frame EBMBK K 41.25 19.00 17. 12 Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight 3C Dimensions In Inches: 3C Dimensions are approximate.0" 2.13 10.50 36. I.58 13. not for construction purposes. G Cl.03 14. 9EFG. Div.78 10.28 12.78 10. F.90 20.50 100 and 150 Amp Frame EBMBB B 25.90 6.88 43.78 10.50 18. 7BCD.92 (2)3" (2)2.25 3.13 10.EBMB Series Circuit Breakers and Enclosures Cl. 4X††.crouse-hinds.13 10.50 53. III NEMA 3.25 3.03 (2)4" (2)3. D Cl.5" 3.) *** Use 1/2" diameter bolts for mounting all enclosures. Enclosure Only Cat. §Drilled & Tapped.25 2" 1. C.5" 3.5" 3.75 26. (All conduit entrance(s) supplied with RE reducer and PLG plug.03 14.28 10.28 6.00 13.13 41.03 14.50 42.25 3. Groups E. 1.00 225 and 250 Amp Frame EBMBG G 37. II.25 3. 4‡.25 2" 1.00 17. Div. 1 & 2. 800 and 1000 Amp Frame† EBMBL L 53. ** Conduit entrance(s) for power conductors (top and bottom).00 13.92 — — 29.65 12. * 1" Drilled & Tapped (D & T) conduit entry for control conductors supplied with PLG plug top and bottom.00 3.25 — — 14.25 51. II.12 †1000 Ampere Frame (max.5" 4.00 10. Div. www.00 13.5" 3. Groups F. Groups B.25 — — 22. # Enclosure Size Symbol 100 Amp Frame EBMBA A Dimensions A B C D E F G J** Conduit Entry Trade Size D&T§ w/RE Dimensions K L M N O P 18.40 6. 800 ampere trip) ‡Enclosure not suitable for NEMA 4 or 4X with cover mounted operators.65 20.25 17.25 — — 34.25 3. 2.50 13.75 24. (see H) Note: Lifting bracket will accommodate a maximum 2 ton hook. 3R.

chemical or petrochemical plants and other process industry facilities where similar hazards exist • To provide disconnect means............. 7CD.......... III NEMA 3.......... Class II. Groups F..... 150.. F..... 225........... and top cover skirted • Specially located stops and locks insure adequate thread engagement and prevent overtightening • Separate replaceable mounting bracket attached to the rear of the body provides three-point suspension for quick installation and leveling – one keyhole slot at top and two open slots at bottom • Bodies have two taper-tapped conduit hubs with integral bushings on the top...) S146 Grounded neutral stud with 3 connectors (100... 9EFG • UL Standard: 698 • CSA: C22... I....... 1................ S366 Back boss drilled and tapped same size as standard hubs..... 250 ampere frame sizes Standard Finishes: • Copper-free aluminum – natural • Stainless steel – natural • Sheet steel – electrogalvanized *Suffix S146 insulated material must be used to comply with NEC requirements for service entrance..com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business ...... Groups C... Class II. F.... providing free access to the wiring chamber • Breaker is operated by an external handle which can be padlocked in either "ON" or "OFF" positions by as many as three padlocks............... S178 Side bosses drilled and tapped same size as standard hubs........... S219 Standard Drain (Class I...... §Not suitable for NEMA 4.. 4................... #: Description Suffix Auxiliary Switch‡ 1A/1B (1P2T)................ G Cl.......... G Cl. D Cl........... 30 Standard Materials: • • • • Bodies and covers – copper-free aluminum Operating handles – copper-free aluminum Operating shafts – stainless steel Interior parts – sheet steel Options: The following special options are available from factory by adding suffix to Cat.... F.. Groups F............... and two more directly below • Mounting plates are supplied with all necessary holes and hardware to attach any of the circuit breakers shown in the catalog listings. Groups F.... Breaker is trip-free of the handle and will open under short circuit or overload. 9EFG Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight Applications: EPC Circuit Breakers and Enclosures are used: • For service entrance*.... Class II... F............. G......................... Class III). 7CD.. S454§ (2) Universal Breather-Drains (Class I.... Groups E.. S785 Insulated neutral with 2 connectors (100..... Division 2..... appliance and motor circuits • In areas made hazardous due to the presence of flammable vapors.2 No..... 4................. Division 1........................ D Class II.......... Groups C................. S784 2A/2B (2P2T)..... Groups F. Div....................... feeder or branch circuit protection for lighting.... 150 and 225 amp.. G Class II.......).. 2..... Div....... Groups C. heating...... S198V Universal Breather-Drain (Class I.. short circuit protection and thermal time delay overload protection 3C Features: • Quick-opening covers – less than two turns to remove or install • Three section design for ease of installation • Water-shedding construction with female threads on top cover............. Class II... F........ G Class III • NEMA: 3........ G). Groups C... Groups E.. Groups E...... D.................................. gases or combustible dusts • In damp............ 1 & 2... D... Groups C.... ‡Application is limited by circuit breaker design – Consult Factory... D.............. Class III)........ II....... male threads on bottom cover.EPC Series Circuit Breakers and Enclosures 3C Cl.. II. even if the handle is locked in the "ON" position Certifications and Compliances: • NEC/CEC Class I.. 498 www..crouse-hinds.............. Division 1 & 2........... S367 Standard Breather (Class I.... G................ Groups C... wet or corrosive locations • Indoors or outdoors at petroleum refineries.. Div.... Breaker and interior mounting frames are easily removed as a unit. S198 Standard Breather and Drain (Class I....... D....... Groups E... D..... Class II....... 150 and 225 amp.. Groups E. G....... Class III)... S454V§ Electrical Rating Ranges: • 100........................ G)...... Groups C.

II. II. G Cl. 2. not for construction purposes. Groups E. 1. I. Div. 9EFG Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight 3C Dimensions In Inches* 3C Int. G Cl.EPC Series Circuit Breakers and Enclosures Cl.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 499 . F. III NEMA 3. a b c d e f g h j k l m n p EPC377 7" 105/ 8 1913/ 16 2313/ 16 143/ 8 63/ 4 711/ 16 53/ 8 2 2 73/ 8 21/ 16 93/ 8 51/ 4 11/ 4 EPC387 7"W 1213/ 16 1913/ 16 2313/ 16 143/ 8 63/ 4 711/ 16 53/ 8 2 2 91/ 4 21/ 16 93/ 8 51/ 4 2 *Dimensions are approximate. Groups F. Groups C. www. Dia. 1 & 2. Div. Div. 7CD.crouse-hinds. D Cl. 4.

F. Groups C. Div. Cat. G Cl.crouse-hinds. Amp Rating Without Circuit Bkr. Non-Interchangeable Trip Circuit Breaker 3C Poles 2 3 Voltage Rating Enclosure Int. III NEMA 3.3C EPC Series Circuit Breakers and Enclosures 100/150A Frame. Thermal Magnetic. Groups F. Dia. 9EFG Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight Ordering Information: To order an enclosure complete with circuit breaker where there is a choice of manufacturer. Cat. 125–250 VDC Cl. I. D Cl.com ➀15EB 2 ➀20EB 2 ➀30EB 2 ➀40EB 2 ➀50EB 2 ➀70EB 2 ➀90EB 2 ➀100EB 2 15 20 30 40 50 70 90 100 Frame Symbol TEB ED TT WT US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business ➀15EB 3 ➀20EB 3 ➀30EB 3 ➀40EB 3 ➀50EB 3 ➀70EB 3 ➀99EB 3 ➀100EB 3 . 120–240 VAC. Enclosures only can be ordered. Div. # With Circuit Bkr. Hub Size Circuit Bkr. # EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC387 EPC387 ➀ 70EB 2 EPC387 ➀ 90EB 2 EPC387 ➀ 100EB 2 7 11/4 7W 2 70 90 100 7 11/4 15 20 30 40 50 70 90 100 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 7W 2 70 90 100 EPC387 EPC387 ➀ 70EB 3 EPC387 ➀ 90EB 3 EPC387 ➀ 100EB 3 240VAC or 125-250VDC 240VAC* *Square D 240VAC/125–250VDC ➀ Circuit Breakers Manufacturer General Electric Cutler-Hammer 500 www. insert the manufacturer's symbol in the designated position of the catalog number. 7CD. Groups E. 1 & 2. II. II. 2. G Cl. 4. Select from listings. Div. 1.

Cat.com ➁ Circuit Breakers Manufacturer General Electric Cutler-Hammer US: 1-866-764-5454 Frame Symbol TED FD. III NEMA 3. FDB TT WT CAN: 1-800-265-0502 3C 3 Enclosure ➀15EHD 3 ➀20EHD 3 ➀30EHD 3 ➀40EHD 3 ➀50EHD 3 ➀70EHD 3 ➀90EHD 3 ➀100EHD 3 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 501 . Thermal Magnetic. G Cl. Div. Dia. I. # 15 20 30 40 50 70 90 100 7 2 Circuit Bkr. 2. Groups F. Cat. G Cl. F. 9EFG 100/150A Frame. Groups C. 1. II. Hub Size EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC387 EPC387 ➀70EHD 2 EPC387 ➀90EHD 2 EPC387 ➀100EHD 2 ➀15EHD 2 ➀20EHD 2 ➀30EHD 2 ➀40EHD 2 ➀50EHD 2 ➀70EHD 2 ➀90EHD 2 ➀100EHD 2 11/ 4 7W 2 70 90 100 7 11/ 4 15 20 30 40 50 70 90 100 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 7W 2 70 90 100 EPC387 EPC387 ➀70EHD 3 EPC387 ➀90EHD 3 EPC387 ➀100EHD 3 11/ 4 15 20 30 40 50 70 90 100 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 ➁15FDB 2 ➁20FDB 2 ➁30FDB 2 ➁40FDB 2 ➁50FDB 2 ➁70FDB 2 ➁90FDB 2 ➁100FDB 2 2 70 90 100 110 125 150 EPC387 EPC387 EPC387 EPC387 EPC387 EPC387 EPC387 ➁70FDB 2 ➁90FDB 2 ➁100FDB 2 ➁110FDB 2 ➁125FDB 2 ➁150FDB 2 11/ 4 15 20 30 40 50 70 90 100 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 ➁15FDB 3 ➁20FDB 3 ➁30FDB 3 ➁40FDB 3 ➁50FDB 3 ➁70FDB 3 ➁90FDB 3 ➁100FDB 3 2 70 90 100 100 125 150 EPC387 EPC387 EPC387 EPC387 EPC387 EPC387 EPC387 ➁70FDB 3 ➁90FDB 3 ➁100FDB 3 ➁110FDB 3 ➁125FDB 3 ➁150FDB 3 480VAC 600VAC or 250VDC 7 600VAC 7W ➀ Circuit Breakers Manufacturer General Electric Cutler-Hammer With Circuit Bkr. 4. Div. D Cl.crouse-hinds.EPC Series Circuit Breakers and Enclosures Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight Cl. # 7 480VAC or 250VDC 7W 3 Without Circuit Bkr. 7CD. 250 VDC 3C Non-Interchangeable Trip Circuit Breaker Poles 2 Voltage Rating Int. 480–600 VAC. Groups E. Amp Rating Frame Symbol TED EHD TT WT www. 1 & 2. Div. II.

........... F... #: Dimensions Certifications and Compliances: In Inches§: • NEC/CEC Class I... Groups F.......... G Cl. covers and operating handles – copper-free aluminum • Operating shafts – stainless steel • Interior parts – sheet steel Standard Finishes: • Copper-free aluminum – natural • Stainless steel – natural • Sheet steel – zinc electroplate with chromate finish Cat.... D...... 171.. †With two mounting feet.. S168 Standard Breather (Class I.2 No........ short circuit protection and thermal time delay overload protection Features: Options: • Semi-cylindrical body shape for maximum strength at lowest practical weight • Round threaded covers at each end... chemical and petrochemical plants and other process industry facilities where similar hazards exist • To provide disconnect means.... 9EFG 3C Applications: FLB circuit breakers and enclosures are used: • For service entrance. S146 Ground neutral stud with 3 connectors (50. 173... 220...... Groups F........... G Cl..... F... S198 Standard Breather and Drain (Class I... Class II... 4........ III NEMA 3. wet or corrosive locations • Indoors or outdoors at petroleum refineries. 1 & 2.. S454V* Specify Auxiliary Switch‡ 1A/1B (1P2T) ... 174............. G Class III • NEMA/EEMAC: 3. G) . Division 2....... Division 1 & 2.... D... Class III) .... Class II..... D...... Groups E... 264. 267.. Groups C.......... 141. 100 and 225 amp... G...... 265... Groups C.. G Class II.....3C FLB Series Circuit Breakers and Enclosures Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight Cl.... Class II.... D. S785 The following special options are available from factory by adding suffix to Cat.. 7CD. Class II. Groups C.. set at an angle to provide ready access to interior for ease of wiring • Breaker is operated by an external handle which can be padlocked in either "ON" or "OFF" positions..... 346 • 100 and 225 ampere frame sizes *Not suitable for NEMA 4/EEMAC... appliance and motor circuits • In areas made hazardous due to the presence of flammable vapors....) .. Groups E.. 223..... heating... I.. 177.... feeder or branch circuit protection for lighting... 7CD. Class II..... 221 FLB115. Div.......... 142.. Groups C. G) . Division 1...... §Dimensions are approximate.. S454* (2) Universal Breather – Drains (Class I............... Groups C. Groups C. S784 2A/2B (2P2T) ... # †FLB140......... 2... 100 and 225 amp....... 225... Class III) .) . S198V Universal Breather – Drain (Class I. 362 FLB224. 147. gases or combustible dusts • In damp. Groups E...... Div............. 116.... one at upper right and one at lower left... 148........crouse-hinds.. Groups F.... 361. 502 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Electrical Rating Ranges: www.... Groups F...... 30 Standard Materials: • Bodies... 175.... Class III) ............... F....... 222. II... 4. D..... D Cl.. G.. D Class II.. Breaker is tripfree of the handle and will open under short circuit or overload even if the handle is locked in the "ON" position • Bodies have vertical through feed conduit hubs of sizes given in the listings Description Suffix 2 lugs for neutral connections (50. not for construction purposes.. Groups C... F. Groups E... G.... 1. Groups E....com US: 1-866-764-5454 a b 1 c d e f g 10 /4 6 /4 7 /4 7 7 5 /4 /16 11/8 71/2 133/8 81/2 93/4 91/8 7 /16 13/4 133/4 221/2 161/4 97/8 151/2 21 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 1 1 1 /32 27/16 .... 172. II.. F............ 9EFG • UL Standard: 698 • CSA Standard: C22............. Div. 149. S219 Standard Drain (Class I.. ‡Application is limited by circuit breaker design – Consult Factory.......

II. Enclosures only can be ordered. Groups C. Div. Thermal Magnetic. 9EFG Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight 3C Ordering Information: To order an enclosure complete with circuit breaker where there is a choice of manufacturer. # With Circuit Bkr. F. 120 VAC/125 VDC. Cat. Groups E. insert the manufacturer's symbol in the designated position of the catalog number. 2. Groups F. General Electric "TEB" Cat. G Cl. Div. Circuit Breaker Poles 1 3 120VAC or 125VDC Hub Size Circuit Bkr. G Cl. I.com US: 1-866-764-5454 FLB220 FLB220 FLB220 FLB220 FLB220 FLB220 TT15 TT20 TT30 TT40 TT50 1 1 1 1 1 TT15 TT20 TT30 TT40 TT50 2 2 2 2 2 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 TT15 TT20 TT30 TT40 TT50 3C 2 Voltage Rating Enclosure 3 3 3 3 3 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 503 . Div. 4. 240 VAC/250 VDC Cl.FLB Series Circuit Breakers and Enclosures 100A Frame. III NEMA 3. Select from listings.crouse-hinds. Amp Rating Without Circuit Bkr. 100 Ampere Frame Size with Non-Interchangeable Trip 240VAC Max. D Cl. 1 & 2. II. 7CD. 1. # 3 /4 15 20 30 40 50 1 15 20 30 40 50 FLB221 FLB221 FLB221 FLB221 FLB221 FLB221 11/2 70 90 100 FLB223 FLB223 TT70 2 FLB223 TT90 2 FLB223 TT100 2 11/4 15 20 30 40 50 FLB222 FLB222 FLB222 FLB222 FLB222 FLB222 11/2 70 90 100 FLB223 FLB223 TT70 3 FLB223 TT90 3 FLB223 TT100 3 240VAC or 125–250VDC 240VAC www.

125–250 VDC Cl. 120–480 VAC. 4. Div. # With Circuit Breaker General Electric "TED" Cat. Cutler-Hammer "EHD" Cat. Div. G Cl. D Cl. Groups C. # With Circuit Bkr. II. I. Thermal Magnetic. Groups E.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 WT15 WT20 WT30 WT40 WT50 WT15 WT20 WT30 WT40 WT50 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business TT15 TT20 TT30 TT40 TT50 TT15 TT20 TT30 TT40 TT50 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 FLB142 TT70 3 FLB142 TT90 3 FLB142 TT100 3 . Amp Rating Without Circuit Bkr. Circuit Breaker Poles 3 504 Hub Size Circuit Bkr. 9EFG Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight 100 Ampere Frame Size with Non-Interchangeable Trip 480VAC Max. # FLB140 FLB140 FLB140 FLB140 FLB140 1 15 20 30 40 50 FLB140 FLB140 FLB140 FLB140 FLB140 FLB140 11/ 2 70 90 100 FLB142 FLB142 WT70 2 FLB142 WT90 2 FLB142 WT100 2 FLB142 TT70 2 FLB142 TT90 2 FLB142 TT100 2 11/ 4 15 20 30 40 50 FLB141 FLB141 FLB141 FLB141 FLB141 FLB141 FLB141 FLB141 FLB141 FLB141 FLB141 11/ 2 70 90 100 FLB142 FLB142 WT70 3 FLB142 WT90 3 FLB142 WT100 3 480VAC or 250VDC 3C 2 Voltage Rating Enclosure 480VAC www. 1 & 2. II. Div.crouse-hinds. III NEMA 3. F.3C FLB Series Circuit Breakers and Enclosures 100A Frame. 2. 1. Cat. Groups F. 7CD. G Cl.

Groups F. G Cl. G Cl. I. 1 & 2. Cat. Amp Rating 15 20 30 40 50 600VAC or 250VDC Circuit Breaker Poles Hub Size 3C 3 Voltage Rating Enclosure 600VAC Circuit Bkr. Div.FLB Series Circuit Breakers and Enclosures Cl. D Cl. 1. F. 9EFG 100A Frame. II. Cat.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 TT15 TT20 TT30 TT40 TT50 3 3 3 3 3 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 505 .crouse-hinds. 600 VAC. Groups E. Thermal Magnetic. Amp Rating www. Circuit Breaker Poles 2 With Circuit Bkr. II. Cutler-Hammer "FDB" Cat. 250 VDC Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight 3C 100 Ampere Frame Size with Non-Interchangeable Trip 600VAC Max. # 11/4 FLB115 11/2 70 90 100 FLB116 FLB116 WT70 2 FLB116 WT90 2 FLB116 WT100 2 11/4 15 20 30 40 50 FLB115 FLB115 FLB115 FLB115 FLB115 FLB115 11/2 70 90 100 FLB116 FLB116 WT70 3 FLB116 WT90 3 FLB116 WT100 3 WT15 WT20 WT30 WT40 WT50 Without Circuit Bkr. Groups C. Div. 7CD. # FLB115 FLB115 FLB115 FLB115 FLB115 600VAC Voltage Rating Circuit Bkr. # 1 /4 15 20 30 40 50 FLB361 FLB361 FLB361 FLB361 FLB361 FLB361 11/2 70 90 100 FLB362 FLB362 TT70 3 FLB362 TT90 3 FLB362 TT100 3 WT15 WT20 WT30 WT40 WT50 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 Enclosure Hub Size 1 3 Without Circuit Bkr. III NEMA 3. 4. Div. General Electric "TED" Cat. # With Circuit Bkr. 2.

Div. II. Cat. D Cl. F. # FLB267 FLB267 FLB267 FLB267 FLB267 FLB267 WT125 WT150 WT175 WT200 WT225 2 2 2 2 2 FLB267 or FLB225 FLB267 FLB267 FLB267 FLB267 FLB267 WT125 WT150 WT175 WT200 WT225 3 3 3 3 3 *Formerly "KB" †Formerly "JB" 506 www. G Cl. # FLB225 FLB225 FLB225 FLB225 FLB225 TT125 TT150 TT175 TT200 TT225 3 3 3 3 3 . Circuit Breaker Poles 2 3 Voltage Rating 600VAC or 250VDC 600VAC Enclosure Hub Size Circuit Bkr. 7CD. Div. # With Circuit Bkr. # With Circuit Bkr. Amp Rating 3 125 150 175 200 225 3 125 150 175 200 225 Without Circuit Bkr. Cutler-Hammer "JD"* Cat. Groups E. Thermal Magnetic.crouse-hinds. Cutler-Hammer "JDB"† Cat. III NEMA 3. 1 & 2. # FLB224 FLB224 FLB224 FLB224 FLB224 TT125 TT150 TT175 TT200 TT225 3 3 3 3 3 100 Ampere Frame Size with Interchangeable Trip 600VAC Max. Amp Rating 125 150 175 200 225 1 Without Circuit Bkr. G Cl. 600 VAC. II. # FLB264 FLB264 FLB264 FLB264 FLB264 FLB264 WT125 WT150 WT175 WT200 WT225 2 2 2 2 2 FLB264 FLB264 FLB264 FLB264 FLB264 FLB264 WT125 WT150 WT175 WT200 WT225 3 3 3 3 3 Without Circuit Bkr. Cat. I. Div. General Electric "TFK" Cat.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business With Circuit Bkr. # FLB224 or FLB346 With Circuit Bkr. 250 VDC 100 Ampere Frame Size with Non-Interchangeable Trip 600VAC Max. 2. Cat. 4.3C FLB Series Circuit Breakers and Enclosures Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight Cl. 1. 9EFG 225A Frame. General Electric "TFJ" Cat. Circuit Breaker Poles 2 Voltage Rating 600VAC or 250VDC Enclosure Circuit Bkr. Amp Rating Hub Size 21/ 2 125 150 175 200 225 125 150 175 200 225 600VAC 21/ 2 Poles Voltage Rating Hub Size 3 600VAC 2 /2 3C 3 Circuit Bkr. Groups F. Groups C.

chemical and petrochemical plants and other process industry facilities where similar hazards exist • To provide disconnect means. gases or combustible dusts • In corrosive locations • For installation at petroleum refineries. 7B*CD. wide flange on both body and cover for flametight joint • Dead-end (EFD) or through feed (EFDC) hubs 3/4" to 1" sizes • Breaker mounted on cover and back wired for ease of installation • Breaker can be padlocked in "ON" or "OFF" positions with trip-free handle mechanism Electrical Ratings: • Single pole – 120 / 240 VAC max. Groups F. 2. short circuit protection and thermal time delay overload protection Features: EFD dead end EFDC through feed 3C • Small. 15 Amp Cat. Division 1. C. "l" /16 /16 13 15 *Seals must be installed within 11/ 2" of each conduit opening. F. 7B*CD. I. II. G Class II. 1. G Cl.EFD and EFDC Series Circuit Breakers and Enclosures 120VAC. and motor circuits • In areas made hazardous due to the presence of flammable vapors. D Class II. D Cl. • Trip ratings – 15. www. Division 2. Groups B*. Options: Certifications and Compliances: Description For use in Group B hazardous areas* • NEC: Class I. Div. F. 9EFG. Groups E. Groups E. 20 and 30 amp. 12 3C Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Applications: EFD circuit breakers and enclosures are used: • For branch circuit protection for lighting. Division 1 & 2. Div. G Class III • NEMA 3. for Group B use. # EFD21105 EFD31105 EFD21106 EFD31106 EFDC Single Gang (Through Feed) /4 EFDC21104 EFDC21105 1 EFDC31104 EFDC31105 EFDC21106 EFDC31106 EFD Two Gang (Dead End) /4 EFD22104 1 EFD32104 EFD22106 EFD32106 3 • Feraloy – electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint • Type 6 / 6 nylon – black • Stainless steel – natural 3 EFD22105 EFD32105 EFDC Two Gang (Through Feed) /4 EFDC22104 EFDC22105 1 EFDC32104 EFDC32105 3 EFDC22106 EFDC32106 Dimensions In Inches†: Hub Size 3 /4 1 Dim. †Dimensions are approximate. III NEMA 3. not for construction purposes. Div. "h" /8 1 7 Dim. # EFD Single Gang (Dead End) 3 /4 EFD21104 1 EFD31104 • Bodies and covers – Feraloy® iron alloy • Operating handles – type 6 / 6 nylon • Operating shafts – stainless steel Standard Finishes: 20 Amp Cat. C. compact enclosures with accurately ground. 12 Suffix GB Ordering Information With Square D Type "QOU" Circuit Breakers Standard Materials: Hub Size in.crouse-hinds. # 30 Amp Cat. II. Groups F.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 507 . G Cl. Groups B*. Single Pole Cl. 1 & 2. 9EFG. appliance.

JDB Cutler-Hammer 400A 600V Circuit Breaker Frame Ampere Rating Number Included Hub Size LAL EB.crouse-hinds. insert the manufacturer’s symbol in the designated position of the catalog number. 150. 4X. # US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 *Formerly EHB. EHD*. Three screws for door frame are hidden behind access door • Access door may be padlocked to prevent unauthorized access • 100. Select from listings. ‡Formerly FB. 508 www. 250 and 400 amp frames Options: Description Suffix • Insulated. FDB‡ JDB■ KDB§ 15–50 60–100 110–225 250–400 2 2 2 2 11/4 2 21/2 3 †Specify voltage. # NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F ➀15EB 22 ➀20EB 22 ➀25EB 22 ➀30EB 22 ➀35EB 22 ➀40EB 22 ➀50EB 22 ➀60EB 22 ➀70EB 22 ➀80EB 22 ➀90EB 22 ➀100EB 22 NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F ➀15EHB 24 ➀20EHB 24 ➀25EHB 24 ➀30EHB 24 ➀35EHB 24 ➀40EHB 24 ➀50EHB 24 ➀60EHB 24 ➀70EHB 24 ➀80EHB 24 ➀90EHB 24 ➀100EHB 24 NCB1018F ➀Circuit Breakers: NOTE ON HUBS: The following number and sizes of hubs (not mounted) are included when circuit breakers are ordered complete. Circuit Breaker Voltage Poles Rating Amps 100A Frame (Non-Interchangeable Trip) 15 20 25 30 35 40 240 VAC/ 2 50 250 VDC 60 70 80 90 100 15 20 25 30 35 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 480 VAC/ 250 VDC 2 Enclosure With Circuit Breaker Cat. FDB JB. 4X and 12 • CSA Standard: C22. §Formerly LB. EHD FB. • NEMA: 3.com Without Circuit Breaker Cat. Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business . Enclosures only can be ordered. FDB‡ EB. 225. groundable type terminal block for grounded or ungrounded neutral can be supplied • Hubs (see "Note on Hubs") – see listing on page 677 • Grounding plate or bushing – see listing on page 677 S618 Circuit breaker enclosure with built-in Krydon material handle Ordering Information To order an enclosure complete with circuit breaker. 94 • UL Standard: 489 Features: Electrical Rating Ranges: • Enclosures are made of Krydon®. If enclosures only are ordered. EHD*. hubs must be ordered separately (see "Options") Frames 600V 225/ 250A 600V Manufacturer General Electric Symbol 100/ 150A 240V 480V TT TEB TED† TED† TFJ Square D DT FAL† FAL† FAL† KAL WT EB EHB. strong and durable enclosure construction provides longer service life for equipment • Enclosure has hinged access door which opens 160° for easy wiring and maintenance. lighting and power circuits to provide disconnect means and short circuit protection.3C NCB Series Circuit Breakers and Enclosures Corrosion-Resistant Dust-tight Watertight Weatherproof NEMA 3.2 No. 250VDC Heavy Duty Applications: Certifications and Compliances: 3C • NCB circuit breakers are for use in conjunction with a variety of heating. 12 600VAC. Eaton's Crouse-Hinds' high impact strength fiberglass-reinforced polyester material having excellent corrosion resistance and stability to heat • Unitized. ■Formerly JB.

12 ➀Circuit Breakers: NCB1018F Manufacturer General Electric Symbol Frames 100/ 150A 240V 480V TT TEB TED† TED† TFJ Square D DT FAL† FAL† FAL† KAL EB EHB. FDB▲ JDB■ ■Formerly JB ✪Formerly EHB ▲Formerly FB 15–50 60–100 110–225 2 2 2 11/4 2 21/2 †Specify voltage. EHD FB. 250VDC Heavy Duty Circuit Breaker Voltage Poles Rating Circuit Breaker Enclosure With Circuit Breaker Amps Cat. JDB Cutler-Hammer WT 600V 225/ 250A 600V 400A 600V LAL Note on Hubs: The following number and sizes of hubs (not mounted) are included when circuit breakers are ordered complete. hubs must be ordered separately (see "Options"). FDB▲ EB. Specify on order. # Without Circuit Breaker Cat. # 225/50A Frame (Non-Interchangeable Trip)§ 110 NCB1024F ➀110JB 125 NCB1024F ➀125JB 600 150 NCB1024F ➀150JB VAC/ 2 175 NCB1024F ➀175JB 250 200 NCB1024F ➀200JB VDC 225 NCB1024F ➀225JB 26 26 26 26 26 26 NCB1024F NCB1024F NCB1024F NCB1024F NCB1024F NCB1024F NCB1024F ➀110JB ➀125JB ➀150JB ➀175JB ➀200JB ➀225JB 36 36 36 36 36 36 NCB1024F 400A Frame (Interchangeable Trip)* 250 NCB1426F 300 NCB1426F 600 VAC/ 2 350 NCB1426F 250 VDC 400 NCB1426F ➀250LB ➀300LB ➀350LB ➀400LB 26 26 26 26 NCB1426F ➀250LB ➀300LB ➀350LB ➀400LB 36 36 36 36 NCB1426F 3 3 600 VDC 600 VAC 110 125 150 175 200 225 250 300 350 400 NCB1426F NCB1426F NCB1426F NCB1426F 3C 100/150A Frame (Non-Interchangeable Trip) – continued 15 NCB1018F ➀15FB 26 20 NCB1018F ➀20FB 26 25 NCB1018F ➀25FB 26 30 NCB1018F ➀30FB 26 35 NCB1018F ➀35FB 26 600 VAC/ 40 NCB1018F ➀40FB 26 2‡ NCB1018F 250 VDC 50 NCB1018F ➀50FB 26 70 NCB1018F ➀70FB 26 80 NCB1018F ➀80FB 26 90 NCB1018F ➀90FB 26 100 NCB1018F ➀100FB 26 15 20 25 30 35 40 50 70 80 90 100 3C Corrosion-Resistant Dust-tight Watertight Weatherproof NEMA 3. # Without Circuit Breaker Cat. FDB JB. 4X.crouse-hinds. NCB1018F Circuit Breaker Frame Ampere Rating Number Included Hub Size EB. EHD✪. ‡2-pole. # 3 3 3 240 VDC 480 VAC 600 VAC NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F ➀15EB 32 ➀20EB 32 ➀25EB 32 ➀30EB 32 ➀35EB 32 ➀40EB 32 ➀50EB 32 ➀70EB 32 ➀80EB 32 ➀90EB 32 ➀100EB 32 15 20 25 30 35 40 50 70 80 90 100 NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F ➀15EHB 34 ➀20EHB 34 ➀25EHB 34 ➀30EHB 34 ➀35EHB 34 ➀40EHB 34 ➀50EHB 34 ➀70EHB 34 ➀80EHB 34 ➀90EHB 34 ➀100EHB 34 15 20 25 30 35 40 50 70 80 90 100 NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F ➀15FB 36 ➀20FB 36 ➀25FB 36 ➀30FB 36 ➀35FB 36 ➀40FB 36 ➀50FB 36 ➀70FB 36 ➀80FB 36 ➀90FB 36 ➀100FB 36 NCB1018F Voltage Poles Rating Enclosure With Circuit Breaker Amps Cat.NCB Series Circuit Breakers and Enclosures 600VAC. §Also available with interchangeable trip breakers. www. If enclosures only are ordered. EHD✪. *For Square D circuit breakers only.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 509 . 600 VAC/250 VDC for Square D circuit breakers only.

12 600VAC. not to be used for construction purposes.crouse-hinds.3C NCB Series Circuit Breakers and Enclosures Corrosion-Resistant Dust-tight Watertight Weatherproof NEMA 3. # l NCB1018 19 /32 NCB1024 NCB1426 25 /32 2713/32 Mounting Dimensions Door Opening Dimensions d mw ml dl 11 /32 8 /32 7 /8 11 /32 1513/32 8 /32 923/32 7 /8 117/8 w 13 13 13 13 23 23 7 7 19 /8 16 /8 511/16 25 /8 271/4 22 /8 2311/16 511/16 911/16 3 *Dimensions are approximate. 250VDC Heavy Duty Dimensions 3C In Inches* Outside Dimensions Cat. 510 www.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 dw 7 3 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 7 . 4X.

Application/Selection see pages 512–513 EDS / EFS Series Control Stations see see see see page page page page 514 519 521 524 see page 527 see pages 530–531 see page 532 see page 533 see page 534 see page 535 see pages 536–537 see page 538 see pages 539–540 MC / MCC Pushbutton.4C Control Stations Hazardous and Non-hazardous Description Page No.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 511 4C FlexStation™ Control Station Components EDSCM Modular Series Bodies DSD Cover and Device Sub-assemblies DSD-SR HP Rated Selector Switch Fully Assembled EDS and EFS Control Stations EDS Pushbutton Stations EFS Pilot Light Stations EDS Combination Pushbutton and Pilot Light Stations EDS Selector Switches EFS Selector Switches EDS Snap Switches EDS Manual Motor Starting Switches EFS Fire Alarm Station EDS / EFS Control Stations Sub-assembly Reference Guide . and Pilot Light Stations see page 541 N2S / N2SC Control Stations see page 544 N2SU / N2SCU Control Stations see page 551 N2FA / N2FAC Fire Alarm Control Stations see page 555 GHG43 Control Stations see page 556 OAC Pushbutton Stations and Selector Switches see page 567 Control Station Covers see page 570 Replacements for Pushbutton and Selector Switch Control Stations see page 571 www.crouse-hinds. Selector Switch.

Groups F. Cl. G II. Div. 7B (Div. Groups E. D II. 7CD. 1. 9EFG Pilot light Pushbutton Selector switch Pilot light Pushbutton Selector switch§ DSD Covers and Device Sub-assemblies Cl. Div. Div. F. panel or junction box mounting with many combinations are available • See "Quick Selector Chart" for guidance Many options are available on: • Material and finishes where special atmospheric conditions prevail • Special features for specific applications. I. Cl. D II. Div. Cl. 9EFG. Groups E. Groups C. Cl. MCC NEC/CEC – Hazardous Area Compliance NEMA/EEMAC Type 3. D II. D I. F. Div. D II. 2. Cl. Where space is limited. D II. Cl. Groups F. See individual control station listings for available options Quick Selector Chart Control Station MC. C. of Devices or Units 1-5* CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business . Div. 7B. Div. Div. G III 3. 9EFG Pilot light Pushbutton Selector switch Pilot light Pushbutton Selector switch DSD-SR Cl. Div. Div. Div. 2. F. Cl. I. Groups B. Groups F. 5. Cl. I. 9EFG Pilot light Pushbutton Selector switch 1-15* Surface 1-15 gang Ground joint 3. Cl. 1. 2. 2. Groups E. G II. Cl.com US: 1-866-764-5454 No. 2. Groups C. G III 3. Cl. Div. 7BCD. 4 Factory Sealed EDS. G II. Groups B. Groups F. Div. Cl. 1. 1. Cl. Cl. Groups F.crouse-hinds. I. 7CD. Div. Groups E.4C Control Stations Application and Selection Quick Selector Chart Applications: 4C Control stations are used as a remote means of: • Motor control • Visual indication of equipment performance • On-off control of circuits • Circuit selection Options: Considerations for Selection: • The environment of the control station location and requirements for construction in terms of NEC/CEC compliances and NEMA/EEMAC type • Function to be performed • Desirability of factory sealing as compared to field sealing • Factory sealing has distinct advantages: Less installation problems Less time consuming Less change of error Lower installed cost Accommodates future changes to circuitry Greater reliability • The number of controls required. G II. C. 1 & 2. Div. G III 3. Cl. Div. C. I. Div. Groups B. 1. 2. Cl. G III EFS§ Cl. C. F. 1 & 2. 9EFG Pilot light Pushbutton Selector switch 1-2* Surface 1 gang Ground joint Function Pushbutton Pilot light Selector switch Pilot light§ Pushbutton Selector switch *Number of devices per unit. D I. §Factory-sealed units. Groups C. Groups B. Groups E. Cl. 1 & 2. F. EDSC§ Cl. and the space available for installation. 1. G III Type of Mounting Surface 1-5 gang Cover Style Gasketed 1-2* Surface 1-2 gang Ground joint 1 Surface 1 gang Ground joint Selector Switch 1 Surface 1 gang Ground joint 3. 2. 12 EDSCM Cl. 512 www. G II. 1. 2) CD.

Div. 2.Control Stations 4C Application and Selection Quick Selector Chart Quick Selector Chart (continued) Control NEC/CEC – Hazardous Area Station Compliances FlexStation Cl. C. Groups A. Zones 1 and 2 Eex de IIC. 7ABCD. B. www. Div. 12 No.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 513 4C GHG43 Factory Sealed Pilot light Pushbutton . 2. 9EFG Function Pilot light Pushbutton Cl. Div. Div. I. D Cl. Div. II. 2. I. D 3. Div. B. Div. C. G Cl. III 3. G Cl. F. 2. Div. N2SCU Cl. Div. 12 OAC Cl. F. I. G Cl. Groups F. I. D Cl. C. Groups B. T6 Cl. Groups B. C. 7B (Div. I. T6 Zones 21 and 22 Pushbutton Signal Lamp Potentiometer Ammeter Selector Switch Terminal Blocks N2FA. (A)Ex de IIB + H2. Groups A. 1. 1. 2. I. Div. I. 1. 7BCD. 2) CD. 9EFG. 12 Fire Alarm N2S. II. C. 1. 4X. Zones 1 and 2. D 3. D Cl. D 4X. Groups E. Groups A. Groups E. 2. of Devices Type of Cover or Units Mounting Style 1-2-3 Surface Ground joint 1-2 gang 1-4* Surface 1 gang Screw and Gasket Pushbutton Selector switch 1 Surface 1 gang Screw and Gasket Pilot light Pushbutton Selector switch Combination Pilot light Pushbutton Selector switch Combination 1-4* Surface 1 gang Screw and Gasket Pushbutton Selector switch Pushbutton Selector switch 1-2* Surface 1 gang Threaded *Number of devices per unit.crouse-hinds. I. F. T6. IP66 Cl. II. N2SC N2SU. Groups C. B. 7BCD. D Cl. 1. II. Groups F. G Cl. 2. Div. G PTB ATEX Certified 3117 CENELEC EEx de IIC. Groups B. II. N2FAC Cl. III NEMA/EEMAC Type 3. Groups E. Div. C.

2) CD. Division 1. and pilots lights offer a choice of functions. I. G Class III • Zone 1 & 2 Group IIB* • NEMA: 3R. • Pushbuttons and guards – Type 6 / 6 nylon. • Single-hole. Division 1 & 2. 12 • UL Standard: 1203 †Covers have same length and width as back boxes. Class II. Description Suffix Copper-free aluminum bodies and covers SA Corro-free™ epoxy finish for use in severely corrosive environments. 9EFG. 2). • Rugged control devices for safe. bearings – stainless steel.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business .crouse-hinds. and other industrial process facilities. • Copper-free aluminum – natural. in areas which are hazardous due to the presence of flammable gases and vapors. *For Class I. reliable operation in industrial applications. ® Electrical Ratings: • Pushbuttons and selector switches – 600 VAC heavy duty (NEMA A600). and bodies – are combined to provide a variety of control stations which are: • For use indoors or outdoors. two. S752 Standard Finishes: • Feraloy iron alloy – electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint. or 1" dead-end or through-feed conduit hubs with integral bushing for protection of wire insulation. Groups E. D Class II. 7B* (Div. use the EFS(C) complete control station catalog numbers see page 528. 12 4C Applications: Five modular components – operators. Division 1 & 2. contact blocks. and three-hole covers for one. G Cl. or combustible dust. covers. Groups B* (Div. petrochemical. • Pilot lights – 120 VAC. Div.4C EDS / EFS Series Control Stations FlexStation™ Control Station Components Cl. D Cl. 1 & 2. 2) CD. F. covers – Feraloy® or copper-free aluminum. secure installation. 2 only) C. Space is available for field markings. • Stainless steel – natural. FlexStation covers and bodies. • For installation in petroleum refineries. • Bodies have 1/2". maintained contact pushbuttons. legend plates. Div. also include two integral mounting feet for fast. Dimensions In Inches: Certifications and Compliances: • NEC Class I. 9 EFG. • Used in conjunction with magnetic starters or contactors for remote control of motors and other electrical apparatus. F. or three devices respectively per station. II. and other heavy industrial applications where Class I. 1 & 2. grain processing and storage facilities. • DL legend plates have large lettering to give clear indication of device function. Groups E. • Operating shafts. 514 www. chemical. • Bodies. Groups B (Div. Standard Materials: Options: • Bodies. two-hole. with extra room for wire pulling and termination. or Class III hazards are present. Group B or Zone 1 Hydrogen applications. • Covers and bodies are available in Feraloy® or copper-free aluminum for light weight and corrosion resistance. • Selector switches in 2 or 3 position configurations including keyed and spring return options. C. 3/4". Features: • Momentary contact pushbuttons. III Zone 1 & 2 Group IIB NEMA 3R. 7B (Div.

com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 515 4C Specify color for each pushbutton button (ex: DEV11G.) for use with 1 or 2 contact blocks 3-position (pos. pos. I. pos. standard black button Description Cat. # 2-position (pos.) for use with 1 or 2 contact blocks 3-position (pos.O. 1 – N. pos. D Cl.C.. DEV22 and DEV44 may not be used on a three-operator (DS443-SA) cover. 1 – N. www.C. Div. 3 – N.C.O. DEV12. 2) CD. A600 rating ESWP126 For additional technical information see page 571. For product details see page 571.. for Switch A) (pos. for Switch B) for use with 2 contact blocks DEV42 DEV43 Options Suffix Spring return to center from right (For DEV43 or DEV44 only) Spring return to center from left (For DEV43 or DEV44 only) Spring return to center from right and left (For DEV43 or DEV44 only) Key Operated – removable from all positions Key Operated – removable from left position for DEV42 or from center for DEV43 and DEV44 Key Operated – removable from right position for DEV42 or from left for DEV43 and DEV44 Key Operated – removable from right position for DEV43 and DEV44 S634 S635 S842 S847 S847 S847 S847 DEV44 K1 K2 K3 K4 STEP 2 – Select Contact Block (if required).. Note . 1 NO and 1 NC. Select device operators accordingly.unmarked G Red button .O. 1 – N. G Cl. II. Color is black if unspecified..crouse-hinds.O. DEV22GR). DEV42 and DEV43 may not be used on a three-operator cover when using them with two contact blocks.EDS / EFS Series Control Stations 4C Cl. Div.C. 12 FlexStation™ Control Station Components STEP 1 – Select Operator Pushbutton – front operated. 2 – N. # Contact block. Contact Block Description Cat. pos. 2 only) C.O. not available S769 on DEV22) (Push to stop only) . 10A. 1 & 2. # Single button for 1 contact block Single button for 2 contact blocks Double buttons for 2 contact blocks DEV11 DEV12 DEV22 Options Suffix Pilot Light – factory sealed. 3 – N. Groups E. 7B* (Div.Each control station will accept a maximum of three contact blocks. 2 – Open. 1 – N. 600VAC. 9 EFG.unmarked R Momentary red mushroom head style (not available with lockout or with DEV22) S111 Lockout with bar and chain (available on DEV11 and DEV12) S153 Maintained red mushroom head style (lockout comes standard. 1 & 2. pos.. incandescent lamp Description Pilot Pilot Pilot Pilot Pilot light light light light light with with with with with Cat. do not specify S153. 2 – N. pos. Groups B (Div. III Zone 1 & 2 Group IIB NEMA 3R. F. 3 – N.. 2 – N. pos.O. # red jewel green jewel amber jewel clear jewel blue LED and clear jewel DEV30 DEV30 DEV30 DEV30 DEV30 Options Suffix LED lamps (standard clear jewel with colored lamp) 24 V lamp (not available with transformer feature) 240 / 120 V pilot light transformer 480 / 120 V pilot light transformer 600 / 120 V pilot light transformer LED S300 T2 T4 T5 J1 J3 J6 J10 J11 LED Selector Switch – with standard lockout Description Cat. Green button .

Not available on three operator cover (DS443-SA) SA S752 S753 www.4C EDS / EFS Series Control Stations FlexStation™ Control Station Components Cl. 2491-SA or 3491-SA series of back boxes) Replacement cover plug for unused device operator openings DS441 DS442 DS443 SA 206765 Options: Suffix Aluminum body (mandatory suffix on DS443 must be included in catalog number) Exterior epoxy powder coat finish Interior & exterior epoxy powder coat finish. # Inscription Cat. Div. 12 4C STEP 3 – Select Desired Legend Plates For use with single hole covers For use with 2 or 3 hole covers Cat. I. Groups B (Div. 1 & 2. 9 EFG. F. # Blank cover with single hole (Single gang) Blank cover with 2 holes (Single gang) Blank cover with 3 holes (To be used with EFD(C)1491-SA. III Zone 1 & 2 Group IIB NEMA 3R. Groups E.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business . Div. # Inscription Cat. 7B* (Div. II.crouse-hinds. D Cl. # Inscription DL101 DL128 DL129 DL130 DL132 DL133 DL135 DL136 DL137 DL138 DL139 DL140 DL141 DL142 DL143 DL144 DL148 DL149 DL165 DL186 DL187 DL188 DL189 DL190 DL191 DL192 DL193 DL194 DL195 DL196 DL197 DL198 DL199 Blank Run-Jog Hand-Auto Forward-Reverse Open-Close Up-Down In-Out Raise-Lower Start-Stop Run-Off-Jog Hand-Off-Auto For-Off-Rev Fast-Off-Slow 1-Off-2 Open-Off-Close Up-Off-Down Off-On Auto-Off-Hand Slow-Fast Safe-Run Raise-Off-Lower Slow-Off-Fast Odd-Off-Even Stop-Start On-Off Fast-Slow Local-Remote Trip-Reset Auto-Manual Start-Emer Stop Alarm-Silence Maint-Manual Test-Reset DL01 DL02 DL03 DL05 DL06 DL07 DL08 DL09 DL10 DL11 DL12 DL13 DL14 DL15 DL16 DL17 DL18 DL19 DL20 DL21 DL22 DL23 DL24 DL25 DL26 DL27 DL28 DL29 DL30 Blank w/no fields Blank w/single field Blank w/2 fields Start Stop On Off Run Jog Trip Reset Test Power On Hand Automatic Emer Stop Forward Reverse Open Close Up Down In Out Raise Lower Run-Jog Hand-Auto Forward-Reverse DL32 DL33 DL35 DL36 DL37 DL38 DL39 DL40 DL41 DL42 DL43 DL44 DL46 DL47 DL48 DL49 DL65 DL85 DL86 DL87 DL88 DL89 DL90 DL91 DL92 DL93 DL94 DL95 DL96 DL97 DL98 DL99 Open-Close Up-Down In-Out Raise-Lower Start-Stop Run-Off-Jog Hand-Off-Auto For-Off-Rev Fast-Off-Slow 1-Off-2 Open-Off-Close Up-Off-Down Fast Slow Off-On Auto-Off-Hand Slow-Fast Safe Safe-Run Raise-Off-Lower Slow-Off-Fast Odd-Off-Even Stop-Start On-Off Fast-Slow Local-Remote Trip-Reset Auto-Manual Start-Emer Stop Alarm-Silence Maint-Manual Test-Reset Note: For special markings order DL101-"desired markings" or DL01-"desired markings" STEP 4 – Select Cover Covers 516 Description Cat. 1 & 2. G Cl. 2) CD. 2 only) C.

2) CD. I. F.for use with DS441 and DS442 covers or with 1 gang and 2 gang DS/DSD Series covers Dead End Through Feed Hub Size Back Box Arrangement EDS171 EDS271 EDS371 EFS172 EFS272 EFS372 EDSC171 EDSC271 EDSC371 EFSC172 EFSC272 EFSC372 1 /2" 3 /4" 1" 1 /2" 3 /4" 1" Single gang back box Single gang back box Single gang back box Double gang back box Double gang back box Double gang back box Suffix Aluminum body Exterior epoxy powder coat finish Interior & exterior epoxy powder coat finish SA S752 S753 4C Options: Back Boxes – for use with DS443-SA cover or with 11/2 gang DS511 (3-operator) Series covers Dead End Through Feed Hub Size Back Box Arrangement EFD1491 SA EFD2491 SA EFD3491 SA EFDC1491 SA EFDC2491 SA EFDC3491 SA /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/2 gang back box 11/2 gang back box 11/2 gang back box 1 Options Suffix Exterior epoxy powder coat finish Interior & exterior epoxy powder coat finish S752 S753 www. Groups B (Div.EDS / EFS Series Control Stations Cl. 7B* (Div. 1 & 2.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 517 . II. III Zone 1 & 2 Group IIB NEMA 3R. Div. Groups E. 12 FlexStation™ Control Station Components 4C STEP 5 – Select Back Box Back Boxes . D Cl. 9 EFG. Div. G Cl. 1 & 2. 2 only) C.crouse-hinds.

Div.4C EDS / EFS Series Control Stations Cl. Color Symbol Color Symbol Color Symbol Red Green J6 J10 Blue J11 J1 J3 Amber Clear ➁Add suffix below for transformer primary voltage: Transformers – Voltages above 125 Nom. II. 12 FlexStation™ Control Station Components Back Boxes – for use with DS441 and DS442 covers Through Feed Hub Size Back Box Arrangement EDSC378 1" 3 gang tandem Common Cover Assemblies Description With one pilot light With one pilot light and transformer With two pilot lights With one pushbutton With two pushbuttons With one pushbutton and one pilot light 4C Cat. markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number. 7B* (Div. III Zone 1 & 2 Group IIB NEMA 3R. Groups B (Div. 1 & 2.crouse-hinds. # DS455 ➀ DS476 ➀ ➁ DS456 ➀ ➀ DS429§ DS454§ DS510 ➀§ ➀Add color symbol for each pilot light from table below.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 LIGHT ON HAND AUTOMATIC RAISE LOWER Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business . 1 & 2. Select from the list of standard markings below: OFF RESET START RUN TRIP STOP JOG TEST ON OPEN DOWN EMERGENCY CLOSE IN FORWARD UP OUT REVERSE 518 www. 2 only) C. I. 2) CD. Volts 50–60Hz Transformer Primary Voltage Range Suffix 220 / 110 440 / 110 550 / 110 220–240 440–480 550–600 T2 T4 T5 § If desired. F. 9 EFG. G Cl. Div. Groups E. D Cl.

Groups F. Features: EDSCM Modular Control Stations have many distinct advantages over multiple individual units: • Reduce installation costs. Standard Materials: • Copper-free aluminum In Class I areas all conduit runs entering bodies must be sealed. are furnished with EDSCM 21. Finish: • Natural www. paint and varnish manufacturing plants. coal processing or handling areas where atmospheres may contain hazardous gases or dusts. Division 2. Div. D Cl.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 519 . Div. • Two and three gang tandem bodies have 11/4" through feed inward horizontal hubs and 1" or 2" vertical through feed hubs.crouse-hinds. D Class I. Fifteen-gang aluminum device body can be installed by one person. Ordering Information Certifications and Compliances: EDSCM21 (When used with DSD device sub-assemblies)*: Class I. F. G Class II. 7B (Div. the assembly meets requirements for Class I.2) CD. II. G Class III • NEMA/EEMAC: 3. II. Groups C. compressors. • Single-gang device bodies have 1" through feed inward horizontal hubs and 3/4" through feed vertical hubs. which are used to join two or more device bodies together. 9EFG • UL Standard: 1203 • CSA Standard: C22. • Seals not required between gangs. portable tools. oil and gas refineries. # /4" 1" 2" 1" 2" EDSCM21 EDSCM32 EDSCM62 EDSCM33 EDSCM63 3 * When a CPS receptacle cover device is used. conveyors. C. † EDSCM32 and EDSCM62 will not accept covers with S697 or S701 suffixes.EDS / EFS Series Control Stations EDSCM Modular Multi-Gang Control Device Bodies Cl. etc. • Any combination of bodies can be joined together horizontally. grain processing industries. 2. Groups B. I. Division 2. D Class II. ‡ Bottom gang opening will accept covers with S697 or S701 suffixes. Pipe plugs are installed in one horizontal hub and both vertical hubs. • Mounting feet are provided on the top and bottom of every gang to facilitate installation. 2. A multi-gang device assembly can be installed in less time than several single-gang units. 2) CD. D* Cl. • Close nipples. Division 1 & 2. Groups C. G Cl. • Controlling and supplying energy to portable electrical devices such as motor generator sets. gasoline bulk loading terminals. Groups C and D areas only. • Conjunction with magnetic starters or contactors for remote control and monitoring motors. Div. As many as five bodies can be joined horizontally without an intervening seal. Pipe plugs are installed in one horizontal hub and both vertical hubs. • Manual starting and stopping of small AC or DC motors. C. Groups F. Division 1. 32. III NEMA 3. 62 and 63 units. 7B (Div. Group B. • Lightweight. 33. Applications: 4C Modular control device bodies are for surface mounting combinations of control device equipment for use in: • Industrial areas such as chemical plants. • All hubs are taper tapped and have integral bushings. Div. 1. Groups E.2 No. G Cl. 30 EDSCM32† EDSCM62† EDSCM33‡ EDSCM63‡ Description Single Gang Tandem Two Gang Tandem Two Gang Tandem Three Gang Tandem Three Gang Through Feed Hub Size Cat. 9EFG Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations 4C For use with DSD device cover sub-assemblies see page 521. 1. • Improved appearance. grain elevators. Groups E. F. No exposed conduit runs between devices. I. and arcing of enclosed devices must not ignite the surrounding atmosphere.

Groups B. 2) CD. Groups C and D areas only. 1. the assembly meets requirements for Class I. 1. F. II. Groups C. Not for construction purposes. 2. III NEMA 3. C. Dimensions are approximate. 9EFG EDS / EFS Series Control Stations 4C EDSCM Modular Multi-Gang Control Device Bodies Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Dimensions 4C In Inches: EDSCM21 EDSCM32 EDSCM62 EDSCM33 EDSCM63 * When a CPS receptacle cover device is used. Div. Groups F.Cl. D* Cl. II.crouse-hinds. Div. G Cl. Groups E.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business . Div. G Cl. Div. I. D Cl. 2. 7B (Div. I. 520 www.

............ S847 K2 • Key Operated – removable from right position for DEV42 or from left for DEV43 and DEV44........ F........ S842 • Key Operated – removable from all positions.. S847 K1 • Key Operated – removable from left position for DEV42 or from center for DEV43 and DEV44........ Division 1..... Groups B*................ Division 1..... Division 1...... G Class II........ Pilot Lights & Selector Switches (when used with EFS bodies): • NEC/CEC: Class I. C... ➀ Includes one interchangeable heater....... S634 Momentary contact counter-clockwise operation.... Volts A.......... Groups F... S847 K3 • Key Operated – removable from right position for DEV43 and DEV44...... Groups E.. F..... 7BCD............... Division 1 & 2........ Division 2.. & selector switches. #: Description Suffix • Lockout provision on front operated pushbutton cover (standard on buttons marked "STOP" and "OFF")........ Group B applications...... D Class II......................... the assembly meets requirements for Class I........ front operated – Feraloy iron alloy and copper-free aluminum • Covers... S153 • Three-position selector switches with modified operation: Momentary contact clockwise operation..................................2 No......must specify legend text) S111 • Bodies and covers – copper-free aluminum........................ G Class III • NEMA/EEMAC: 3. I. Symbol 0 (zero) may be used to indicate heater omitted........ spring return to center.............. spring return to center.......... G Cl......crouse-hinds............ S769 • Spring return to center from right and left (For DEV43 or DEV44 only). within 5 feet for Class I. S847 K4 Ordering Information Manual Motor Starters Poles Max.......... 1........C...... 9EFG DSD Cover and Device Sub-assemblies For use with EDSCM modular control device bodies see page 519 and EDS/EDSC back boxes... Div................. 2.....2 No................................ To select heater see pages 479–480.... pilot lights... III NEMA 3. II. D† Class I.................. Groups B.. side operated – copper-free aluminum • Shafts and shaft bushings – stainless steel • Rocker handles........... * For pushbuttons.... D† Cl.............................. SA • For 24 VDC operation on pilot lights.P...................... F......... To order... G Class III • NEMA/EEMAC: 3............. add suffix S701 to catalog number............. Division 2..... H.... C.... 7B (Div... II.......... use EFS back box with required external conduit seal for 1 inch hub size.. Groups C and D areas only.. G Class II......... Groups F......................... 2) CD..... Division 1 & 2..................... # † When a CPS receptacle cover device is used.... S300 • Maintained contact mushroom head with lockout and guard (Will not fit with a pilot light if transformer is required) (Push to stop only)... Groups F........ maintained contact clockwise operation. Groups C...........EDS / EFS Series Control Stations Cl... 1 & 2. Division 2..... EDS and EDSC bodies and in bottom gang of EDSCM33 and EDSCM63 bodies... 9EFG • UL Standard: 1203 • CSA Standard: C22..........5 3 15 250 600 250 600 DSD916 DSD916 DSD917 DSD917 www.. Div........ Div......... Groups B....... G Cl.5 3 7.......... D Class II. Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations 4C Standard Finishes: • Feraloy – electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint • Copper-free aluminum – natural Features: Certifications and Compliances: (When used with EDSCM & EDS bodies): • NEC/CEC: Class I..... US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 521 4C • Large machine screws for fastening covers to bodies • Lockout hole for padlock having 1/4" hasp is provided when used with covers for front lever and side rocker type operation • Lockout provisions on front operated pushbutton (marked "STOP" and "OFF") and all selector switch covers • For covers with front lever and side rocker type operating handles.... Max............ § A comparable factory sealed cover will fit on the EDSCM21 body....... 30 Pushbuttons........... pushbuttons and guards – type 6 / 6 nylon • Sealing enclosures – copper-free aluminum CPS delayed action receptacle cover: • Receptacle housing – copper-free aluminum • Insulation – diallyl phthalate (DAP) • Contacts – brass Options: The following special options are available by adding suffix to Cat......... Groups E.. threaded type shafts and bushings are used to ensure flametightness • Accurately ground flange for flametight joint when mated with ground flange on back box ....... 698 • CSA Standard: C22... With Allen-Bradley Bulletin 600 Switches 1 1 115–230 2 1 115–230 DSD910 ➀ DSD911 ➀ With General Electric Switches 1 1 2 1 115–230 115–230 DSD912 ➀§ DSD913 ➀§ With Cutler-Hammer Switches 1 1 2 1 115–230 115–230 DSD914 ➀§ DSD915 ➀§ With Arrow-Hart Switches Without Overload Protection 2 5 2 7............ 30 Standard Materials: • Covers.. Groups E.... maintained contact counter-clockwise operation....... 7B*CD.......... 9EFG • UL Standards: 894........ S635 • Emergency "STOP" button momentary – front operated mushroom button breaks normally closed contacts (DL02 legend plate included . C....com (30A) (30A) (30A) (20A) Cat...........

. Example: DS513-J3 JOG-J1 STOP GREEN-SA. & selector switches. 480 VAC. Division 2. 11/2 HP. 7B*CD. Pushbuttons include contact blocks. EDSCM21 and the bottom gang of EDSCM33 and EDSCM63 bodies. within 5 feet for Class I. 125V. First color is for uppermost button. # Rating Cat. 18 VDC CPS152R (2 wire. D† Cl. 125–250 VAC 60 Hertz. G Cl. 3 pole) 1 1 Circuit Universal DSD918 ➀ 1 2 Circuits Universal DSD919 ➀ 30 A. 7A. Groups C and D areas only. III NEMA 3. F. ✪ Cannot be factory sealed. Group B.. 2. Division 1. # 20 A. green . 1. Groups E. II. 9EFG DSD Cover and Device Sub-Assemblies DSD918 DSD922 DSD933 DSD962 DSD970 Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations CPS152R ENR5201 For use with EDSCM modular control device bodies see page 519 & EFS/EDS back boxes. 250 VAC 6-20R Amperes 120 VAC 20 20 30 30 30 Factory Sealed 5-20R Front Operated General Use Snap Switch Style General Purpose. the assembly meets requirements for Class I. pilot lights. 1 HP. # 20 A. 4C Ordering Information Front Operated Pushbutton Stations Delayed Action Receptacles 600 VAC Heavy Duty. Groups B*. 1 HP. 1 & 2. 1/2 HP. 3 HP. 1 red button. markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number. 250V. # 20 20 20 20 ▲ ▲ DSD933‡ DSD934‡ DSD935✪ DSD936‡ DSD937‡ DSD939‡ DSD940‡ DSD941‡ www. 60 Hertz CPS732R (3 wire. 10 Amp. † When a CPS receptacle cover device is used. 125–250 VAC 60 Hertz. Factory sealed for Class I. Group B applications. For optional legend markings write in marking after device operator color. Div. 60 Hertz CPS532R (2 wire. II.crouse-hinds.red. 125–250 VAC 60 Hertz 20 A. Dead Front 20 20 30 30 30 US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 OFF RUN JOG OPEN CLOSE UP RESET TRIP TEST DOWN IN OUT LIGHT ON HAND AUTOMATIC RAISE LOWER * For pushbuttons. must be wired as two circuits with one normally open and one normally closed. Groups F. 1 green button. ■ Two universal contact blocks. Select from the list of standard markings below: 3 (3-operator) 3 Circuits Universal DS511 ➀ SA§ 3 (3-operator) 3 Circuits Universal Double pilot light single pushbutton combo DS513 ➀ SA§ START STOP ON EMERGENCY FORWARD REVERSE 3 (3-operator) 3 Circuits Universal Double pushbutton single pilot light combo DS514 ➀ SA§ 1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole 3-Way 4-Way 1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Way 522 277 VAC Cat. EDSC.write in color. add suffix S697. Div. 7 A. G Cl. Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business . Div. 125 VAC ENR5201 Diagram ENR6202 20 A. use EFS back box with required external conduit seal for 1 inch hub size.com Rating Cat. Standard pushbutton color is black. and lockout provision provided as standard.4C EDS / EFS Series Control Stations Cl. 4 pole) 2 2 Circuits Universal DSD921 ➀ 2 2 Circuits Start-Stop unless otherwise specified DSD922 ➀■ 2 2 Circuits Universal Mushroom Head DSD970 ➀ 3 (2-operator) 3 Circuits Universal DSD962 ➀ ➀If desired. 480 VAC. ▲16 Amp. For optional colors . § Can only be used with EFD Series 11/ 2 gang back boxes. Factory Sealed Factory Sealed Number of Normal Cover Buttons Position Diagram Cat. ‡ To order a comparable factory sealed cover for EDS. I. 3 pole) 2 Circuits DSD920 ➀■ 30 A. C. Example: DS511 GREEN BLACK RED-SA.

3 .C. LOWER START. STOP 1. Div. REVERSE FAST.C. 2 . # Two Circuit DSD923 ➃ Four Circuit DSD924 ➃ Red Green J1 J3 Amber Clear J6 J10 Blue J11 ➁Add suffix below for transformer primary voltage: Transformers – Voltages above 125 DSD925 ➃ Two Circuit DSD926 ➃ Three Position Four Circuit DSD927 ➃ * For pushbuttons. 9EFG DSD Cover and Device Sub-Assemblies 4C Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Pilot Light Devices‡ Factory Sealed Description Diagram Cat.write in color. Groups B*. 2 . II.B Start-Stop unless otherwise specified DSD951 ➂ DS512 ➀ SA§ Double pilot light .N. SLOW OPEN.. SLOW CAN: 1-800-265-0502 IN.C. OFF. OFF. pos. 2 . 7B*CD.. 1 . 1 . after last color symbol. D Cl. pos. 2 . for both switches) 3 position selector switch. RUN AUTOMATIC. two circuit (pos.open.O. 2 OPEN. www. OFF RUN.O. Div. 1 .. OFF. pos.open. Groups F. Example: DS511 GREEN BLACK RED-SA.N. pos.single pilot light combo 2 position selector switch. CLOSE UP.N. G Cl. 1 . JOG HAND. 3 .. pos. Volts 50–60Hz Transformer Primary Voltage Range Suffix 220 / 110 440 / 110 550 / 110 220–240 440–480 550–600 T2 T4 T5 ➂ If desired. pos. For optional colors .. within 5 feet for Class I.N. G Cl. # DSD948 ➀ With one pilot light DSD951 DSD925 DSD947-J1-J1 Ordering Information Side Operated Pushbutton Station 600 VAC Heavy Duty. No. HAND FORWARD. Standard indicating plate markings available are as follows: Two-Position FAST. DOWN ON.. pos. use EFS back box with required external conduit seal for 1 inch hub size. Groups E. Div. 1 & 2.N.crouse-hinds.N. # DSD957 ➀Add color symbol for each pilot light from table below. OFF. For optional legend markings write in marking after device operator color.N. Standard pushbutton color is black. With two pilot lights (Not available with a transformer) With one pilot light and transformer With one pilot light and pushbutton station With one pilot light and 1 double pushbutton station With one pilot light & transformer and 1 double pushbutton station .. Factory Sealed Normal Position Diagram Cat. & selector switches.N. ‡LED pilot lights can be furnished in place of standard incandescent pilot lamps. 3 . for switch A.O.com US: 1-866-764-5454 Nom. pos. # 1 Circuit Universal DSD949 ➂ 2 Circuits Universal DSD950 ➂ 2 Circuits 1 Open . four circuit (pos. pos.N. 2 .A 1 Closed .O. four circuit (pos.) 2 position selector switch.O. 1 . C.N.EDS / EFS Series Control Stations Cl.N.O. F. four circuit (pos. two circuit (pos. for switch B) DS513 ➀ SA§ Description DSD958 ➀ DSD961 ➀ DSD961 ➀ ➁ DS514 ➀ SA§ DSD973 ➀ ➃ DSD974 ➀ ➃ DSD975 ➀ ➃ DSD976 ➀ ➃ DSD977 ➀ ➃ Cat. REVERSE Three-Position JOG. DOWN Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 523 4C DSD958 DSD957 DSD961-J1 For use with EDSCM modular control device bodies see page 519 & EFS/EDS back boxes. Example: DS513-J3 JOG-J1 STOP GREEN-SA. OUT RAISE. 2. Select from the list of standard markings below: START STOP ON EMERGENCY FORWARD REVERSE OFF RUN JOG OPEN CLOSE UP RESET TRIP TEST DOWN IN OUT LIGHT ON HAND AUTOMATIC RAISE LOWER ➃ Specify indicating plate markings. CLOSE UP. § Can only be used with EFD Series 11/ 2 gang back boxes.C. Color Symbol Color Symbol Color Symbol Blank Cover Maintained Contact 600 VAC Heavy Duty. OFF. Division 1. pilot lights.. First color is for uppermost button.N. 3 . OFF. 1 .) 3 position selector switch. OFF.O. III NEMA 3. markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number. 1.N. Add suffix LED to Cat. green .N. for both switches) 3 position selector switch. II. pos. Pushbuttons include contact blocks.single pushbutton combo Double pushbutton .O. Group B applications. pos. AUTOMATIC FORWARD. I.C.C. 2 . Factory Sealed Two Position Triple pilot light DSD948 ➀ ➁ Blank Cover Selector Switches Style DSD947 ➀ Position 1 Position 2 Position 3 Cat.red.

# Number of Poles Number of Positions ON/OFF DSD DSD DSD DSD DSD DSD SR30120 SR30220 SR30320 SR30420 SR30520 SR30620 1 2 3 4 5 6 2 2 2 2 2 2 DSD SR30121 DSD SR30221 DSD SR30321 1 2 3 2 2 2 DOUBLE-THROW without OFF Connecting Diagram 1-6 Pole 4C 1-3 Pole DOUBLE-THROW without OFF with electrically isolated contacts DOUBLE-THROW with OFF DSD SR30123 DSD SR30223 DSD SR30323 1 2 3 2 2 2 1-3 Pole DSD SR30132 DSD SR30232 DSD SR30332 1 2 3 3 3 3 1-3 Pole DOUBLE-THROW with OFF and electrically isolated contacts DSD SR30134 DSD SR30234 DSD SR30334 1 2 3 3 3 3 1-3 Pole Electrical Specification Horsepower Rating 3PH 1PH Voltage 120 3 240 7. handle in either position S349 DSD-SR cover assembly shown mounted to an EDS back box *For CEC applications only.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business . Front Operated Cl. Groups C & D Cl.5 480 10 600 10 Maximum Current: 30 A 1.EDS / EFS Series Control Stations 4C DSD-SR Series Horsepower Rated Selector Switch* 30 A. III Enclosure 3. II. Groups E.crouse-hinds. handle in either position Suffix SX178 Lockout for 3 position switch. 524 www. F & G Cl. I.5 3 5 5 Heavy-duty A600 rating Options: Description Lockout for 2 position switch. 5 & 12 Ordering Information Switch Function Cat. 600 V.

... Groups B*........ produces flametightness of enclosure joints • On enclosures with front lever and side rocker type operating handles........... spring return to center. EDS units suitable for Class I.......... SA • Where indicated in the catalog listings. Prevents accumulation of dirt and entrance of water around operating shafts • Mounting lugs and taper tapped hubs with integral bushings • Large machine screws for fastening covers to bodies • Lockout provisions on front operated pushbutton (marked "STOP" and "OFF") and selector switch covers • Lockout hole for padlock having 1/ 4" hasp is provided when used with covers for front lever and side rocker type operation • Close tolerances in machining of wide. II.......... S769 • Spring return to center from right and left . Div. 7B*CD. Group B as standard. copper-free aluminum • Front operated pushbutton and pilot light covers – Feraloy iron alloy • Side operated type pushbutton covers – copper-free aluminum • Shafts – stainless steel • Shaft bushings – stainless steel • Rocker handle and pushbutton guards – type 6 / 6 nylon • Sealing enclosures – copper-free aluminum 4C Features: 4C Standard Finishes: • • • • Feraloy iron alloy – electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint Copper-free aluminum – natural Type 6 / 6 nylon – black Stainless steel – natural Options: The following special options are available from the factory by adding suffix to Cat.. S111 • Lockout provision on front operated pushbutton cover (standard on buttons marked "OFF" and "STOP")..... 30 Factory sealed devices have many distinct advantages: • Reduce installation problems • Eliminate external seals • Lower installation costs • Improve safety • Are used with general purpose snap and pushbutton type switches • Standard neoprene covers for front operated pushbuttons.... Division 1. grain elevators...... Division 1.. 9EFG Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Applications: Certifications and Compliances: Factory sealed enclosures are installed in a rigid metallic conduit system for surface mounting adjacent to or remote from equipment being controlled and are used: • To prevent arcing of enclosed device from causing ignition of a specific hazardous atmosphere or atmospheres external to the enclosure • In industrial areas such as chemical plants. Division 2.... spring return to center........... S300 • Three-position selector switches with modified operation: Momentary contact clockwise operation.... black buttons are standard. Groups E....crouse-hinds..... Division 1......... oil and gas refineries......... maintained contact counter-clockwise operation S634 Momentary contact counter-clockwise operation. C... mating flanges and journalled shafts and bearings for front button operation......com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 525 ...... When START is indicated.. 1 & 2. 1............ III NEMA 3... Groups F...... 2.... add suffix -GB... G Cl..... May not be combined with a pilot light if a transformer is required.. C. (Push to stop only) .. S842 EDS bodies and factory sealed cover and device sub-assemblies are available for field assembly (see page 521)............ Division 1 & 2... S635 • Bodies and covers (single and two gang units) – copperfree aluminum.. Groups E..... or metal handling or finishing areas where atmosphere may contain hazardous gases and/or dust • In non-hazardous areas where sturdy...... EFS units are suitable for Class I.. Group B usage can be supplied....... G Cl. in the case of units with heaters.. G Class II.. button is automatically red........ 7B*CD.. coal processing or handling areas........... paint and varnish manufacturing plants.... gasoline bulk loading terminals. D Cl.... F... motor running protection • NEC/CEC: Class I........ S153 • For 24 VDC operation on pilot lights . II............. 9EFG • UL Standard: 1203 • CSA Standard: C22........... button is automatically green.......... G Class III • NEMA/EEMAC: 3............... GB • Maintained contact mushroom head with lockout and guard..... durable enclosures are required • In conjunction with magnetic starters or contactors for remote control of motors Manual motor starting switch enclosures are used: • For manual starting of small AC or DC motors • To provide manual starting and stopping and..... Div. grain processing industries.......... Div... I. *See suffix GB in Options section www..2 No...... Groups F... Groups B*..... Standard Materials: • Bodies – Feraloy® iron alloy....... Otherwise.. threaded type shafts and bushings are used to ensure flametightness • Dead end (EFS or EDS) or through feed (EFSC or EDSC) hubs – 1/2" to 1" sizes • When STOP is indicated... maintained contact clockwise operation. F... #: Description Suffix • Emergency "Stop" button (momentary) – front operated red mushroom button....... D Class II.........EDS / EFS Series Control Stations Fully Assembled EFS and EDS Factory Sealed Devices Cl...............

I. Small. II. Wiring pigtails are factory sealed from under the sealing well. Div. EDS factory sealed snap switches or manual motor starting switches do not need external sealing. "h" "i" /4 /8 1 3 7 /16 /16 /16 13 13 15 Front View . Div. 9EFG Fully Assembled EFS and EDS Factory Sealed Devices Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Methods of Factory Sealing EDS Series Factory sealed EDS and EFS pilot light. The switches are enclosed in a unique sealing well with double flanges which mate with the cover and the body.Single gang Pushbutton switch rocker type side operated Side View General use snap switch front operated and manual motor starting switch Pushbutton switch front operated Selector switch Front View . Small. 1. 7B*CD.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business . compact enclosures have accurately ground wide flanges on body.EDS / EFS Series Control Stations 4C Cl. Groups E. Groups F. C. III NEMA 3. 1 & 2. 2. Device contacts are factory sealed in explosionproof ESWP contact blocks. compact enclosures have accurately ground wide flanges on both the body and cover for a flame-tight joint. † Surface covers have same length and width as bodies. II. not for construction purposes. Groups B*.crouse-hinds. cover and sealing well for flame-tight joints. F. G Cl. pushbutton and selector switch control stations do not need external sealing.Two gang *See suffix GB in Options section. Div. 4C EFS/EDS Series Dimensions (Inches) ‡ Covers† Bodies Hub Size 1 /2 3 /4 1 Dim. Reliable pouring of seals at the factory ensures safe sealing. ‡Dimensions are approximate. 526 www. G Cl. D Cl. Dim.

2. Group B: Consider using EFS series pushbuttons. §Single external button operates both inner buttons simultaneously. # Cat. #§ Cat.see page 571 EDS215 Enclosure with Pushbuttons 4C Hub Size Cat. Select from the list of standard markings below: START STOP ON OFF RUN JOG RESET TRIP TEST LIGHT ON HAND AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY FORWARD REVERSE OPEN CLOSE UP DOWN IN OUT RAISE LOWER * Class I. 1 & 2. Div. # Cat. G Cl. III NEMA 3. # Cat. D Cl. #§ /2 /4 1 Dead End EDS1184 ➀ EDS2184 ➀ EDS3184 ➀ EDS2190 ➀ EDS3190 ➀ EDS115 ➀ EDS215 ➀ EDS315 ➀ EDS2192 ➀ EDS3192 ➀ EDS1155 ➀ EDS2155 ➀ EDS3155 ➀ /2 3 /4 1 Through Feed EDSC1184 ➀ EDSC2184 ➀ EDSC3184 ➀ EDSC1190 ➀ EDSC2190 ➀ EDSC3190 ➀ EDSC115 ➀ EDSC1192 ➀ EDSC215 ➀ EDSC2192 ➀ EDSC315 ➀ EDSC3192 ➀ 1 3 1 EDSC1155 ➀ EDSC2155 ➀ EDSC3155 ➀ EDSC225 Dimensions Ordering Information . Div.EDS / EFS Series Control Stations Fully Assembled EDS Factory Sealed Pushbutton Stations Front Operated. II. www. 9EFG Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations 4C Ordering Information . In Canada. F. 7B*CD. markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number.Single Gang Normal Pos. ■Two universal contact blocks.Two Gang see page 526 Normal Pos. 1 Circuit Universal Marking Specify 2 Circuits Universal 2 Circuits■ STARTSTOP unless otherwise specified Specify 2 Circuits Universal 2 Circuits■ Specify Specify Diagram EDS2184 S769 Maintained Mushroom Head Replacement Pushbutton Contacts . 1 Circuit Universal 2 Circuits Universal 2 Circuits■ Marking Specify Specify START-STOP unless otherwise specified ED11 ED12 ED12■ Diagram Replacement Pushbuttons‡ Enclosure with Pushbuttons Hub Size Cat. G Cl. Seals must be installed within 11/ 2" of each conduit opening in Division 1. These products are suitable for Group B. 600VAC Heavy Duty Cl. # Cat. Group B. Groups F. # /4 1 Dead End EDS2284 ➀ EDS3284 ➀ EDS2290 ➀ EDS3290 ➀ EDS225 ➀ EDS325 ➀ /2 3 /4 1 Through Feed EDSC1284 ➀ EDSC2284 ➀ EDSC3284 ➀ EDSC1290 ➀ EDSC2290 ➀ EDSC3290 ➀ EDSC125 ➀ EDSC225 ➀ EDSC325 ➀ 3 1 ➀ If desired. I. Groups E. C. Add suffix GB to the Cat. must be wired as two circuits. Groups B*. Div. see page 528. 1. No. Div. with one normally open and one normally closed. for Group B applications consult factory. # Cat.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 527 . 2 as listed. Div. All enclosures listed above can be modified for Class I. II.crouse-hinds. 1 usage. without external seals.

# Cat. 7B*CD. 1 Circuit Universal 2 Circuits Universal Marking 2 Circuits■ Specify Specify STARTSTOP unless otherwise specified ED11 ED12 ED12■ 2 Circuits Universal 2 Circuits■ Specify Specify ED12 ED12■ Diagram 4C Replacement Pushbuttons‡ Enclosure with Pushbuttons Hub Size Cat. Groups F. Group B: All enclosures listed above are suitable for Class I. Div. Select from the list of standard markings below: START STOP ON OFF RUN JOG RESET TRIP TEST LIGHT ON HAND AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY FORWARD REVERSE OPEN CLOSE UP DOWN IN OUT *Class I.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business RAISE LOWER . # Cat. 528 www. 2. II. 1. §Single external button operates both inner buttons simultaneously. 1 usage. Div. Group B. must be wired as two circuits. C. # Cat. Groups E. Seals only have to be installed on 1 inch conduit within 5 ft. 600VAC Heavy Duty Cl. 9EFG Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Ordering Information Normal Pos. 1 & 2.4C EDS / EFS Series Control Stations Fully Assembled EFS Factory Sealed Pushbutton Stations Front Operated. Div.crouse-hinds. see page 571. in Division 1. #§ Cat. markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number. ‡For replacement contact blocks. #§ /2 /4 1 Dead End EFS1184 ➀ EFS2184 ➀ EFS3184 ➀ EFS2190 ➀ EFS3190 ➀ EFS115 ➀ EFS215 ➀ EFS315 ➀ EFS2192 ➀ EFS3192 ➀ EFS1155 ➀ EFS2155 ➀ EFS3155 ➀ /2 3 /4 1 Through Feed EFSC1184 ➀ EFSC1190 ➀ EFSC115 ➀ EFSC1192 ➀ EFSC1155 ➀ EFSC2184 ➀ EFSC2190 ➀ EFSC215 ➀ EFSC2192 ➀ EFSC2155 ➀ EFSC3184 ➀ EFSC3190 ➀ EFSC315 ➀ EFSC3192 ➀ EFSC3155 ➀ 1 3 1 EFS2184 START Standard black pushbutton EFS215 Dimensions see page 526 ➀ If desired. Groups B*. G Cl. II. D Cl. ■Two universal contact blocks. Div. III NEMA 3. with one normally open and one normally closed. F. G Cl. I.

Single Gang Two Gang 2 Circuits Universal 2 Circuits■ Normal Pos. 1. # Cat. C. 7B*CD. G Cl. # Dead End EDS1596 ➀ EDS2596 ➀ EDS3596 ➀ /2 /4 1 Through Feed EDSC1596 ➀ EDSC1194 ➀ EDSC2596 ➀ EDSC2194 ➀ EDSC3596 ➀ EDSC3194 ➀ 1 3 1 3 4C Normal Pos. These products are suitable for Group B. with one normally open and one normally closed. 1 Circuit Universal Cat. Group B: All enclosures listed above can be modified for Class I. 2 as listed. Select from the list of standard markings below: START STOP ON OFF RUN JOG RESET TRIP TEST LIGHT ON HAND AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY FORWARD REVERSE OPEN CLOSE UP DOWN IN OUT RAISE LOWER *Class I. II. D Cl. Groups B*. markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number. Div. 600VAC Heavy Duty Cl. # Dead End EDS2696 ➀ EDS3696 ➀ /2 /4 1 Through Feed EDSC1696 ➀ EDSC1294 ➀ EDSC1262 ➀ EDSC2696 ➀ EDSC2294 ➀ EDSC2262 ➀ EDSC3696 ➀ EDSC3294 ➀ EDSC3262 ➀ 1 EDSC1162 ➀ EDSC2162 ➀ EDSC3162 ➀ 3 Cat. 9EFG Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations 4C Dimensions see page 526 EDS2696 EDSC2162 Ordering Information . Groups F. Div.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 529 . ■Two universal contact blocks. 2. see page 571.crouse-hinds. Groups E. without external seals. www. must be wired as two circuits. Div. F. G Cl. 1 usage. # Cat. II. 1 Circuit Universal 2 Circuits Universal 2 Circuits Marking Specify Specify START-STOP unless otherwise specified Marking Specify Specify START-STOP unless otherwise specified ED11 ED12 ED12■ Diagram Diagram Replacement ED11 Pushbuttons‡ ED12 Replacement Pushbuttons‡ ED12■ Enclosure with Pushbuttons Hub Size Enclosure with Pushbuttons /2 /4 1 Cat. # EDS2294 ➀ EDS3294 ➀ EDS2262 ➀ EDS3262 ➀ ➀ If desired. Add suffix GB to the Cat. # Hub Size EDS2194 ➀ EDS3194 ➀ EDS1162 ➀ EDS2162 ➀ EDS3162 ➀ 3 /4 1 Cat. Group B. ‡For replacement contact blocks. III NEMA 3. 1 & 2.EDS / EFS Series Control Stations Fully Assembled EDS Factory Sealed Pushbutton Stations Side Rocker Handle. No. Div. Seals must be installed within 11/ 2" of each conduit opening in Division 1. Div. I.

D Class II. I. Group B within 5 feet (1. 1.) and copper-free aluminum (Canada) • Pilot light covers – Feraloy iron alloy • Operating shafts – stainless steel Standard Finishes: • Feraloy iron alloy – electrogalvanized with aluminum acrylic paint • Copper-free aluminum – natural • Stainless steel – natural Electrical Rating Range: • Pilot lights – 110 to 600VAC * External conduit seal required for 1 inch hub size in Division 1.5 meters) of enclosure. III NEMA 3.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business LED SA S300 . chemical and petrochemical plants and other process industry facilities where similar hazards exist • To visually indicate at a remote location that the desired function is being performed 4C Features: • Small. gases or highly combustible dusts • For installation at petroleum refineries. Div. #: Description Suffix Pilot lights for circuit voltages up to 600 volts maximum (standard voltage range 110–125) – See Listings LED pilot lights in place of standard incandescent pilot lamps Bodies and covers – copper-free aluminum 24 VDC operation on pilot lights Standard Materials: • Bodies – Feraloy® iron alloy (U. F. G Cl. II. C. G Cl. Groups F. 1 & 2. 9EFG Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Applications: EFS pilot lights are used: • In areas which are hazardous due to the presence of flammable vapors. 530 www.4C EDS / EFS Series Control Stations Fully Assembled EFS Pilot Lights Cl. 9EFG • UL Standard: 1203 • CSA Standard: C22. Groups B*.crouse-hinds. F. Groups B*. 7B*CD. compact enclosures with accurately ground flange on both body and cover for flame-tight joint • Pilot lights are factory sealed. Div.2 Options: The following special options are available from factory by adding suffix to Cat. Groups E. C. Div. Groups E. II. G Class III • NEMA/EEMAC: 3.S. Conventional external seals are not required • Dead end (EFS) or through feed (EFSC) hubs – 1/2" to 1" sizes Certifications and Compliances: • NEC/CEC: Class I. 2. 7B*CD. D Cl.

1. 7B*CD. Enclosures with single pilot covers only can be equipped with a transformer for each lamp for high voltages as shown. Div. For Options see pages 530–531.5 meters) of enclosure. Div. Groups F. 1 & 2. † Surface covers have same length and width dimensions as bodies. # Suffix 220–240 440–480 550–600 T2 T4 T5 Ordering Information Enclosure with Single Pilot Light‡ Hub Size Dead End Cat. LED pilot lights can be provided in place of standard incandescent lamps by adding suffix LED after the color symbols. # EFSC11561 ➀ EFSC21561 ➀ EFSC31561 ➀ ➀ Add color symbol for each pilot light from table below. G Cl. # 1 Through Feed Cat. Groups B*. "h" Dim. G Cl. C. incandescent lamps for use on 110–125 volt circuits. "i" /4 7 /8 1 13 3 /16 /16 15 /16 13 * External conduit seal required for 1 inch hub size in Division 1. not for construction purposes. 4C Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Transformer Voltages Above 125 Nominal Volts 50–60 Hertz Transformer 220 / 110 440 / 110 550 / 110 Primary Voltage Range Cat.crouse-hinds.EDS / EFS Series Control Stations Cl.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 531 . ‡ LED pilot lights can be furnished in place of standard incandescent pilot lamps. 2. # Through Feed Cat. D Cl. Groups E. Hub Size 1 /2 3 /4 1 Dim. Add suffix LED to catalog number after color symbol. Group B within 5 feet (1. # EFS11561 ➀ EFS21561 ➀ EFS31561 ➀ /2 3 /4 1 1 EFSC11524 ➀ EFSC21524 ➀ EFSC31524 ➀ 4C /2 EFS11524 ➀ 3 /4 EFS21524 ➀ 1 EFS31524 ➀ Enclosure with Double Pilot Lights‡ Hub Size Dead End Cat. II. III NEMA 3. I. 9EFG Fully Assembled EFS Pilot Lights Pilot lights listed below are factory sealed and do not require external seals*. Div. Lamps are 6 watt. www. F. Example: EFS11561 with red and green lights is EFS11561-J1-J3 Color Symbol Color Symbol Color Symbol Red Green J1 J3 Amber Clear J6 J10 Blue J11 Dimensions In Inches: Typical body side view Front view Cover † Dimensions are approximate. II. miniature bayonets.

Groups E. No. Add suffix LED to catalog number after color symbol. External seals are not required. For 24 VDC operation on pilot lights add suffix S300. 1. 2. Group B. Add suffix GB to the Cat. Conduit seal(s) must be installed within 11/2" of each conduit opening. Select from the list of stardard markings below: START STOP RESET LIGHT ON EMERGENCY OPEN DOWN RAISE STOP RUN TRIP HAND FORWARD CLOSE IN LOWER ON JOG TEST AUTOMATIC REVERSE UP OUT * All enclosures listed above can be modified for Class I. See table below listings. 9EFG Fully Assembled EDS Factory Sealed Combination Pushbutton and Pilot Light Stations 600VAC. F. C. # Cat. 7B*CD. # Cat. 2 as listed. Example: EDS11473-J1-GB. Groups B*. Div. 532 www. candelabra base for use on 110–125 volt circuits. without external conduit seals. † LED pilot lights can be furnished in place of standard incandescent pilot lamps. Dimensions 4C see page 526 Ordering Information Single Gang Ordering Information Two Gang Description Dead End No. # Cat. markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number. Example: EDS21473 with a red light is EDS21473-J1 Color Symbol Color Symbol Color Symbol Red Green J1 J3 Amber Clear J6 J10 Blue J11 ➁ If desired. Groups F. II. G Cl.4C EDS / EFS Series Control Stations Cl.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business . III NEMA 3. G Cl. Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Two gang units with single pilot light covers can be furnished with transformers. Pushbuttons 2 2 2 2 No. Div. Specify markings for each button. Div.crouse-hinds. II. 1 & 2. These products are suitable for Group B. D Cl. Division 1 usage. # EDS12471 ➀➁ EDSC12471 ➀➁ EDS22471 ➀➁ EDSC22471 ➀➁ EDS32471 ➀➁ EDSC32471 ➀➁ Cat. Div. # EDS11473 ➀➁ EDSC11473 ➀➁ 1/2 EDS21473 ➀➁ EDSC21473 ➀➁ 3/4 EDS31473 ➀➁ EDSC31473 ➀➁ 1 Cat. Pilot Lights† 1 1 2 2 No. # EDS22868 ➀➁ EDSC22868 ➀➁ EDS32868 ➀➁ EDSC32868 ➀➁ ➀ Add color symbol for each pilot light from table below. I. type S6. Lamps† are 6 watt. Heavy Duty Pushbutton contacts and pilot light receptacles are sealed in separate chambers. Pilot Lights† 1 Through Feed 1 1 Diagram Diagram Hub Size /2 3 /4 1 1 Hub Size Cat. 1 Pushbuttons Dead End Through Feed Dead End Through Feed No.

AUTOMATIC FORWARD. Groups E. 2. DOWN ON. G Cl. CLOSE UP. C. 600VAC Heavy Duty Cl. see page 571. SLOW 1. Specify indicating plate markings. II. These products are suitable for Group B. JOG HAND. D Cl. Group B. # Two-Position. II. 1 usage. I. OFF. DOWN *For Class I. G Cl. Div. 7B*CD. See page 525 for explanation of options. REVERSE FAST.Single Gang Enclosure with Switch Style Position 1 Position 2 Position 3 Replacement Contact Blocks† Hub Size Dead End Cat. Div. cam actuated by a maintained contact selector mechanism to operate in the sequences shown in the diagrams below. Seals must be installed within 11/ 2" of each conduit opening in Division 1. No. Two-Circuit ED11 3 /2 /4 1 EDS11271 ➀ EDS21271 ➀ EDS31271 ➀ EDSC11271 ➀ EDSC21271 ➀ EDSC31271 ➀ Two-Position.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 533 . III NEMA 3. AUTOMATIC FORWARD. JOG HAND. OFF IN.EDS / EFS Series Control Stations Fully Assembled EDS Factory Sealed Selector Switches Maintained Contact. All enclosures listed above can be modified for Class I. REVERSE Three-Position FAST. OFF. Add suffix GB to the Cat. Dimensions see page 526 4C EDS11273 Ordering Information . OUT RAISE. ‡ Suffixes S634 or S635 may be used on these catalog numbers. SLOW OPEN. markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number. LOWER START. Div. 1. Select from the list of standard markings below: Two-Position RUN. Four-Circuit ‡ 1 3 ➀ If desired. Two-Circuit ‡ ED11 3 /2 /4 1 EDS11273 ➀ EDS21273 ➀ EDS31273 ➀ EDSC11273 ➀ EDSC21273 ➀ EDSC31273 ➀ ED12 3 /2 /4 1 EDS11274 ➀ EDS21274 ➀ EDS31274 ➀ EDSC11274 ➀ EDSC21274 ➀ EDSC31274 ➀ ED12 /2 /4 1 EDS11275 ➀ EDS21275 ➀ EDS31275 ➀ EDSC11275 ➀ EDSC21275 ➀ EDSC31275 ➀ 1 1 1 1 Three-Position. OFF. Groups F. † For replacement contact blocks. without external seals. 2 OPEN. OFF. OFF. # Through Feed Cat. 9EFG Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations 4C Furnished with pushbuttons. In Canada. for Group B applications consult factory. see page 534. Groups B*.crouse-hinds. Div. See table below listings. Group B: Consider using EFS series selector switches. OFF. 1 & 2. OFF. Div. 2 as listed. Four-Circuit ED12 3 /2 /4 1 EDS11272 ➀ EDS21272 ➀ EDS31272 ➀ EDSC11272 ➀ EDSC21272 ➀ EDSC31272 ➀ Three-Position. STOP RUN. F. CLOSE UP. www.

G Cl. REVERSE UP. Groups E. SLOW IN. OFF. DOWN START. Two-Circuit ED11 Two-Position. see page 571. cam actuated by a maintained contact selector mechanism to operate in the sequences shown in the diagrams below. 1. CLOSE FORWARD. Groups B*. I. REVERSE ON. # Through Feed Cat. JOG OPEN. F. C. Select from the list of standard markings below: Two-Position FAST. 534 www. OUT RUN. 2 HAND. OFF.crouse-hinds. Div. Two-Circuit ‡ ED11 1 1 1 ED12 Three-Position. OFF.Single Gang Enclosure with Switch Style Position 1 Position 2 Position 3 Replacement Contact Blocks† Hub Size Dead End Cat. AUTOMATIC UP. AUTOMATIC OPEN. III NEMA 3. Specify indicating plate markings. Seals only have to be installed on 1 inch conduit within 5 ft. 1 usage. Div. # 3 /2 /4 1 EFS11271 ➀ EFS21271 ➀ EFS31271 ➀ EFSC11271 ➀ EFSC21271 ➀ EFSC31271 ➀ 3 /2 /4 1 EFS11272 ➀ EFS21272 ➀ EFS31272 ➀ EFSC11272 ➀ EFSC21272 ➀ EFSC31272 ➀ 3 /2 /4 1 EFS11273 ➀ EFS21273 ➀ EFS31273 ➀ EFSC11273 ➀ EFSC21273 ➀ EFSC31273 ➀ 3 /2 /4 1 EFS11274 ➀ EFS21274 ➀ EFS31274 ➀ EFSC11274 ➀ EFSC21274 ➀ EFSC31274 ➀ /2 /4 1 EFS11275 ➀ EFS21275 ➀ EFS31275 ➀ EFSC11275 ➀ EFSC21275 ➀ EFSC31275 ➀ 1 Two-Position. See page 525 for explanation of options. OFF. 600VAC Heavy Duty Cl. Four-Circuit ED12 Three-Position. Div. in Division 1. Div. OFF 3 Three-Position RUN. OFF. Four-Circuit ‡ 1 ED12 ➀If desired. CLOSE RAISE. Dimensions 4C see page 526 EFS11273 Ordering Information . STOP FORWARD. 7B*CD. 2. Groups F. OFF. Group B. G Cl.4C EDS / EFS Series Control Stations Fully Assembled EFS Factory Sealed Selector Switches Maintained Contact. ‡ Suffixes S634 or S635 may be used on these catalog numbers. 9EFG Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Furnished with pushbuttons.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business . DOWN FAST. markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number. JOG 1. II. II. SLOW *Class I. † For replacement contact blocks. LOWER HAND. See table below listings. Group B: All enclosures listed above are suitable for Class I. OFF. D Cl. 1 & 2.

# Through Feed Cat. Div. www. # Through Feed Cat. 1. C. G Cl. Groups F.crouse-hinds. 2. § AC rated switches are tested for resistive.EDS / EFS Series Control Stations Fully Assembled EDS Factory Sealed General Use Snap Switches Cl. 9EFG Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations 4C Dimensions see page 526 EDSC2129 EDS2229 Ordering Information . 7B*CD. Group B: All units on this page can be modified for Class I. Groups E. Div. Group B usage. G Cl. # Factory Sealed Replacement Switch 1-pole 2-pole 20 20 20 20 EDS2129 EDS218 EDSC2129† EDSC218† EDS2229 /4 EDSC2229† EDSC228† SW5 SW6 /4 3-way 20 20 EDS2130 EDSC2130 EDS2230 /4 1 4-way 20 20 EDS2140 EDSC2140 1-pole 20 20 EDS3129 EDSC3129† EDS3229 1 2-pole 20 20 EDS318 EDSC318† 1 3-way 20 20 EDS3130 EDSC3130 1 4-way 20 20 EDS3140 EDSC3140 Hub Size /4 3 3 3 3 EDSC2230 SW7 EDSC2240 SW8 EDSC3229† SW5 EDS328 EDSC328† SW6 EDS3230 EDSC3230 SW7 EDS3240 EDSC3240 SW8 *Standard as Class I. II. Div.General Use Snap Switch – Front Operated 4C Single Gang Two Gang‡ Amperes Style† 120VAC§ 277VAC§ Dead End Cat. No seals required. # Dead End Cat. F. I. inductive and tungsten filament loads up to the full current rating and for motor loads up to 80% of the ampere rating. Groups B*. Division 2. III NEMA 3. Division 1. 1 & 2. D Cl. II. Seals must be installed within 11/ 2" of each conduit opening in Division 1. No. Add suffix GB to the Cat. Division 1. Group B. † ON-OFF standard marking for 1-pole and 2-pole units. For Class I.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 535 . ‡ Combinations of switches can be furnished.

58 P16 9.30 P14 8.75 P17 10. # Through Feed Cat. Symbol 0 (zero) must be used to indicate heater omitted.98 P11 6. * Class I. 1 & 2. II.79 P9 4.77 P25 EDS2199 ➀ EDS3199 ➀ EDSC2199 ➀ EDSC3199 ➀ SW9 SW9 0.80 P36 1. Groups E.60 P35 1. III NEMA 3.4C EDS / EFS Series Control Stations Cl.21 P2 2.08 P12 6. Div. ➀ Includes one interchangeable heater. I.9 and use this value to select heaters. 9EFG Fully Assembled EDS Factory Sealed Manual Motor Starting Switches and Enclosures 4C EDSC2199 EDS2229 Ordering Information ➀ With Allen-Bradley Bulletin 600 Switches Maximum HP Ratings Poles 115–230 Volts AC 1 2 1 hp 1 hp Poles Hub Size in.00 P37 2. Group B: All units on this page can be modified for Class I.24 P33 1. multiply full load motor current by 0.09 P23 0.50 P38 15.83 P31 1. Insert symbol 0 (zero) to omit heater. Select from the heater table and use symbol number as second section of the Cat.72 P32 1. 2. Insert symbol 0 (zero) to omit heater. No. for Group B applications consult factory.43 P15 8. Div.57 P7 4. Select heater from the table below individual listings and use symbol number as second section of the Cat. II. 1. Motor Full-Load Amps Eaton's CrouseHinds Symbol Number 0. For motors rated 50°C or 55°C.19 P13 7.25 P3 2.93 P28 0. Seals must be installed within 11/2" of each conduit opening in Division 1. No.32 P4 3.51 P27 SW10 SW10 0. Groups F.71 P8 4.40 P20 0. 536 www. Groups B*.13 P19 13.32 P24 0. Single Gang 3 /4 1 1 /4 1 3 2 Two Gang 3 /4 1 1 /4 1 3 2 115–230 Volts DC Allen-Bradley Switch Cat. Div. C. Add suffix GB to the Cat. # Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Factory Sealed Replacement Switch Heater Table (Allen Bradley) Max. # /4 hp A B BUL 600 T0X4 A B BUL 600 T0X5 3 Dead End Cat.20 P39 EDS2299 ➀ EDS3299 ➀ EDSC2299 ➀ EDSC3299 ➀ SW9 SW9 EDS22100 ➀ EDS32100 ➀ EDSC22100 ➀ EDSC32100 ➀ SW10 SW10 These heaters are for motors rated 40°C continuously.16 P26 EDS21100 ➀ EDS31100 ➀ EDSC21100 ➀ EDSC31100 ➀ 0.87 P10 5. Example: EDS21101-W5. 7B*CD.43 P29 0. Example: EDS2199-P5. Group B usage.90 P34 1. Motor Full-Load Amps Eaton's CrouseHinds Symbol Number Max.39 P5 3. F. Includes one interchangeable heater. D Cl.crouse-hinds.03 P30 1.88 P18 12. G Cl. In Canada.58 P21 0.17 P1 2. G Cl.92 P22 0.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business . No.46 P6 3.

For motors rated 50°C or 55°C.EDS / EFS Series Control Stations Fully Assembled EDS Factory Sealed Manual Motor Starting Switches and Enclosures Cl.22 4.95 1.60 14. Group B: All units on this page can be modified for Class I. *Class I.27 3.95 3.9 and use this value to select heaters. 7B*CD.60 5. No.00 5.01 3. Motor Full-Load Amps Eaton's CrouseHinds Symbol Number .35 12. Seals must be installed within 11/2" of each conduit opening in Division 1. Group B usage.30 11. C.43 .88 4.78 1.25 1. I.79 5. No.76 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 G7 G8 G9 G10 G11 G12 G13 G14 G15 G16 G17 G18 G19 G20 G21 3.E. Div.crouse-hinds.60 11.59 3.87 .53 . Insert symbol 0 (zero) to omit heater. # 3 2 3 2 ➀Heater /4 1 3 2 Two Gang 3 /4 1 1 /4 1 3 2 Table (General Electric) ➀Heater Max. 2.15 1. Cat.53 .27 3.78 .25 8.50 13. Motor Full-Load Amps Eaton's CrouseHinds Symbol Number Max.99 2.46 9.23 2. # 120–240 Poles Volts AC 32 120 240 Cutler-Hammer Volts DC Volts DC Volts DC Switch Cat.51 1.26 5.39 4.35 10.39 7. Div.95 2. ➀ Includes one interchangeable heater. G Cl. In Canada.95 9.48 . G Cl. for Group B applications consult factory.67 15.71 .03 7.86 . Cat. # 1 2 1 hp 1 hp 1 hp 1 hp /4 hp 1 hp CR101 Y CR101 H 1 2 1 1 /4 hp /4 hp 1 hp 1 hp 1 /4 hp 1 hp MST01 MST02 1 1 hp Factory Sealed Replacement Switch Hub Dead Size End Poles in.56 3.27 1. Symbol 0 (zero) must be used to indicate heater omitted. # EDS21093 ➀ EDSC21093 ➀ EDS31093 ➀ EDSC31093 ➀ SW11 SW11 Single Gang 3 /4 EDS21101 ➀ EDSC21101 ➀ SW13 1 1 EDS31101 ➀ EDSC31101 ➀ SW13 /4 1 EDS21094 ➀ EDSC21094 ➀ EDS31094 ➀ EDSC31094 ➀ SW12 SW12 Two Gang 3 /4 1 1 EDS22093 ➀ EDSC22093 ➀ EDS32093 ➀ EDSC32093 ➀ SW11 SW11 /4 1 EDS22094 ➀ EDSC22094 ➀ EDS32094 ➀ EDSC32094 ➀ SW12 SW12 Poles Hub Dead Size End in. Select from the heater table and use symbol number as second section of the Cat. www.75 10. multiply full load motor current by 0. Example: EDS21101-W5. D Cl.67 1.47 2.32 2. Includes one interchangeable heater. Example: EDS2199-P5.83 6. Switch Cat.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 537 .80 16.60 8. Insert symbol 0 (zero) to omit heater.65 .43 5. # EDS21102 ➀ EDSC21102 ➀ SW14 EDS31102 ➀ EDSC31102 ➀ SW14 EDS22101 ➀ EDSC22101 ➀ SW13 EDS32101 ➀ EDSC32101 ➀ SW13 EDS22102 ➀ EDSC22102 ➀ SW14 EDS32102 ➀ EDSC32102 ➀ SW14 Table (Cutler-Hammer) Max.35 1.90 6. 1 & 2.00 G22 G23 G24 G25 G26 G27 G28 G29 G30 G31 G32 G33 G34 G35 G36 G37 G38 G39 G40 G41 G42 Through Feed Cat.83 1.37 1. No. # Factory Sealed Replacement Switch 4C Single Gang 3 /4 1 1 Through Feed Cat.98 7.47 13. 9EFG Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Ordering Information Ordering Information With General Electric Switches With Cutler-Hammer Switches Maximum HP Ratings 4C Maximum HP Ratings Poles 115–230 Volts AC 115 Volts DC 230 Volts DC G. III NEMA 3.71 W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6 W7 W8 W9 W10 W11 W12 W13 W14 W15 W16 W17 W18 W19 W20 Max.71 .14 1.99 4. Motor Full-Load Amps Eaton's CrouseHinds Symbol Number 2.63 1.00 W21 W22 W23 W24 W25 W26 W27 W28 W29 W30 W31 W32 W33 W34 W35 W36 W37 W38 W39 Dimensions see page 526 These heaters are for motors rated 40°C continuously. 1.53 2. Motor Full-Load Amps Eaton's CrouseHinds Symbol Number .41 6. Select heater from the table below individual listings and use symbol number as second section of the Cat.49 1. Add suffix GB to the Cat.03 1. II.48 . Div.64 .12 16.74 8.95 1.58 . Groups E. F.04 1. II. Groups B*.78 .13 2.40 12.58 . Groups F.

. 7B*CD.crouse-hinds. 2. Group B option: Units listed above can be modified for Class I. Div. not for construction purposes.. EFS21095 3 Dimensions In Inches: Standard Materials: • Bodies – Feraloy® iron alloy (U. C. G Cl.. D Cl. 1. G Class III • NEMA 3. I.. 1. *Class I. certain units can be supplied for Class I. C. chemical and petrochemical plants and other process industry facilities where similar hazards exist • To indicate at a remote location that a fire exists in the area 4C Features: • Small.. # /4 EFS21095 EFSC21095 • NEC Class I. # Through Feed Cat. D Cl. Groups B. I. Group B usage.. D Class II. Add suffix GB to the Cat. 2. 9EFG Fully Assembled EFS Fire Alarm Station Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Applications: EFS Fire Alarm Stations are used: • In areas which are hazardous due to the presence of flammable vapors..) and copper-free aluminum (Canada) Standard Finishes: • Feraloy iron alloy – electrogalvanized with aluminum acrylic paint • Copper-free aluminum – natural • Stainless steel – natural Options: The following special option is available from factory by adding suffix to Cat. Seals must be installed within 11/2" of each conduit opening. 7B*CD. F.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business . G Cl. No."h" Dim. Groups B*.. Seals must be installed within 11/2" of each conduit opening.. Div.. Example: EFS21095-GB.S. Groups E. Division 1. Division 1. II. 9EFG • UL Standard: 1203 • As indicated under catalog listings. Div. Groups B*. units suitable for Class I. Group B (NEMA 7B).. 538 www. Groups F. Groups E. Group B usage can be supplied.. compact enclosures with accurately ground flange on both body and cover for flame-tight joint • Available in red for fire alarm applications Ordering Information Certifications and Compliances: Hub Size Dead End Cat."i" /4 7 /8 1 13 3 /16 /16 /16 13 13 Dimensions are approximate. †Surface covers have same length and width dimensions as bodies. C.. #: Description Suffix Where indicated in the catalog listings.. gases or highly combustible dusts • For installation at petroleum refineries. F. Div.4C EDS / EFS Series Control Stations Cl. II. GB* Typical body side view Hub Size 1 /2 3 /4 1 Front view Cover† Dim.. Division 1. III NEMA 3..

crouse-hinds. or "-0" distributor provided "-P * " for heater. Div. or "-0" distributor provided "-W * " for heater. or "-0" distributor provided "-G * " for heater. or "-0" distributor provided "-W * " for heater. or "-0" distributor provided CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 539 . or "-0" distributor provided "-G * " for heater. or "-0" distributor provided "-P * " for heater. or "-0" distributor provided "-P * " for heater. PUSHBUTTON / PILOT LIGHT COMBINATIONS EDS21473-J* DSD958-J* EDSC21473-J* DSD958-J* EDS22471-J* DSD948-J* & DSD921 EDSC22471-J* DSD948-J* & DSD921 EDS22868-J*-J* DSD947-J*-J* & DSD921 EDSC22868-J*-J* DSD947-J*-J* & DSD921 EDS271 EDSC271 EDS272 EDSC272 EDS272 EDSC272 * * * * * * SELECTOR SWITCHES EDS21271 EDSC21271 EDS21272 EDSC21272 EDS21273 EDSC21273 EDS21274 EDSC21274 EDS21275 EDSC21275 EDS271 EDSC271 EDS271 EDSC271 EDS271 EDSC271 EDS271 EDSC271 EDS271 EDSC271 MANUAL MOTOR STARTER WITH O/L EDS21101 DS415A & SW13 EDSC21101 DS415A & SW13 EDS21102 DS415A & SW14 EDSC21102 DS415A & SW14 EDS21093 DS415A & SW11 EDSC21093 DS415A & SW11 EDS21094 DS415A & SW12 EDSC21094 DS415A & SW12 EDS2199 DS415A & SW9 EDSC2199 DS415A & SW9 EDS21100 DS415A & SW10 EDSC21100 DS415A & SW10 www. or "-0" distributor provided "-G * " for heater. the EFS back box is required in place of the EDS. I. or "-0" distributor provided "-W * " for heater. or "-0" distributor provided "-G * " for heater. 1. see page 514 for FlexStation™ Series 4C Sub-assembly Reference Guide Control Stations and their Sub-assemblies Complete Control Station Sub-assembly Cover & Device Cast Back Box PUSHBUTTONS EDS2184 EDSC2184 EDS215 EDSC215 EDS2190 EDSC2190 EDS2184-S769-EM-SP EDSC2184-S769-EM-SP EDS2284 EDSC2284 EDS225 EDSC225 EDS2290 EDSC2290 DSD918 DSD918 DSD922 DSD922 DSD921 DSD921 DSD918-S769-EM-SP DSD918-S769-EM-SP (2) DSD918 (2) DSD918 (2) DSD922 (2) DSD922 (2) DSD921 (2) DSD921 EDS271 EDSC271 EDS271 EDSC271 EDS271 EDSC271 EDS271 EDSC271 EDS272 EDSC272 EDS272 EDSC272 EDS272 EDSC272 PILOT LIGHTS EFS21524-J* EFSC21524-J* EFS21561-J*-J* EFSC21561-J*-J* DSD948-J* DSD948-J* DSD947-J*-J* DSD947-J*-J* EDS271 † EDSC271 † EDS271 † EDSC271 † * Insert pilot light color † When using the EFS Series pilot light in Cl. Group B applications.com EDS271 EDSC271 EDS271 EDSC271 EDS271 EDSC271 EDS271 EDSC271 EDS271 EDSC271 EDS271 EDSC271 US: 1-866-764-5454 Start/ Stop Legend included Start/ Stop Legend included Emergency Stop Legend included Emergency Stop Legend included 4C DSD923 DSD923 DSD924 DSD924 DSD925 DSD925 DSD926 DSD926 DSD927 DSD927 Notes and Requirements Start/ Stop Legend included Start/ Stop Legend included Insert Insert Insert Insert Insert Insert pilot pilot pilot pilot pilot pilot light light light light light light color color color color color color "-W * " for heater.EDS / EFS Series Control Stations For a complete list of components for EDS & EFS Control Stations. or "-0" distributor provided "-P * " for heater.

Copper-free aluminum bodies and covers available with SA suffix. change the "2" to "3" (EDS3184). Suffix T2= 240/220 . Pilot Light Colors J*-.110V (not available on double pilot cover). J10= Clear. Control Stations with "Stop" legend have lockout provided as standard.crouse-hinds. LED pilot lights are available with LED suffix. T4= 480/440 . Additional control station options may be found in Section 4C.EDS / EFS Series Control Stations 4C Sub-assembly Reference Guide For a complete list of components for EDS & EFS Control Stations. See part number instructions for the item required. See Replacement Parts book for additional information. J6= Amber.110V. Group B ratings may be achieved by adding the GB suffix or using the EFS back box. 3-Pos = "SS3KIT". J3= Green. T5= 600/500 . Part numbers listed with 3/ 4" hub in back box (Ex.J1= Red. See Certifications and Compliances for item required. 2-Pos = "SS2KIT". For 1/ 2" hub. J11= Blue. 540 www. change the "2" to "1" (EDS1184). Division 2 applications. Additional control station configurations available through the FlexStation Component Series. Pilot Light Transformers for voltages over 125V. EDS2184). Group B ratings may already be achieved when used in Class I. For 1" hub. see page 514 for FlexStation™ Series Control Stations and their Sub-assemblies 4C Sub-assembly Complete Control Station Cover & Device Cast Back Box MANUAL MOTOR STARTER EFD218-T8 Alternative EFDC218-T8 Alternative EFD2419 Alternative EFDC2419 Alternative DSD916 DS415A & DSD916 DS415A & DSD917 DS415A & DSD917 DS415A & EDS271 EDS271 EDSC271 EDSC271 EDS271 EDS271 EDSC271 EDSC271 SNAP SWITCHES EDS2129 Alternative EDSC2129 Alternative EDS218 Alternative EDSC218 Alternative EDS2130 Alternative EDSC2130 Alternative EDS2140 Alternative EDSC2140 Alternative EDS2229 Alternative EDSC2229 Alternative EDSC228 Alternative EDS2230 Alternative EDSC2230 Alternative EDSC2240 Alternative DS652 & SW5 DSD933 DS652 & SW5 DSD933 DS652 & SW6 DSD634 DS652 & SW6 DSD634 DS652 & SW7 DSD936 DS652 & SW7 DSD936 DS652 & SW8 DSD937 DS652 & SW8 DSD937 (2) DS652 & (2) (2) DSD933 (2) DS652 & (2) (2) DSD933 (2) DS652 & (2) (2) DSD634 (2) DS652 & (2) (2) DSD936 (2) DS652 & (2) (2) DSD936 (2) DS652 & (2) (2) DSD937 ROCKER SWITCHES EDS2596 EDSC2596 EDS2162 EDSC2162 EDS2194 EDSC2194 EDS2696 EDSC2696 EDS2262 EDSC2262 EDS2294 EDSC2294 DSD949 DSD949 DSD951 DSD951 DSD950 DSD950 (2) DSD949 (2) DSD949 (2) DSD951 (2) DSD951 (2) DSD950 (2) DSD950 • • • • • • • • • • • • SQ D 2510 KO-1 SQ D 2510 KO-1 GE 2368S GE 2368S SW5 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW7 SW8 EDS271 EDS271 EDSC271 EDSC271 EDS271 EDS271 EDSC271 EDSC271 EDS271 EDS271 EDSC271 EDSC271 EDS271 EDS271 EDSC271 EDSC271 EDS272 EDS272 EDSC272 EDSC272 EDSC272 EDSC272 EDS272 EDS272 EDSC272 EDSC272 EDSC272 EDSC272 EDS271 EDSC271 EDS271 EDSC271 EDS271 EDSC271 EDS272 EDSC272 EDS272 EDSC272 EDS272 EDSC272 Notes and Requirements SQ D switch provided by distributor SQ D switch provided by distributor GE switch provided by distributor GE switch provided by distributor External Sealing Fitting Required External Sealing Fitting Required External Sealing Fitting Required External Sealing Fitting Required External Sealing Fitting Required External Sealing Fitting Required External Sealing Fitting Required External Sealing Fitting Required External Sealing Fitting Required External Sealing Fitting Required External Sealing Fitting Required External Sealing Fitting Required External Sealing Fitting Required External Sealing Fitting Required Start/ Stop Legend included Start/ Stop Legend included Start/ Stop Legend included Start/ Stop Legend included Additional notes: See Eaton's Crouse-Hinds' installation instructions for any possible additional sealing requirements. Selector switch nameplate kits available.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business . Standard legend plate markings are available by adding nomenclature after the part number (EDS2184-Run).110V.

................ #: Description Suffix Lockout provision on front operated pushbutton (standard on buttons marked "OFF" and "STOP")... 4 • UL Standard: 508 • CSA Encl........................... LED Features: Dimensions • Enclosures are compact in design........ two gang tandem and three. Locks two or three position switch handle in any position.............) MC pushbuttons......................... Meets NEMA 4 requirements and prevents accumulation of dirt around operating shafts... spring return to center.. 5 Standard Materials: • Bodies – Feraloy® iron alloy • Cover with side rocker handle – copperfree aluminum • Front pushbutton.... 3.......... maintained contact counter-clockwise operation..... maintained contact clockwise operation................................... S635 Multiple gang bodies................................. selector switches or pilot lights are used: • In damp..... etc............MC and MCC Series 4C NEMA 3............. S153 Neoprene covers for front operated pushbuttons.. wet or corrosive locations such as dairies... Selector Switches and Pilot Lights 600 VAC Heavy Duty Options: MC pushbuttons or selector switches are used: • In conjunction with magnetic starters or contactors for remote control of motors MC pilot lights are used: • To visually indicate at a remote point that the desired function is being performed (motor running.... not for construction purposes.... S323 Three-position selector switches with modified operation: Momentary contact clockwise operation.............. spring return to center... 4C Applications: In Inches*: Certifications and Compliances: • NEMA/EEMAC 3......... Specify LED pilot lights in place of standard incandescent pilot lamps....... and gasketed to meet NEMA/EEMAC 3 or 4 requirements as noted in catalog listings • Pushbutton stations with side rocker handle are furnished with a lockout arrangement on "STOP" position as standard • Dead end (MC) or through feed (MCC) hubs – 1/2" and 3/4" sizes – with mounting feet • Standard lockout on "STOP" and "OFF" button on front operated pushbutton covers • Standard lockout on selector switch covers................. S634 Momentary contact counter-clockwise operation.....crouse-hinds......... 4...... Two gang. four or five gang bodies can be supplied with combinations of single gang devices...... meat packing plants............... selector switch and pilot light covers – Feraloy iron alloy • Rocker handle and pushbutton guards – type 6 / 6 nylon • Selector switch handle – copper-free aluminum • Operating shafts – stainless steel Hub size 1 /2 3 /4 a Type of Cover b /8 3 /4 Side Rocker Handle Front Pushbutton Selector Switch Pilot Light 11/2 23/8 23/8 11/16 5 Standard Finishes: • Feraloy iron alloy – electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint • Copper-free aluminum – natural • Type 6 / 6 nylon – black • Stainless steel – natural *Dimensions are approximate........com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 541 ................ 4 Watertight Pushbutton Stations.......... www........................... chemical plants and outdoor locations The following special options are available by adding suffix to Cat......

markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number. 4 Enclosure with Rocker Handles Normal Positions 1 Circuit Universal 2 Circuits Universal MC dead end side rocker handle Replacement Contact Diagram Blocks‡ Marking ED11 Specify ED12 MC1810U1 ➀ MCC1810U1 ➀ MC2810U1 ➀ MCC2810U1 ➀ /2 /4 MC1810U ➀ MC2810U ➀ MCC1810U ➀ MCC2810U ➀ /2 /4 MC1810 ➀ MC2810 ➀ MCC1810 ➀ MCC2810 ➀ 3 1 3 1 ED12* Through Feed Cat. Select from the list of standard markings below: MC dead end front pushbutton START OFF RESET LIGHT ON STOP RUN TRIP HAND ON JOG TEST AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY OPEN DOWN RAISE LOWER FORWARD CLOSE IN REVERSE UP OUT MCC through feed front pushbutton *Two universal contact blocks.With Front Pushbuttons Weather Resistant. must be wired as two circuits. # Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business . Selector Switches and Pilot Lights 600 VAC Heavy Duty Ordering Information .4C MC and MCC Series Watertight Weather Resistant NEMA 3. use suffix S323 (Neoprene button covers).crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Through Feed Cat. 4 Pushbutton Stations. NEMA 3 § Enclosure with Pushbuttons Normal Positions 1 Circuit Universal 2 Circuits Universal MCC through feed side rocker handle Replacement Contact Diagram Blocks‡ Marking Hub Dead End Size Cat. NEMA 3. § For Watertight NEMA 4 rating. # /2 /4 1 Specify START-STOP unless 2 Circuits 1 Open . # 3 Ordering Information .B specified 3 1 ED12* 3 ➀ If desired. # /2 /4 MC1910U1 ➀ MCC1910U1 ➀ MC2910U1 ➀ MCC2910U1 ➀ /2 /4 MC1910U ➀ MC2910U ➀ MCC1910U ➀ MCC2910U ➀ /2 /4 MC1910 ➀ MC2910 ➀ MCC1910 ➀ MCC2910 ➀ 1 Specify ED11 Specify ED12 3 1 START-STOP unless 2 Circuits 1 Open .A otherwise 1 Closed .With Side Rocker Handles Watertight.A otherwise 1 Closed .B specified 4C Hub Dead End Size Cat. See Options section. 542 www. ‡For replacement pushbuttons see page 571. with one normally open and one normally closed.

Selector Switches and Pilot Lights 600 VAC Heavy Duty Ordering Information . Maintained Contact Style MC dead end selector switch Position 1 Enclosure with Selector Switch Position 2 Position 3 TwoPosition. TwoCircuit † 1 ED11 3 1 ED12 ThreePosition.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 543 . FourCircuit † 3 1 ED12 3 ➀ If desired. Add suffix LED after color symbol (J1).crouse-hinds. TwoCircuit Replacement Contact Blocks* Hub Size Dead End Cat. 4 Pushbutton Stations. markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number. See explanation in Options section. † Suffixes S634 or S635 may be used on these catalog numbers. # 110–125 110–125 Candelabra Candelabra 6 6 1 /2 /4 MC180 J1 MC-280-J1 MCC180 J1 MCC280 J1 220–250 220–250 Intermediate Intermediate 10 10 1 /2 /4 MC184 J1 MC-284-J1 MCC184 J1 MCC284 J1 440–480 440–480 Candelabra Candelabra 6 6 1 /2 /4 MC182 J1 MC282 J1 MCC182 J1 MCC282 J1 3 3 3 * For replacement contact blocks see page 571.Selector Switches Furnished with pushbutton contact blocks.Pilot Lights‡ Enclosure with Jewel Cover and Lamp MC dead end pilot light Primary Voltage Range Lamp Base Lamp Watts Hub Size Dead End Cat. cam actuated by a maintained contact selector mechanism to operate in the sequences shown in the diagrams below. www. ‡LED pilot lights can be furnished in place of standard incandescent pilot lamps. # Through Feed Cat. # /2 /4 MC11271 ➀ MC21271 ➀ MCC11271 ➀ MCC21271 ➀ /2 /4 MC11272 ➀ MC21272 ➀ MCC11272 ➀ MCC21272 ➀ /2 /4 MC11273 ➀ MC21273 ➀ MCC11273 ➀ MCC21273 ➀ /2 /4 MC11274 ➀ MC21274 ➀ MCC11274 ➀ MCC21274 ➀ /2 /4 MC11275 ➀ MC21275 ➀ MCC11275 ➀ MCC21275 ➀ 1 ED11 3 1 TwoPosition. Select from the list of standard markings below: START OFF RESET LIGHT ON STOP RUN TRIP HAND ON JOG TEST AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY OPEN DOWN RAISE FORWARD CLOSE IN LOWER REVERSE UP OUT Ordering Information . FourCircuit ED12 3 4C ThreePosition.MC and MCC Series 4C Watertight NEMA 3. # Through Feed Cat.

.............. Dimensions are approximate....... Features: Options: The following special options are available from factory by adding suffix to Cat.......... • Pushbutton stations... maintained contact clockwise operation ..... and 1" sizes..... Momentary contact counterclockwise operation........................ C & D • NEMA: 3..... Groups B... LED pilot lights in place of standard incandescent pilot lamps ..........crouse-hinds..... 12 Watertight Weatherproof Dust-tight Factory Sealed..... • Factory installed dead end (N2S) or through feed (N2SC) hubs – 1/2".............. NCD box is supplied with units using 1" hubs or MSR option..... chemical plants and other process industry facilities where similar hazards exist N2S and N2SC pushbutton stations and selector switches are used: • In conjunction with magnetic starters or contactors for remote control of motors N2S and N2SC pilot lights are used: • To visually indicate at a remote location that the desired function is being performed Optional maintained stop pushbutton(s) are used: As emergency or normal stop button(s) in motor control circuits for positive shutdown..... Suffix S708 S634 S635 MSR1 MSR2 Maintained stop pushbuttons are installed at bottom position(s) of control station unless otherwise specified.... Corrosion-Resistant 600VAC Heavy Duty 4C Applications: N2S and N2SC pushbutton stations.... or corrosive locations • Indoors or outdoors in Division 2 areas of petroleum refineries.. • Optional maintained stop feature operates by depressing the mushroom head pushbutton......... I................... d e ml mw 1 /2" & 3/4" Hubs a b 1" Hubs a b 71/4 313/16 43/8 53/8 63/8 215/16 11/8 11/16 11/4 15/16 113/4 313/16 43/8 53/8 107/8 215/16 11/8 11/16 11/4 15/16 *NCS box is supplied with units using 1/2" and 3/4" hubs.. 2)............ Division 2 hazardous areas where flammable vapors or gases may be present due to accidental or abnormal operation • In damp................. C............ spring return to center.......................... Groups B.... • Grounding plate included with each hub.........4C N2S and N2SC Series Control Stations Cl........... 2........... #: Description Padlock attachments for all pushbuttons.. Division 2........... C............ and selector switch devices are factory sealed.................. N2S(C) Body Style 1 or 2 devices 3 or 4 devices Outside Dims. selector switches and pilot lights are suitable for use: • In Class I... I w Mounting (NCS)* (NCD)* Dims.... • Lockout is standard on selector switch devices... pilot lights.. 7BCD (Division 2) and 12 • UL Standard: 1203 • CSA Standard: C22......... only "STOP" button provided with lockout (lockout standard with STOP)........... Div. D NEMA 3.............. 4X... Pushbutton must be manually pulled before start button can be actuated. D..... wet... External seals are not required. 14 & 30 Electrical Rating Ranges: • Pushbutton stations and selector switches – heavy duty 600 VAC maximum • Pilot lights – 120 to 600 VAC Maintained Stop Pushbutton † Use dimension "e" for control station with 1" hub or maintained stop pushbutton........... LED Dimensions In Inches: Certifications and Compliances: • NEC: Class I. Groups B. maintained contact counterclockwise operation ............ 4X.... Three position selector switches with modified operation: Momentary contact clockwise operation. • Enclosures are made of Krydon® fiberglass-reinforced polyester material having excellent corrosion resistance and stability to heat and sunlight.......................... Two maintained stop pushbuttons .... 7BCD (Div. Control station with maintained stop pushbutton (requires NCD type enclosure): One maintained stop pushbutton ................... ‡ NCD 4 device box used with 1" hubs or MSR option.. For "START-STOP" stations.... spring return to center......com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business .. • Indicating plates are available with a choice of 40 standard markings...2 Nos. 544 www.................. not for construction purposes......... 3/4"......

# Feed Cat. www.N2S and N2SC Series Control Stations 4C Cl. † Suffixes S634 or S635 may be used on these catalog numbers. I. Two-Circuit START-STOP (or Specify) 3 /2 /4 1 N2S1121 ➁ N2S2121 ➁ N2S3121 ➁ N2SC1121 ➁ N2SC2121 ➁ N2SC3121 ➁ Two-Position. C. D NEMA 3. Div.With Selector Switches Marking Unless Otherwise Specified Hub Size Dead End Cat. Four-Circuit † 3 Specify /2 /4 1 N2S1124 ➁ N2S2124 ➁ N2S3124 ➁ N2SC1124 ➁ N2SC2124 ➁ N2SC3124 ➁ /2 /4 1 N2S1125 ➁ N2S2125 ➁ N2S3125 ➁ N2SC1125 ➁ N2SC2125 ➁ N2SC3125 ➁ Switch Position Style 1 2 3 Enclosure With Selector Switch 1 1 1 1 1 Three-Position. Two-Circuit † Specify /2 3 /4 1 N2S1123 ➁ N2S2123 ➁ N2S3123 ➁ N2SC1123 ➁ N2SC2123 ➁ N2SC3123 ➁ Three-Position. Select from the list of standard markings below: Marking Pushbuttons: REVERSE Selector Switches – Two-Position: Selector Switches – Three-Position: OPEN START CLOSE RUN-JOG RUN-OFF-JOG STOP UP HAND-AUTO HAND-OFF-AUTO ON DOWN FOR-REV FOR-OFF-REV OFF IN FAST-SLOW FAST-OFF-SLOW RUN OUT OPEN-CLOSE 1-OFF-2 JOG RAISE UP-DOWN OPEN-OFF-CLOSE TRIP LOWER ON-OFF UP-OFF-DOWN RESET IN-OUT TEST RAISE-LOWER LIGHT ON START-STOP HAND AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY FORWARD ‡ Pilot lights are transformer type except those rated 120 volts. markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number.With Pilot Lights‡* No. # Two-Position. 120 volts. Corrosion-Resistant 600VAC Heavy Duty Ordering Information . Units Diagram 1 2 3 120 240 480 600 120 240 480 600 120 240 480 600 120 240 480 600 N2S1131 N2S1132 N2S1134 N2S1135 N2S1231 N2S1232 N2S1234 N2S1235 N2S1331 N2S1332 N2S1334 N2S1335 N2S1431 N2S1432 N2S1434 N2S1435 ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ N2SC1131 N2SC1132 N2SC1134 N2SC1135 N2SC1231 N2SC1232 N2SC1234 N2SC1235 N2SC1331 N2SC1332 N2SC1334 N2SC1335 N2SC1431 N2SC1432 N2SC1434 N2SC1435 ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ 3 /4" Hubs Dead End Cat. See Options Sections for more information. # . 2. See explanation in Options section. * LED pilot lights are available. Add suffix LED after last color symbol. Color Symbol Color Symbol Red Green Amber J1 J3 J6 Clear Blue J10 J11 ➁ If desired. # Through Feed Cat.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 545 4C 4 Volts Enclosure with Pilot Lights 1 /2" Hubs Dead End Through Cat. # N2S3131 N2S3132 N2S3134 N2S3135 N2S3231 N2S3232 N2S3234 N2S3235 N2S3331 N2S3332 N2S3334 N2S3335 N2S3431 N2S3432 N2S3434 N2S3435 ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ Through Feed Cat. 12 Watertight Weatherproof Dust-tight Factory Sealed. # N2S2131 N2S2132 N2S2134 N2S2135 N2S2231 N2S2232 N2S2234 N2S2235 N2S2331 N2S2332 N2S2334 N2S2335 N2S2431 N2S2432 N2S2434 N2S2435 ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ Through Feed Cat.crouse-hinds. Four-Circuit START-STOP (or Specify) 3 /2 /4 1 N2S1122 ➁ N2S2122 ➁ N2S3122 ➁ N2SC1122 ➁ N2SC2122 ➁ N2SC3122 ➁ Three-Position. # N2SC3131 N2SC3132 N2SC3134 N2SC3135 N2SC3231 N2SC3232 N2SC3234 N2SC3235 N2SC3331 N2SC3332 N2SC3334 N2SC3335 N2SC3431 N2SC3432 N2SC3434 N2SC3435 ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ Ordering Information . 2). # N2SC2131 N2SC2132 N2SC2134 N2SC2135 N2SC2231 N2SC2232 N2SC2234 N2SC2235 N2SC2331 N2SC2332 N2SC2334 N2SC2335 N2SC2431 N2SC2432 N2SC2434 N2SC2435 ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ 1" Hubs Dead End Cat. 4X. 7BCD (Div. 3 watts. Four-Circuit † 3 Specify ➀ Specify lens color for each pilot light. Lamp type is 120MB. N2S1231 with one red and one green would be ordered as N2S1231-J1-J3. Groups B. As an example.

Groups B.crouse-hinds. 3 watts. Div. C. # 1 START (or Specify) 3 /2 /4 1 N2S1110 ➁ N2S2110 ➁ N2S3110 ➁ N2SC1110 ➁ N2SC2110 ➁ N2SC3110 ➁ 2 START-STOP (or Specify) 3 /2 /4 1 N2S1210 ➁ N2S2210 ➁ N2S3210 ➁ N2SC1210 ➁ N2SC2210 ➁ N2SC3210 ➁ 3 Specify 3 /2 /4 1 N2S1310 ➁ N2S2310 ➁ N2S3310 ➁ N2SC1310 ➁ N2SC2310 ➁ N2SC3310 ➁ 4 Specify /2 /4 1 N2S1410 ➁ N2S2410 ➁ N2S3410 ➁ N2SC1410 ➁ N2SC2410 ➁ N2SC3410 ➁ 1 1 1 1 4C Through Feed Cat. 120 volts. I. 2. 7BCD (Div. # 3 1 1 Dead End Cat. Corrosion-Resistant 600VAC Heavy Duty Ordering Information . D NEMA 3.Combination Control Stations Enclosure With Pushbuttons and Pilot Lights Pilot Lights* Pushbuttons Diagram Markings Hub Size Volts 1 N2S12411 ➀➁ N2SC12411 ➀➁ N2S22411 ➀➁ N2SC22411 ➀➁ N2S32411 ➀➁ N2SC32411 ➀➁ 480 N2S12414 ➀➁ N2SC12414 ➀➁ N2S22414 ➀➁ N2SC22414 ➀➁ N2S32414 ➀➁ N2SC32414 ➀➁ /2 /4 1 240 N2S12412 ➀➁ N2SC12412 ➀➁ N2S22412 ➀➁ N2SC22412 ➀➁ N2S32412 ➀➁ N2SC32412 ➀➁ 600 N2S12415 ➀➁ N2SC12415 ➀➁ N2S22415 ➀➁ N2SC22415 ➀➁ N2S32415 ➀➁ N2SC32415 ➀➁ 3 /2 /4 1 120 N2S13421 ➀➁ N2SC13421 ➀➁ N2S23421 ➀➁ N2SC23421 ➀➁ N2S33421 ➀➁ N2SC33421 ➀➁ 480 N2S13424 ➀➁ N2SC13424 ➀➁ N2S23424 ➀➁ N2SC23424 ➀➁ N2S33424 ➀➁ N2SC33424 ➀➁ /2 /4 1 240 N2S13422 ➀➁ N2SC13422 ➀➁ N2S23422 ➀➁ N2SC23422 ➀➁ N2S33422 ➀➁ N2SC33422 ➀➁ 600 N2S13425 ➀➁ N2SC13425 ➀➁ N2S23425 ➀➁ N2SC23425 ➀➁ N2S33425 ➀➁ N2SC33425 ➀➁ 3 /2 /4 1 120 N2S13411 ➀➁ N2SC13411 ➀➁ N2S23411 ➀➁ N2SC23411 ➀➁ N2S33411 ➀➁ N2SC33411 ➀➁ 480 N2S13414 ➀➁ N2SC13414 ➀➁ N2S23414 ➀➁ N2SC23414 ➀➁ N2S33414 ➀➁ N2SC33414 ➀➁ /2 /4 1 240 N2S13412 ➀➁ N2SC13412 ➀➁ N2S23412 ➀➁ N2SC23412 ➀➁ N2S33412 ➀➁ N2SC33412 ➀➁ 600 N2S13415 ➀➁ N2SC13415 ➀➁ N2S23415 ➀➁ N2SC23415 ➀➁ N2S33415 ➀➁ N2SC33415 ➀➁ 3 /2 /4 1 120 N2S14421 ➀➁ N2SC14421 ➀➁ N2S24421 ➀➁ N2SC24421 ➀➁ N2S34421 ➀➁ N2SC34421 ➀➁ 480 N2S14424 ➀➁ N2SC14424 ➀➁ N2S24424 ➀➁ N2SC24424 ➀➁ N2S34424 ➀➁ N2SC34424 ➀➁ /2 /4 1 240 N2S14422 ➀➁ N2SC14422 ➀➁ N2S24422 ➀➁ N2SC24422 ➀➁ N2S34422 ➀➁ N2SC34422 ➀➁ 600 N2S14425 ➀➁ N2SC14425 ➀➁ N2S24425 ➀➁ N2SC24425 ➀➁ N2S34425 ➀➁ N2SC34425 ➀➁ Specify 1 Specify 1 3 1 2 1 Specify 1 3 1 2 2 Specify 1 3 ➀ See pages 545–547 ➁ See pages 545–547 ‡ Pilot lights are transformer type except those rated 120 volts.With Pushbuttons – Momentary Contact No. 4X. 546 www. # 3 Ordering Information . Units Marking Unless Otherwise Specified Contact Symbol Enclosure with Pushbuttons Hub Dead End Size Cat.com US: 1-866-764-5454 Through Feed Cat. # 120 3 2 Dead End Volts Cat.4C N2S and N2SC Series Control Stations Cl. # CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business . 2). 12 Watertight Weatherproof Dust-tight Factory Sealed. Lamp type is 120MB. # /2 /4 1 1 1 Through Feed Cat.

Select from the list of standard markings below: Marking Pushbuttons: START STOP ON OFF RUN JOG TRIP RESET TEST LIGHT ON HAND AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY FORWARD REVERSE OPEN CLOSE UP DOWN IN OUT RAISE LOWER Selector Switches – Two-Position: Selector Switches – Three-Position: RUN-JOG HAND-AUTO FOR-REV FAST-SLOW OPEN-CLOSE UP-DOWN ON-OFF IN-OUT RAISE-LOWER START-STOP RUN-OFF-JOG HAND-OFF-AUTO FOR-OFF-REV FAST-OFF-SLOW 1-OFF-2 OPEN-OFF-CLOSE UP-OFF-DOWN ‡ Pilot lights are transformer type except those rated 120 volts. As an example. www. # 2-Pos. N2S1231 with one red and one green would be ordered as N2S1231-J1-J3. 2). See Options Sections for more information. D NEMA 3. C. Groups B.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 547 4C 120 3 3-Pos. Add suffix LED after last color symbol. * LED pilot lights are available. # 3 1 Specify 1 Through Feed Cat. † Suffixes S634 or S635 may be used on these catalog numbers. I. Color Symbol Color Symbol Red Green Amber J1 J3 J6 Clear Blue J10 J11 ➁ If desired. 12 Watertight Weatherproof Dust-tight Factory Sealed. Pushbuttons and Selector Switch Hub Dead End Markings Size Volts Cat.N2S and N2SC Series Control Stations 4C Cl.Combination Control Stations Selector Switches Position No. Corrosion-Resistant 600VAC Heavy Duty Ordering Information .† Pilot Push Lights*‡ buttons 1 2 1 2 3 Enclosure With Pilot Light. 2-Cct N2S145211 ➀➁ N2SC145211 ➀➁ N2S245211 ➀➁ N2SC245211 ➀➁ 480 N2S345211 ➀➁ N2SC345211 ➀➁ N2S145214 ➀➁ N2SC145214 ➀➁ N2S245214 ➀➁ N2SC245214 ➀➁ N2S345214 ➀➁ N2SC345214 ➀➁ /2 /4 1 240 N2S145212 ➀➁ N2SC145212 ➀➁ N2S245212 ➀➁ N2SC245212 ➀➁ 600 N2S345212 ➀➁ N2SC345212 ➀➁ N2S145215 ➀➁ N2SC145215 ➀➁ N2S245215 ➀➁ N2SC245215 ➀➁ N2S345215 ➀➁ N2SC345215 ➀➁ 3 /2 /4 1 120 N2S145231 ➀➁ N2SC145231 ➀➁ N2S245231 ➀➁ N2SC245231 ➀➁ 480 N2S345231 ➀➁ N2SC345231 ➀➁ N2S145234 ➀➁ N2SC145234 ➀➁ N2S245234 ➀➁ N2SC245234 ➀➁ N2S345234 ➀➁ N2SC345234 ➀➁ /2 /4 1 240 N2S145232 ➀➁ N2SC145232 ➀➁ N2S245232 ➀➁ N2SC245232 ➀➁ 600 N2S345232 ➀➁ N2SC345232 ➀➁ N2S145235 ➀➁ N2SC145235 ➀➁ N2S245235 ➀➁ N2SC245235 ➀➁ N2S345235 ➀➁ N2SC345235 ➀➁ 1 Specify 1 3 ➀ Specify lens color for each pilot light. Lamp type is 120MB. markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number. 2. 4X. Div. See explanation in Options section. 7BCD (Div. 2-Cct Through Feed Cat. 3 watts. # /2 /4 1 1 2 Dead End Volts Cat. 120 volts. # .

2. # With Two Hub (3/4") Cat. 1 three position. Enclosures (NCD or NCDC enclosures must be used with MSR1 or MSR2) Without Hubs Cat. Color Symbol Color Symbol Red Green Amber ‡ Pilot lights are transformer type except those rated 120 volts. # With Two Hub 3/4" Cat. Corrosion-Resistant 600VAC Heavy Duty Ordering Information . select the enclosure required and add the desired devices from listings below. 4X.Custom-Built.crouse-hinds. rated at 120V. Custom-built factory assembled control stations may thus be ordered as follows: Requirements: 3-device control station on Krydon® material enclosure with 3/4" through feed hubs. # With One Hub 1/2" Cat. pushbutton and selector switch plate markings are selected from footnote tables. # 2 NCD01 NCD02 NCD11 NCD12 NCDC11 NCDC12 NCD21 NCD22 NCDC21 NCDC22 NCD31 NCD32 NCDC31 NCDC32 3 NCD03 NCD13 NCDC13 NCD23 NCDC23 NCD33 NCDC33 4 NCD04 NCD14 NCDC14 NCD24 NCDC24 NCD34 NCDC34 No. 548 www. of Devices 1 1 Pilot Lights‡* Transformer Type Pilot lights to be used in N2SU Series: Volts Cat. ORDER: 4C NCDC23FA N2P310-J3 N2SW11311-HAND-OFF-AUTO N2PS1111G-START Pilot light jewel symbol. # Red N2PLU10 J1 LED 120 240 480 600 N2PL10 N2PL20 N2PL40 N2PL50 Green N2PLU10 J3 LED ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ Amber N2PLU10 J6 LED Clear N2PLU10 J10 LED Blue N2PLU10 J11 LED ➀ Specify lens color for each pilot light using symbols below. Add suffix LED after last color symbol. I. # With One Hub (1/2") Cat. C. D NEMA 3. Note that order of assembly of control stations should be listed in desired mounting order. 2). 7BCD (Div. 12 Watertight Weatherproof Dust-tight Factory Sealed.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business J1 J3 J6 Clear Blue J10 J11 . with 1 pilot light with green jewel. * LED pilot lights are available. # With One Hub 3/4" Cat. reading from top to bottom of enclosure. 120 volts. Div. # With Two Hub 1" Cat. Groups B. and 1 green single circuit pushbutton marked START. 3 watts. Lamp type is 120MB.N2S and N2SC Series Control Stations 4C Cl. # With Two Hub (1/2") Cat. Factory Assembled Control Stations To order your custom-built factory assembled control station. Suffix FA indicates factory assembled. # With One Hub (3/4") Cat. of Devices Without Hubs Cat. # 2 NCS01 NCS02 NCS21 NCS22 NCSC21 NCSC22 NCS11 NCS12 NCSC11 NCSC12 3 NCS03 NCS23 NCSC23 NCS13 NCSC13 4 NCS04 NCS24 NCSC24 NCS14 NCSC14 No. # With One Hub 1" Cat. # With Two Hub 1/2" Cat. See Options Sections for more information. two circuit selector switch marked HAND-OFF-AUTO.

D NEMA 3. # Closure Plug 2 Circuit Contact Universal Symbol Cat. www. 12 Watertight Weatherproof Dust-tight Factory Sealed. Select from the list of standard markings below: Marking Pushbuttons: REVERSE Selector Switches – Selector Switches – START OPEN Two-Positions: Three-Position: STOP CLOSE RUN-JOG RUN-OFF-JOG ON UP HAND-AUTO HAND-OFF-AUTO OFF DOWN FOR-REV FOR-OFF-REV RUN IN FAST-SLOW FAST-OFF-SLOW JOG OUT OPEN-CLOSE 1-OFF-2 TRIP RAISE UP-DOWN OPEN-OFF-CLOSE RESET LOWER ON-OFF UP-OFF-DOWN TEST IN-OUT LIGHT ON RAISE-LOWER HAND START-STOP AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY FORWARD † Suffixes S634 or S635 may be used on these catalog numbers. 2. Div. 7BCD (Div. markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number. # Two Position Two Circuit N2SW11211 ➁ Two Position Four Circuit N2SW12221 ➁ Three Position Two Circuit † N2SW11311 ➁ Three Position Four Circuit † N2SW12321 ➁ Three Position Four Circuit † N2SW12322 ➁ ➁ If desired. # Closure Plug NP2 N2PS1211G ➁ 4C Selector Switches Style Position 1 Position 2 Position 3 Cat. I. 4X. See explanation in Options section. Corrosion-Resistant 600VAC Heavy Duty Pushbutton Stations – Momentary Contact Color of Operator 1 Circuit Contact Universal Symbol Cat.crouse-hinds. C.N2S and N2SC Series Control Stations Cl. # Natural N2PS1111 ➁ N2PS1211 ➁ Red N2PS1111R ➁ N2PS1211R ➁ Green N2PS1111G ➁ Red Mushroom Head N2PM1111 S111 ➁ 4C Description Cat. Groups B. 2).com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 549 .

N2S and N2SC Series Control Stations 4C Factory Sealed. 7BCD (Div. 12 Watertight Weatherproof Dust-tight Dimensions 4C In Inches: N2S For 1/ 2" and 3/ 4" hub sizes (for 1" hub and/or MSR option. NCS(C) Body Style 1 device 2 devices 3 devices 4 devices 550 l Outside Dimensions w d 71/4 71/4 91/2 113/4 www. D NEMA 3. 2. Div. 2). C. Corrosion-Resistant 600VAC Heavy Duty Cl. see page 544). I.com 313/16 313/16 313/16 313/16 43/8 43/8 43/8 43/8 US: 1-866-764-5454 Mounting Dimensions ml mw 63/8 63/8 85/8 107/8 215/16 215/16 215/16 215/16 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business . 4X.crouse-hinds. Groups B.

....... the following can be obtained by inserting these codes for the 4th and 5th character in the catalog number: D = Double 1/ 2" hubs at bottom CD = Single hub at top. 3 and 4-device units Electrical Rating Ranges: • Pushbutton stations and selector switches – heavy duty 600VAC maximum • Pilot lights – 120 to 600 VAC Options: Note: Suffix S708 S634 S635 MSR1 In addition to hub arrangements shown..... Three-position selector switches with modified operation: Momentary contact clockwise operation.. 2).... • Exterior parts of pushbuttons. 2.. spring return to center....com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 551 4C Description Padlock attachments for all pushbuttons....... I..... Zones 1 and 2 areas of petroleum refineries........ Corrosion-Resistant 600VAC Heavy Duty Cl. Groups B.. chemical plants and other process industry facilities where similar hazards exist N2SU and N2SCU pushbutton stations and selector switches are used: • In conjunction with magnetic starters or contactors for remote control of motors N2SU and N2SCU pilot lights are used: • To visually indicate at a remote location that the desired function is being performed Optional maintained stop pushbutton(s) are used: As emergency or normal stop button(s) in motor control circuits for positive shutdown...... or corrosive locations • Indoors or outdoors in Division 2 and Class I.................... • Lockout is standard on selector switch devices.................. • LED lamps are standard to provide longer life..... • Legend plates are available with 40 standard markings...... pilot lights. 4X...... Zones 1 and 2.... durable enclosures are made of Vestamid™ – a black molded high impact strength..... spring return to center.................... • 1. I....... D....... 7BCD and 12 • UL Standard: 508 • CSA C22... C....... and selector switches are made of Krydon material... strong. and stainless steel screws for added corrosion resistance. 2.. Ex de IIB + H2 Dust-tight IP66 Watertight Weatherproof NEMA 3... 4X..... • Factory installed dead end (N2SU) or through feed (N2SCU) hubs – 1 /2" and 3/4" sizes.... Zones 1 and 2 hazardous areas where flammable vapors or gases may be present due to accidental or abnormal operation • In damp..... • Pushbutton and pilot light guards are fluted for no-slip installation...... ..... 14 & 30 www.... double 1/ 2" hubs at bottom DD = Double 1/ 2" hubs at each end Dimensions In Inches: Features: • Compact. G 4C Corrosion-Resistant Cl. II... See pages 552–553 for device part numbers • Pushbutton design uses a unique internal neoprene boot which completely encloses all internal parts..... maintained contact clockwise operation...........2 No............. One maintained stop pushbutton..... only "STOP" button provided with lockout (lockout standard with STOP)... selector switches and pilot lights are suitable for use: • In Class I. Division 2 and Class I.. Div...... • Formed-in-place gasket. Div..... 2... Momentary contact counterclockwise operation.crouse-hinds... maintained contact counterclockwise operation.. A wiping gasket around the pushbutton cleans the wall of the pushbutton guard of any foreign material accumulation as the button is operated. 7BCD (Div........N2SU/N2SCU Control Stations Factory Sealed........... Groups F..................... polyester material having excellent corrosion resistance and stability to heat...... wet........... For "START-STOP" stations............ D Cl............... Certifications and Compliances: • NEMA: 3........... 12 Applications: Size Ranges: N2SU and N2SCU pushbutton stations...... C... Groups B.

Div. Two-Circuit START-STOP (or Specify) Two-Position. Four-Circuit 3 Specify ➁ If desired. ESWP126. Groups B. Units Contact Symbol Enclosure with Pushbuttons Hub Size Dead End Cat. Zones 1 and 2. Ex de IIB + H2 Dust-tight IP66 Watertight Factory Sealed. Select from the list of standard markings below: Marking Push Buttons: REVERSE Selector Switches – Selector Switches – START OPEN Two-Position: Three-Position STOP CLOSE RUN-JOG RUN-OFF-JOG ON UP HAND-AUTO HAND-OFF-AUTO OFF DOWN FOR-REV FOR-OFF-REV RUN IN FAST-SLOW FAST-OFF-SLOW JOG OUT OPEN-CLOSE 1-OFF-2 TRIP RAISE UP-DOWN OPEN-OFF-CLOSE RESET LOWER ON-OFF UP-OFF-DOWN TEST IN-OUT LIGHT ON RAISE-LOWER HAND START-STOP AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY FORWARD *Replacement switch for selector switches is Cat. # Through Feed Cat. No. # Through Feed Cat. 552 www. 2). Four-Circuit START-STOP (or Specify) Three-Position. 4X. markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number. # /2 /4 N2S1121U ➁ N2S2121U ➁ N2SC1121U ➁ N2SC2121U ➁ /2 /4 N2S1122U ➁ N2S2122U ➁ N2SC1122U ➁ N2SC2122U ➁ /2 /4 N2S1123U ➁ N2S2123U ➁ N2SC1123U ➁ N2SC2123U ➁ /2 /4 N2S1124U ➁ N2S2124U ➁ N2SC1124U ➁ N2SC2124U ➁ /2 /4 N2S1125U ➁ N2S2125U ➁ N2SC1125U ➁ N2SC2125U ➁ 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 Three-Position. 7BCD (Div.With Pushbuttons – Momentary Contact Marking Unless Otherwise Specified No. II. 2. Groups F.With Selector Switches* Position Style 1 2 3 Marking Unless Otherwise Specified Two-Position.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business . I. # /2 /4 N2S1110U ➁ N2S2110U ➁ N2SC1110U ➁ N2SC2110U ➁ /2 /4 N2S1210U ➁ N2S2210U ➁ N2SC1210U ➁ N2SC2210U ➁ /2 /4 N2S1310U ➁ N2S2310U ➁ N2SC1310U ➁ N2SC2310U ➁ /2 /4 N2S1410U ➁ N2S2410U ➁ N2SC1410U ➁ N2SC2410U ➁ START (or Specify) 1 1 START-STOP (or Specify) 1 2 3 Specify 4 Specify 3 3 1 3 1 4C 3 Maintained pushbutton with pilot light control station Ordering Information . Div.crouse-hinds. D Cl. Two-Circuit Specify Enclosure with One Selector Switch Hub Size Dead End Cat. Corrosion-Resistant Weatherproof 600VAC Heavy Duty NEMA 3. C. 12 Ordering Information . Four-Circuit 3 Specify 1 Three-Position. G Corrosion-Resistant Cl. I.N2SU/N2SCU Control Stations 4C Cl. 2.

# 1 120 240 N2S1131U ➀ N2S1132U ➀ N2SC1131U ➀ N2SC1132U ➀ N2S2131U ➀ N2S2132U ➀ N2SC2131U ➀ N2SC2132U ➀ 2 120 240 N2S1231U ➀ N2S1232U ➀ N2SC1231U ➀ N2SC1232U ➀ N2S2231U ➀ N2S2232U ➀ N2SC2231U ➀ N2SC2232U ➀ 3 120 240 N2S1331U ➀ N2S1332U ➀ N2SC1331U ➀ N2SC1332U ➀ N2S2331U ➀ N2S2332U ➀ N2SC2331U ➀ N2SC2332U ➀ 4 120 240 N2S1431U ➀ N2S1432U ➀ N2SC1431U ➀ N2SC1432U ➀ N2S2431U ➀ N2S2432U ➀ N2SC2431U ➀ N2SC2432U ➀ Diagram 4C Volts Dead End Cat. G 4C Corrosion-Resistant Cl.N2SU/N2SCU Control Stations Cl. C. # Dead End Cat. Units 3 Through Feed Cat.Transformer Type Enclosure with Pilot Lights† /2" Hubs /4" Hubs 1 No.With Pilot Lights . As an example. # Through Feed Cat. I. D Cl. N2S1231U with one red and one green would be ordered as N2S1231U-J1-J3 Color Symbol Color Symbol Red Green Amber J1 J3 J6 Clear Blue J10 J11 †Pilot lights are transformer type except those rated 120 volts. 2.crouse-hinds. 4X. Corrosion-Resistant 600VAC Heavy Duty Ordering Information . Zones 1 and 2. Div. 2).com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 553 . 12 Factory Sealed. # ➀ Specify lens color for each pilot light. Groups F. 7BCD (Div. Ex de IIB + H2 Dust-tight IP66 Watertight Weatherproof NEMA 3. 2. Div. II. www. Groups B. I.

2. Two-Circuit 1 3 Specify 1 3 ➀ Specify lens color for each pilot light. Pushbuttons and Selector Switch Hub Dead End Through Feed Size in. I. Select from the list of standard markings below: Marking Red Green Amber Push Buttons: J1 J3 J6 Clear Blue J10 J11 START STOP ON OFF RUN JOG TRIP RESET TEST LIGHT ON HAND AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY Selector Switches – Selector Switches – Two-Position: Three-Position: FORWARD RUN-JOG RUN-OFF-JOG REVERSE HAND-AUTO HAND-OFF-AUTO OPEN FOR-REV FOR-OFF-REV CLOSE FAST-SLOW FAST-OFF-SLOW UP OPEN-CLOSE 1-OFF-2 DOWN UP-DOWN OPEN-OFF-CLOSE IN ON-OFF UP-OFF-DOWN OUT IN-OUT RAISE RAISE-LOWER LOWER START-STOP *Replacement switch for selector switches is Cat. Div. 4X. ESWP126. 12 4C N2SU/N2SCU Control Stations Ordering Information . Div. As an example. # Through Feed Cat. 2. Groups B. markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business . Groups F.crouse-hinds. # /2 /4 120 N2S145211U ➀➁ N2S245211U ➀➁ N2SC145211U ➀➁ N2SC245211U ➀➁ /2 /4 240 N2S145212U ➀➁ N2S245212U ➀➁ N2SC145212U ➀➁ N2SC245212U ➀➁ /2 /4 120 N2S145231U ➀➁ N2S245231U ➀➁ N2SC145231U ➀➁ N2SC245231U ➀➁ /2 /4 240 N2S145232U ➀➁ N2S245232U ➀➁ N2SC145232U ➀➁ N2SC245232U ➀➁ 1 3 Specify 1 3 1 2 Three-Position. # Cat. N2S1231U with one red and one green would be ordered as N2S1231U-J1-J3 Color Symbol Color Symbol ➁ If desired. 2). 7BCD (Div. # 120 240 N2S12411U ➀➁ N2S12412U ➀➁ N2SC12411U ➀➁ N2SC12412U ➀➁ N2S22411U ➀➁ N2S22412U ➀➁ N2SC22411U ➀➁ N2SC22412U ➀➁ 120 240 N2S13421U ➀➁ N2S13422U ➀➁ N2SC13421U ➀➁ N2SC13422U ➀➁ N2S23421U ➀ N2S23422U ➀ N2SC23421U ➀➁ N2SC23422U ➀➁ 120 240 N2S13411U ➀➁ N2S13412U ➀➁ N2SC13411U ➀➁ N2SC13412U ➀➁ N2S23411U ➀➁ N2S23412U ➀➁ N2SC23411U ➀➁ N2SC23412U ➀➁ 120 240 N2S14421U ➀➁ N2S14422U ➀➁ N2SC14421U ➀➁ N2SC14422U ➀➁ N2S24421U ➀➁ N2S24422U ➀➁ N2SC24421U ➀➁ N2SC24422U ➀➁ 1 4C 1 Diagram Marking Unless Otherwise Specified 2 2 1 Specify STARTSTOP (or Specify) 2 Selector Switches Position No. Pilot Lights* Pushbuttons 1 1 2 Two-Position. # Cat.Cl. 554 www. †Pilot lights are transformer type except those rated 120 volts. Volts Cat. Zones 1 and 2. Corrosion-Resistant Weatherproof 600VAC Heavy Duty NEMA 3. D Cl. II. I.Combination Control Stations†* Pilot Lights* Pushbuttons 1 1 Specify STARTSTOP (or Specify) 2 Volts Enclosure with Push Buttons and Pilot Lights† 3 /2" Hubs /4" Hubs Dead End Through Feed Dead End Cat. G Corrosion-Resistant Cl. C. No. Ex de IIB + H2 Dust-tight IP66 Watertight Factory Sealed. Two-Circuit 2 3 Markings Enclosure With Pilot Light. # Cat.

• Factory installed dead end (N2FA) or through feed (N2FAC) hubs – 1/2". Division 2. D NEMA 3. Div.com 1" Hubs a b 11/4 US: 1-866-764-5454 15/16 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 555 . 12 *Dimensions are approximate. • Enclosures are made of Krydon® fiberglass-reinforced polyester material having excellent corrosion resistance and stability to heat and sunlight.N2FA and N2FAC Fire Alarm Stations Cl. not for construction purposes. # Replacement Glass Cat. Groups B. • Break-glass rod is attached to station with a chain for ready access during an emergency. 2). C. 12 Raintight Wet Locations Factory Sealed. Groups B. Ordering Information Hub Size Dead End Cat. # Through Feed Cat. 3/4" and 1" sizes. Groups B. Corrosion-Resistant 4C Applications: 4C N2FA and N2FAC fire alarm stations are used: • As break-glass fire alarm stations • In conjunction with audible and/or visible signaling devices to alert personnel of a fire hazard • In Class I. Division 2. • Highly visible molded-in red color for quick identification. C. C. 7BCD (Division 2). I. D hazardous areas where flammable vapors or gases may be present due to an accident or abnormal operation • In damp. 7BCD (Div. chemical plants and other process industry facilities where similar hazards exist Features: • Factory sealed. wet or corrosive locations • Indoors or outdoors in Division 2 areas of petroleum refineries. # /2 3 /4 1 N2FA11 N2FA21 N2FA31 N2FAC11 N2FAC21 N2FAC31 DS K14 DS K14 DS K14 1 Dimensions* In Inches: Certifications and Compliances: • NEC: Class I. External seals are not required. 1 /2" & 3/4" Hubs a b 11/8 11/16 www. D • NEMA 3. 2.crouse-hinds.

chemical and petrochemical plants and other process industry facilities where similar hazards exist Features: GHG43 Nonmetallic Control Stations • NEMA 4X. I. I. (A) Ex de IIB + H2 T6 Cl. gases or highly combustible dusts • For installation at petroleum refineries. terminal blocks and meters • Base-mounted contact blocks • Easy change-out components snap in place on DIN rail • Enclosure meets UL 94-VO. Also available in anti-static Ex e materials • Inserts for mounting DIN rails • Available with a maximum of 2 entries top and bottom for conduit fittings or cable glands • Suitable for universal mounting plates on pipes. 1. B. NEMA 4X 4C Applications: Control stations are used as a remote means of: • Motor control • Visual indication of equipment performance • On-off control of circuits • Circuit selection Common applications include: • Areas which are hazardous due to the presence of flammable vapors. Groups E.crouse-hinds.T6 Zones 21 and 22 IP 66. F. 2. Div.4C GHG43 Series Control Stations Nonmetallic or 316L Stainless Steel Corrosion Resistant UL/cUL listed Cl. D Cl. T6. conduit. 4X. Zones 1 and 2. Div. Zones 1 and 2. G (cUL) Class I. C. potentiometers. Div. 1. Groups A. G (cUL) PTB ATEX CERTIFIED 3117 Ex de IIC. IP66 Options: Description Eaton's Crouse-Hinds GHG43 Series control stations are now available with 316L stainless steel enclosures. T6. C. making them ideal for corrosive and adverse locations especially offshore platform applications 556 www.com Suffix S860 US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business . F. D Class II. Zones 1 and 2. T6 Type 3. Ex de IIB + H2. B. wall or channels • Mounting dimensions data molded on back • Captive. Div. Groups A. IP66 enclosure with formedin-place gasket • Available with all operators: indicator lights. corrosion-resistant cover screws • Built-in mounting slots for wall installation • Available in 316L stainless steel GHG43 Stainless Steel Control Stations Certifications and Compliances: • • • • • • • • UL/cUL Listed Class I. 4. 2. T6 AEx de IIB + H2. IP66 CENELEC-PTB 00 ATEX 3117 Ex de IIC. II. pushbuttons. control switches. Groups E. Zones 1 and 2 Ex de IIC.

com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 557 .crouse-hinds. *Unoccupied spaces must be filled in with KLM for correct positioning of devices. add suffix "S860" to end of catalog number. www.GHG43 Series Control Stations How to build a GHG43 Series Catalog Number‡ 4C Nonmetallic or 316L Stainless Steel Corrosion Resistant GHG43 2 .Size 2 Enclosure Codes see page 559 4C Pushbutton DRT Codes see page 559 Double Pushbutton Mounting Area* GHG43 4 .Size 4 Enclosure Codes see page 559 Key Operated Pushbutton Codes see page 560 Mushroom-Head Pushbutton Codes see page 560 Mounting Area* Signal Lamp ‡For a GHG43 control station with 316L stainless steel enclosure.

crouse-hinds. Zone 1 Gland plate 2 x M25 Threaded Entry. SSTGK1 Stainless steel Gland plate Codes see pages 563–564 2 x 3/4" Myers Hub. Gland plate ‡For a GHG43 control station with 316L stainless steel enclosure.4C GHG43 Series Control Stations How to build a GHG43 Series Catalog Number‡ Nonmetallic or 316L Stainless Steel Corrosion Resistant Cable Entries NPT Metric No entries No entries 2 x 1/2" Myers Hub. Blanking plug and Gland plate 1 x 1/2" Myers Hub. 1 x 3/ 4" SSTGK2 Stainless st. Threaded entry Gland plate Blanking plug and Gland plate Terminals and cover blanking plug 1 x 3/4" Myers Hub. STGK1. *Unoccupied spaces must be filled in with KLM for correct positioning of devices. Zone 1 Gland plate 1 x M25 Threaded Entry. 2 x M20 STGK2 Zinc Gland Threaded entries plate Gland plate (Stainless Steel Control Stations only) Measuring Instrument One entry 2 x 1/2" Myers Hub. 1 x M20 SSTGK1 Stainless st. add suffix "S860" to end of catalog number. STGK1 Zinc Gland plate 2 x M25 Plastic Cable gland M25 Blanking plug 4C Codes see page 561 Potentiometer Two entries Codes see page 562 Requires 2 spaces 2 x 3/4" Myers Hub.com 2 x M25 Threaded entries Gland plate US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business . 1 blanking plug and Gland plate 1 x 1/2" Myers Hub. 558 www. Myers Hub Gland plate SSTGK2 stainless steel. STGK2. 1 x M32 Plastic SSTGK2 Stainless Cable gland steel Gland plate (Stainless Steel Control Stations only) Switch Codes see pages 563–564 Requires 2 spaces Control Switch Ex 23 10A Code see page 561 1 x 3/4" Myers Hub.

yellow. D Left/Right 44 ALL * 0 01 02 03 04 06 I II 45 Stop Start Special-Text on Order † 07 99 Lockout see page 565 Code E (leave blank if no lockout required) Key-Operated Pushbutton SLT S Code L T O A B C Contact System Code B 23 Pushbutton Key Not Depressed Lockable Key Removable Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No Yes Yes Yes Lockable Key Removable Yes No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Auto Yes Yes Yes 1 2 3 4 5 6 Depressed Code C 24 25 * 01 . cUL Up to 400V NEC/CEC 10A IEC 16 A 2 x 2.Start. I.Pushbuttons Technical Data GHG43 Series Control Stations 4C Nonmetallic or 316L Stainless Steel Corrosion Resistant Pushbuttons: • Used for logic controls in hazardous areas • Single or double units • Used with all operators • Base mounting Pushbutton Ex de IIC T6 PTB No.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 559 .Includes the following discs . green. † For Marking Guide for Pushbuttons see page 565.B. stop.1007U PTB.crouse-hinds. and red. UL. www. O. Pushbutton DRT D R Code T O A B C D 4C Contact System Code B 13 14 Inscription ALL * 0 I II Stop Code C 01 02 03 04 06 Lockout see page 565 Code D (leave blank if no lockout required) 15 Start Special-Text On Order † 07 99 Double Pushbutton DDTO D D Code T O A B C D E Contact System Code B 43 Inscription Code C. white and black blank discs.5mm2 / 14AWG >105 Operations Type of Protection Certificate of Conformity Approvals Rated Voltage Rated Current Terminal Wiring Mechanical and Electrical Life See page 564 for explanation of contact symbols. Ex-87.

crouse-hinds.B.000 Hours (11. Ex-88.5 Years) Up to 240VAC. cUL >100. 15 mA <1. green Green 2 3 4 5 Voltage 20-250VAC/DC 10-33VAC/DC Code C 01 31 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business Blue 6 . UL.2W 2 x 2.2106U PTB. 50 / 60 Hz Up to 110VDC Max. Green.GHG43 Series Control Stations 4C Pushbuttons and Signal Lamps Technical Data Nonmetallic or 316L Stainless Steel Corrosion Resistant Mushroom-Head Pushbutton SGT S G Code T A B C D E F 4C Contact System Code B 53 54 55 Color of Pushbutton Code C Red Yellow Black Actuator 1 2 3 Function Spring Return Maintained Key Release Code D 1 2 3 Inscription Stop Start Black Actuator Code E 06 07 11 Lockout see page 565 Code F (leave blank if no lockout required) Signal Lamp Lamp • Used for positive feedback indication • High intensity with special reflector and optical lens • Accomodates most input voltages • Base mounting Type of Protection Certificate of Conformity Approvals Lamp Life Ex de IIC T6 PTB No. yellow. Yellow. red.5mm2 / 14AWG Red. Clear & Blue Rated Voltages Rated Current Power Consumption Terminal Wiring Colors Signal Lamp SIL S Code I A Colored Lens Cover White Code B 1 560 www.com US: 1-866-764-5454 L B C Yellow Red 1 pkg white.

0W 100–10.000 4 www.000W 270° 0–100% 2 x 2.700 5 10.B.GHG43 Series Control Stations 4C Terminal Blocks and Potentiometers Technical Data Nonmetallic or 316L Stainless Steel Corrosion Resistant Terminal Blocks • Terminal block for easy field connections • Base mounting Terminal Blocks Ex e II PTB No.3112U Up to 400V 23A 4mm2 / 12AWG Type of Protection Certificate of Conformity Rated Voltages Rated Current Conductor Size Terminals and Cover Plugs KLM K Code L M A 6 Terminals 2 x 4 mm2 Undrilled Cover (No Terminals) 61 00 Potentiometers 4C Code B B Potentiometers • Used to adjust resistance to vary motor speed or light levels • Scale 0 to 100% • Base mounting Type of Protection Certificate of Conformity Approvals Rated Voltages Power Consumption Resistance Angle of Rotation Scale Connection Terminals Ex de IIC T6 PTB No. Ex-87. cUL >250V 1.000 6 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 561 . UL.200 7 4. Ex-88.B.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 2.1007U PTB.5mm2 / 14AWG Potentiometer POT P Code O A T B Power Consumption 1W Resistance W Code B 1.

75A -5/7.10/15A -15/22.50/75A .100/150A .T. n/1 A Zero Adjustment At instrument Terminal Wiring 2 x 2.30/45A .2.16/24A 0 0 0 0 0 0 -1/1.2. cUL Movement Moving iron (core) Accuracy 2.40/60A .150/225A * Requires 2 spaces.5) Measuring Range 0-16A direct.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 6 Scale Code C Scale 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 .5A .20/30A 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 www.5A . Ex-87.5A . UL.5/3.5A .60/90A -75/112.T.T. C.2016U Approvals PTB.5A .B.crouse-hinds.2 mA Code B 1 2 3 Movements 0-20 mA and 4-20 mA are only available with 0 .100 / 120% scale Direct Measurement Code C Scale Interchangeable Scale for C.75A -5/7.10/15A . n/1A Code C Scale Code C 02 03 04 05 07 02 03 04 05 06 08 0 0 0 0 0 -1/1.5A .5/3. 562 4-20 mA Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business - 200/300A 250/375A 300/450A 400/600A 500/750A 600/900A 100/150A .Ammeters Technical Data GHG43 Series Control Stations 4C Nonmetallic or 316L Stainless Steel Corrosion Resistant Ammeters • Used to measure motor current draw for efficiencies and maintenance • Slide in scales to accommodate any amperage range • Red indicator for quick visual indication to compare set points and actual values 4C Ammeters Type of Protection Certificate of Conformity Ex e II T6 PTB No.5% of range (class 2.5 mm2 / 14 AWG Rated Current Marking Red indicator Ammeter Measuring Instrument AM 72* M 7 Code 2 A B C Movement Direct n/1 A 0 . n/1 A Operating Position Vertical Scale Interchangeable for C.

4A 4C SCT Rotary Control Switch SCT S C Code T A B C D Switch Mechanism Code B Code C 01 03 04 06 29 Same as SCT above except up to 4 independent contacts Inscription 0 STOP HAND REMOTE OFF I START AUTO LOCAL ON Code C Inscription 07 13 14 15 99 I LOCAL STOP HAND Special – text 0 II REMOTE AUTO 0 START 0 AUTO to be given on order Contact System Code D 1 2 3 4 5 6 Rotary Control Switch Ex 23* E Code x 2 3 A Code B 01 03 04 06 07 13 14 23 24 27 29 32 99 B C D E Inscription 0 I STOP START HAND AUTO remote local I 0 LOCAL REMOTE STOP 0 OFF 0 HAND OFF START STOP OFF ON ON OFF Special – text to be given on order AUTO START ON AUTO * Requires 2 spaces in cover.1047U PTB. www.2A Ex de IIC T6 PTB no.8A 110V/.5A 220V/0.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 563 .87. cUL Up to 500 V NEC 10 A IEC 16 A 2 x 2. Ex-88.5mm2 / 14 AWG >105 Operations >105 Operations AC II: 20V/6A 400V/4A DC II: 24V/6A 60V/0.8A 110V/0.B. Hand–Off–Auto) • 2 independent contacts • Available in any contact configuration • Spring return or maintained position • Available with lockout positions Type of Protection Certificate of Conformity Approvals Rated Votage Rated Current Terminal Wiring Mechanical Life Electrical Life Switching Capacity Ex 23 Ex de IIC T6 Ex.e.5A 220V/. UL.1007U PTB. UL.GHG43 Series Control Stations 4C Rotary Switches Technical Data Nonmetallic or 316L Stainless Steel Corrosion Resistant Rotary Control Switches • Used for selectable operations (i.B. cUL 400 V NEC 10 A IEC 16 A 2 x 2.5mm2 / 14 AWG >105 Operations >105 Operations AC I: 500G/10A AC II: 230V/6A 500V/6A DC II: 24V/6A 48V/4A 60V/0.crouse-hinds.

An arrow (→←) indicates spring return.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business .4C GHG43 Series Control Stations Rotary Switches Technical Data Nonmetallic or 316L Stainless Steel Corrosion Resistant Type Code C 00 2 Position 09 3 Position 01 2 Position 10 3 Position 02 2 Position 12 3 Position 03 Single Pole Changeover 13 2 Position 05 HOA 14 2 Position 07 3 Position Single Level 15 3 Position Double Pole Changeover 4C Code C Contact System Contact System Type Switched Mechanism Code D Padlocking Facility Code E Contact Configurations Normally Closed Normally Open Normally Closed Extended Over 2 Positions Normally Open Early Make/Late Break Change-Over Break Before Make Change-Over Make Before Break Example of Switch Type 10 This example is the switch type 10 Stop-Run-Stop. Contacts 1–2 only close in the Stop position. The switch has 3 positions – the normal position is center and can be switched left or right. Contacts 3–4 close only in the Start position. 564 www. (See codes for switch mechanism). Contacts 5–6 are normally closed and remain closed when switched to the Start position and open when switched to the Stop position.crouse-hinds.

GHG43 Series Control Stations Lockouts for Pushbuttons and Marking Guide for Pushbuttons 4C Nonmetallic or 316L Stainless Steel Corrosion Resistant Lockouts for DRTO Pushbuttons X Code D Shroud Cover For Pushbutton Y-Lockout with bolt and chain Z Code D Padlocking Fire Alarm Cover For Pushbutton Lockouts for DDTO Double Pushbuttons Z Code E Padlocking Cover For Double Pushbutton With Hole 4C X Code ED Padlocking Cover For Double Pushbutton Without Hole Lockouts for SGT Mushroom-Head Pushbuttons X Code F Padlocking Cover For Emergency Stop Pushbutton Z Code F Padlocking Cover For Emergency Stop Pushbutton With Bolt & Chain Not permitted in IEC hazardous locations.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 565 . Marking Guide For Pushbuttons Special Text Marking Required Acknowledge Alarm Automatic Close Down Standard Abbreviation AK AM AU CL DN Actual Marking on Disc ACK ALARM AUTO CLOSE DOWN Fast Forward Hand High In Jog FS FW HN HI IN JG FAST FWD HAND HIGH IN JOG Local Lower Maintain Manual Normal Off LC LO MT MN NR OF LOCAL LOWER MAINT MANUAL NORMAL OFF On Open Out Raise Remote Reset ON OP OT RA RM RS ON OPEN OUT RAISE REMOTE RESET Reverse Run Slow Test Trip Up RV RN SL TT TP UP REV RUN SLOW TEST TRIP UP www.crouse-hinds.

94 3.96 3.69 4.96 3.79 2.76 0.90 4.94 9.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business .15 2.79 8.72 4.87 3.27 2.87 4.60 7.33 2.84 3.06 2.76 0.36 3 Operator Control Station 8.36 4 Operator Control Station 10.96 3.79 4.4C GHG43 Series Control Stations Dimensions Nonmetallic or 316L Stainless Steel Corrosion Resistant 4C GHG43 Nonmetallic Control Stations End View of Back Box GHG43 Size 4 Nonmetallic GHG43 Size 2 Nonmetallic GHG43 Stainless Steel Control Stations Box Type Dimension (inches) A B C D E F G H J K L M 1 Operator Control Station 4.93 4.79 6.66 4.94 3.96 3.36 566 www.30 2.72 6.36 2.94 7.60 5.90 3.12 2.60 9.crouse-hinds.60 3.76 0.63 4.09 2.94 5.36 2 Operator Control Station 6.96 4.72 4.72 10.72 8.76 0.

... 1..... 4. maintained contact counter-clockwise operation... G Class II. Locks two or three-position switch handle in any position... C..... G Cl. spring return to center.... www.. II... Div....... spring return to center..crouse-hinds.. B......... Division 1...... or gases or vapors of equivalent hazard such as manufactured gas • In conjunction with magnetic starters or contactors for remote control of motors Cl.... Div.. 4.. G Class III • NEMA/EEMAC: 3... S635 Dimensions In Inches*: Standard Materials: OAC • Bodies – Feraloy® iron alloy • Covers and operating handle – copper-free aluminum • Operating shafts – stainless steel OAC (91 Series only) Standard Finishes: • Feraloy iron alloy – electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint • Copper-free aluminum – natural • Stainless steel – natural †Factory sealed for Class I.......... D... 9EFG... and selector switches .. Div. Specify Three-position selector switches with modified operation: Momentary contact clockwise operation. 1 and 2. C. D • Standard lockout on selector switches. S634 Momentary contact counter-clockwise operation. III NEMA 3..... F. For cover removal.....Air Break – heavy duty 600VAC maximum 4C OAC Units are used: • In areas which are hazardous due to the presence of flammable vapors... Groups F.. *Dimensions are approximate..... B...... 2. I.... wet or corrosive locations • Indoors or outdoors at petroleum refineries. 7ABCD. Division 2.. F... chemical and petrochemical plants and other process industry facilities where similar hazards exist • In areas which are hazardous due to the presence of acetylene and hydrogen... 1 & 2... G Cl... which surrounds the enclosed device • All enclosures are suitable for hazardous area use • Pushbutton stations have a guarded rocker type operating handle at the front arranged for padlocking to prevent unauthorized operation • Selector switches have a lever type operating handle at the top • Provided with vertical through feed conduit hubs of sizes indicated in the listings • Units are factory sealed for Cl... Division 1 & 2. 12 • UL Standard: 1203 • CSA Standard: C22.... Groups F. C..... Groups E...... 1 & 2.......... Groups B. C.. maintained contact clockwise operation.... Groups E. #: Description Suffix Back boss drilled and tapped for 3/4" and 1" sizes... D Class II...... not for construction purposes... 7ABCD. Groups A.....OAC Series Pushbutton Stations and Heavy Duty Selector Switches 600 VAC Standard Factory Sealed† Applications: Features: • Water-shedding construction with female threaded bottom opening and male threaded cover • Threaded cover is deep dome type.... add 21/2" to dimension... 9EFG.. II...... 30 Electrical Rating Ranges: • Pushbutton stations...... Groups B..com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 567 .. I. Groups A...2 No.. Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight 4C Certifications and Compliances: • NEC/CEC Class I... D Cl. gases or highly combustible dusts • In damp.. Div.... 12 Options: The following special options are available from factory by adding suffix to Cat.. Div....

B. G Cl. # Cat.4C OAC Series Pushbutton Stations and Heavy Duty Selector Switches 600 VAC Standard Factory Sealed† 4C Ordering Information . 12 With momentary left handle and maintained right handle. maintained "STOP" and similar applications. # 2 Circuit Universal Enclosure with Pushbuttons Hub Size Cat. For momentary "START". I. # ED22* OAC2291 ➀ OAC3291 ➀ Cat. Normal Pos. 1 & 2. 9EFG. 1. C. 568 www. 1 & 2. Div. Diagram 3 /4 1 Cat. 2. 7ABCD.crouse-hinds. Select from the list of standard markings below: OFF RESET LIGHT ON START RUN TRIP HAND STOP JOG TEST AUTOMATIC ON OPEN DOWN RAISE EMERGENCY CLOSE IN LOWER FORWARD UP OUT REVERSE †Factory sealed for Class I. Div. must be wired as two circuits. # ➀ If desired. # /4 1 OAC2101 ➀ OAC2133 ➀ OAC2139 ➀ OAC2103 ➀ OAC3101 ➀ OAC3133 ➀ OAC3139 ➀ OAC3103 ➀ Oper. Div. Groups B.Pushbutton Stations Normal Pos. Div. D *Two universal contact blocks. F. one normally open and one normally closed. G Cl. Groups A. Handles 3 2 Circuits* Cl. 4. markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number. II. II. 1 Circuit Universal 2 Circuits Universal 2 Circuits Universal Single Replacement ED21 Pushbuttons Diagram Double Single Operating Both Buttons Double ED22 ED22 Hub Size Cat. III NEMA 3. D Cl. C. Groups F.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business . Groups E.

III NEMA 3. 1. cam actuated by a maintained contact selector mechanism to operate in the sequences shown in the diagrams below. D Cl. www. OFF.OAC Series Pushbutton Stations and Heavy Duty Selector Switches 600 VAC Standard Factory Sealed† Cl. 2 OPEN. Div. OFF. FourCircuit ‡ ED21 3 /4 1 OAC2471 ➀ OAC3471 ➀ ED22 3 /4 1 OAC2472 ➀ OAC3472 ➀ ED21 3 /4 1 OAC2473 ➀ OAC3473 ➀ ED22 3 /4 1 OAC2474 ➀ OAC3474 ➀ ED22 3 /4 1 OAC2475 ➀ OAC3475 ➀ ➀ If desired.Selector Switches Style Position 1 Position 2 Position 3 TwoPosition. F. Groups A. 7ABCD. OFF OAC Selector Switches are furnished with pushbutton contact blocks. DOWN †Factory sealed for Class I. OFF. Div. CLOSE UP. I. FourCircuit ThreePosition. AUTOMATIC FORWARD. JOG HAND. OFF. G Cl. 12 Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight 4C Ordering Information . SLOW 1. Select from the list of standard markings below: Two-Position RUN. CLOSE UP. TwoCircuit ‡ Replacement Contact Blocks* Enclosure with Selector Switch Hub Size Cat. JOG HAND. REVERSE FAST. AUTOMATIC FORWARD. G Cl. REVERSE FAST. 1 & 2. See page 567 of explanation of options. OFF. For cover removal. 2. II. # . *Dimensions are approximate. markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number. OFF. Dimensions* In Inches: IN-OUT RAISE-LOWER START-STOP Three-Position RUN.crouse-hinds. C.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 569 4C ThreePosition. Groups B. Groups E. TwoCircuit TwoPosition. 1 & 2. C.DOWN ON. OFF. B. add 21/ 2" to dimension. D ‡ Suffixes S634 or S635 may be used on these catalog numbers. Div. II. SLOW OPEN. 4. Not for construction purposes. 9EFG. Groups F. Div.

# NC CH2 NC CH2L NC CH3L NC CH2 FS NC CH2 FD NC CH1 MC3 Features and Benefits: • Clear UV stabilized Lexan polycarbonate plastic allows the enduser to see enclosed controls and is strong enough to withstand the rough treatment found in the industrial workplace. Secured Access Hinged Cover • High moisture areas due to weather. # NC CH1 3L QA NC CH1 N2S 3L QA NC CH1 N2S 4L QA Double Gang Application EDS(C) control stations EDSCM32: 2 gang tandem EDSCM 33: 3 gang tandem FS(C) back box with cover assembly FD(C) back box with cover assembly Cat. • Lockout/tagout capabilities conform to OSHA requirements and provides increased personnel safety. these enclosures are available in hinged and open front styles. • Hinged cover provides superior sealing through heavy duty neoprene gaskets. or wash down procedures. • Areas of high moisture from weather or dripping liquid.).crouse-hinds. • Instances requiring equipment lockout/tagout. • Colored covers are available (e. Quick Access Open Front Cover • Areas requiring quick access to control device. etc. • Areas where dirt. • Quick and easy slip on installation requires no tools or interruption of service. and are ideal for corrosive and adverse areas where product endurance is essential. • Areas with possible damage from bumping or banging. # NC CH1 NC CH1 NC CH1 NC CH1 NC CH1 NC CH1 NC CH1 NC CH1 NC CH1 Single Gang (Long) Application EFD(C) (3 device) N2S(C) Krydon: 3 devices N2S(C) Krydon: 4 devices Cat.consult factory. • Downtime due to weather or accidental bumping is eliminated and plant shutdowns caused by inoperable or accidentally operated pushbutton devices are non-existent.4C Control Station Covers 4C Hinged and Open Front Open Front Cover Hinged Cover Applications: Hinged Covers Added environmental protection for Eaton's Crouse-Hinds control stations is now available from a patented "slip on" series of covers. # NC CH1 3L NC CH1 N2S 3L NC CH1 N2S 4L Double Gang Application EDS(C) control stations EDSCM32: 2 gang tandem EDSCM33: 3 gang tandem FS(C) back box with cover FD(C) back box with cover EDSC378 .3 gang tandem assembly Cat. mud. 570 www.g. red for emergency. steam. # NC CH2 QA NC CH2L QA NC CH3L QA NC CH2 FS QA NC CH2 FD QA QA EFS QA MC QA FS QA FD QA EGF QA N2S QA N2D QA Custom covers can be supplied but must be accompanied by either a sample of the device to be covered or a copy of a drawing with all actual measurements of the device to be covered. # NC CH1 NC CH1 NC CH1 NC CH1 NC CH1 NC CH1 NC CH1 NC CH1 Single Gang (Long) Application EFD(C): 3 device control stations N2S(C) Krydon: 3 device assembly N2S(C) Krydon: 4 device assembly Cat. • Prevention of accidental equipment operation. • Capability to engineer cover to fit any size device . etc. sand. dust. Covers can also be color-coded. Single Gang Application EDS(C) and EFD(C) control stations EFS(C) control stations MC(C) control stations FS(C) back box with cover assembly FD(C) back box with cover assembly EGF11 and EGF12 (Ground Fault) N2S(C) Krydon: 1 & 2 devices N2D(C) Krydon: 1 & 2 devices GHG432 control station Cat.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business . • Specific chemical-resistant covers available (may not be clear) consult factory for minimum order quantity. EFS MC FS FD EGF 11 N2S N2D GHG Open Front Covers Single Gang Application EDS(C) and EFD(C) control stations EFS(C) control stations MC(C) control stations FS(C) back box with cover assembly FD(C) back box with cover assembly EGF11 and EGF12 (Ground Fault) N2S(C) Krydon: 2 device assembly N2D(C) Krydon: 3 device assembly Cat. • Prevention of accidental equipment operation. Easy to install. interferes with equipment operation. Consult factory. yellow for fire alarm.

A 1 Closed . must be wired as two circuits. Green. # Cat. and EFD – previous design with aluminum guards Red. † Two universal contact blocks. EFS. Green. To order DL legend plates see page 516 for markings. EFS. EMPS029 and EMP029 – single operator FS. Current (Amperes) Make Break 600 VAC Heavy Duty (NEMA 120 60 6. Select from the list of standard markings below: OFF RESET LIGHT ON START RUN TRIP HAND STOP JOG TEST AUTOMATIC ON EMERGENCY OPEN FORWARD CLOSE REVERSE UP DOWN IN OUT RAISE LOWER Note: CF859-K1 and CF705-K1 come with 5 buttons. with one normally open and one normally closed.B 2 Circuits Universal Where Used Cat.5 600 12 1. # Cat. Black CF859 K1 ➀ EMPS019.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 571 . www. markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number. # MC pushbutton stations and selector switches OAC pushbutton stations and selector switches EWC pushbutton stations EMP selector switches DSD962 pushbutton cover ED11 ED21 ED38 - ED12† ED22† ED32† ED35 - ED12† ED22† ED32† - 3 Circuits Universal 4C 1 Circuit Universal ED13 FlexStation Series Pushbutton Contacts (for control stations built in 1997 or later) Contact Block without Mounting Strap 1 Circuit Universal 2 Circuits Universal 2 Circuits 1 Open . EMP019.B Cat.2 Direct Current (NEMA P150) 125 1.1 ESWP126 (3) External Operating Buttons Contact Ratings Volts 3 Circuits Universal Continuous Current (Amperes) Voltamperes Make Break A600) 7200 720 7200 720 7200 720 7200 720 10 10 10 10 138 5 138 Where Used CF859 CF705 Colors Available Cat. # Cat. Black CF705-K1 ➀ ➀ If desired. # EDS and EFS pushbutton stations and selector switches DSD962 pushbutton cover ESWP126 - ESWP126 (2) ESWP126 (2) - Max.A 1 Closed .0 240 30 3.crouse-hinds.4C Replacements for Pushbutton and Selector Switch Control Stations 600 VAC Heavy Duty ED Series Pushbutton Contacts (for control stations built in 1996 or earlier) Complete with Mounting Strap and Hardware 2 Circuits 1 Open .1 1. and EFD – current design with nylon guards Red.0 480 15 1. ‡ Use CF705-K1 for DEV11 and DEV12. # MC. # Where Used Cat.

crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business .4C 4C 572 www.

crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 see page 596 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 573 .Specialty Control Stations Hazardous and Non-hazardous 5C Description Page No. and Selector Switches EMP Series see page 584 Timers DSD-TS Series www. Pilot Lights. Controls for Bulk Solids Handling AFA / AFAX Conveyor Alignment Switches AFU / AFUX Conveyor Control Safety Switches see page 589 see page 588 Custom Control Panels EJB Series see pages 576–581 Ground Fault Control Stations EGF Series see page 595 Grounding Indication / Control EGL Series see page 587 5C Lighting Contactors XLC Series see pages 574–575 Mine Signal Switches AFU Series see page 590 Pendant Pushbutton Stations FLEXITITE™ Series FLEXITITE™ D2X Series see pages 593–594 see pages 591–592 Pushbuttons.

hinges. . . C. . quick release. . . 3. Division 1. . wet. or corrosive environments Features: Standard Materials: • Variable lighting control utilizing manual on/off or automatic settings • Photocell option provides maximum utilization of sunlight for energy conservation • Modular lighting contactor design provides flexibility to add future power poles • Lighting contacts are electrically held for superior performance • Power poles convert from NO to NC with a simple 180° turn Standard configuration includes: • EJB121208 enclosure with mounting plate. 574 www. S753 Lamacoid Nameplate . . . . see page 581 Photocells are shipped separate for field installation. . . . Groups E. and automated control in the most extreme harsh and hazardous locations while extending lighting lifetime. . 2. . 9EFG Certifications and Compliances: • • • • • • • • • Applications: 5C Cl. . • Areas requiring safe and efficient variable lighting control • Areas with hazardous gas. . III CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 1. . . II. . D Class I. Zones 1 & 2 Cl. . . . . . 7BCD. . . . . . . . . . . . . Groups F. . TB Timer** . . Groups B. . . . *Additional configurations are available upon request. greater utilization of daylight.crouse-hinds. PC2 Epoxy finish (external) . D Cl. . . . vapors. Zones 1 & 2 Class II. . . . . . . and breather/drain • Captive. F. . . . 9EFG UL Standard: 1203 cUL to CSA Standard C22. . Please contact Customer Service for details.com US: 1-866-764-5454 NEMA 3. . . . . . . . . . 4. . . . Div. S752 Epoxy finish (internal and external) . I. . G Class III NEMA 3.2 No. 2. . . 30 Ex d IIB + H2 Body and cover – copper-free aluminum Gasket – neoprene Cover bolts – stainless steel Hinges – stainless steel Example of lighting contactor within the XLC solution Electrical Ratings*: • Voltage: 120V • Amperage: 30A • Number of Poles: 1-12 standard Options: Description Suffix Terminal block** . . Groups F. 1. .one on top and one on bottom • Twelve 1" NPT power conduit entries six on top and six on bottom • DSL nameplates are standard for all operator positions and Lamacoid nameplates are available upon request • • • • Class I. . . G Cl. . . I. Div. . . 1 & 2. . . C. II. . . . . . F. R11 EMP Operator Positions: Ordering Information: Amps = 30A Poles 120V 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 XLC30A2 XLC30A3 XLC30A4 XLC30A5 XLC30A6 XLC30A7 XLC30A8 XLC30A9 XLC30A10 XLC30A11 XLC30A12 Additional EMP operators available. . . . . PC1 EV2IH208 277 photocell (208-277V)* . . TR EV2IH20 photocell (120V) . Division 2. . triple lead. . 7BCD. dusty. G Class II. Divisions 1 & 2. . . and dust • Indoor or outdoor locations in damp. Groups B. . . . Div. hex head stainless steel bolts with springloaded action • Tap-in mounting feet offer simple and secure installation and are easily replaceable • Special neoprene cover gasket provides a watertight seal to meet NEMA requirements • Internal neutral and ground bar • Electrically held modular lighting contactor • Two 3/4" NPT control conduit entries . . . . . . . . . Groups E. . G Cl. . . . . . . LID Heater .XLC Explosionproof Lighting Contactors 5C Explosionproof lighting contactors provide efficient use of power. . **Timer and/or terminal block may require larger enclosure.

Hand Auto Off (DSL39) 65 . www. I. II. green pilot light in position 4. D Cl. Div.On/Off Single Pushbutton . second nameplate in position 2.Start (DSL05) 06 .600V* Number of Poles 2 8 3 9 4 10 5 11 6 12 7 Select one operator symbol for each of the four positions. Catalog Numbering Example: Base Catalog Number XLC 30 A 6 Operators Nameplates Options SXAB 39X0708 S752 Series XLC 5C Amperage 30 60* 100* Voltage A . I. NOTE: If no nameplate is required.Green (EMP009-J3) C .Pilot Light . 6 pole. use the symbol X. Groups E. A .Start Stop (DSL65) X . **Timer and/or terminal block may require larger enclosure. Div. Groups F. etc. 2. The first operator is in position 1. 1 & 2.240V D . Stop (DSL17) 29 .HOA 3-Position Switch (EMP069) X . 1. HOA DSL in position 1. 7BCD.Black (EMP019) Q . G Cl. red pilot light in position 3. F. use the symbol X. ON DSL in position 3.crouse-hinds. II.120V B . etc.Stop (DSL06) 07 .No Operator Options TB Terminal Block** TR Timer** PC1 EV2IH20 Photocell (120V) PC2 EV2IH208 277 Photocell (208-277V)* S752 Epoxy Finish (External) S753 Epoxy Finish (Internal and External) R11 Heater Additional EMP operators available.Amber (EMP009-J6) G . 30A. 120V. The first nameplate is in position 1. HOA 3-position switch in position 1. *Additional configurations are available upon request. G Cl. C. 05 . Div. no DSL in position 2.On/Off 2-Position Switch (EMP049) S .480V* E .Hand Auto (DSL29) 39 . second operator in position 2.Pilot Light . see page 581 Photocells are shipped separate for field installation.On (DSL07) 08 . Zones 1 & 2 Cl.XLC Explosionproof Lighting Contactors Cl.208V* C . Please contact Customer Service for details. Groups B. 9EFG 5C Catalog Number Example: XLC30A6SXAB39X0708 XLC Lighting Contactor. OFF DSL in position 4. III NEMA 3.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 575 .Emerg.No Operator Select one device nameplate symbol for each of the four positions.Red (EMP009-J1) B . NOTE: If no operator is required.Pilot Light .Off (DSL08) 17 . no operator in position 2.

drilled and tapped conduit openings. Groups B*. these panels are designed to maximize the efficiency of each unique process Features: • The foundation of the Custom-Built Control Panel is our tried and tested copper-free aluminum EJB enclosure. five-step process will take you through the specification of cover openings. Division 2. and legend and nameplate selection. 1 & 2.5C EJB Custom-Built Control Panels Globally Certified—Individually Customized Cl. Groups E. II (E. After filling out your separate order form for each panel. III UL and cUL approved Ex d IIB + H2 T6 Certified to ATEX Directive† NEMA 3. 576 Certificate #: ITS08ATEX15797U Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business Certificate #: ITS07ATEX15639U . Div. 1. and are replaceable if broken or lost Neoprene cover gasket—between body and cover—provides NEMA 4. C. quick-release stainless steel triple-lead cover bolts make it easier to get in and out of the enclosure Optional GUB explosionproof glass window is available when you need to see inside Stainless steel hinges Internal and external ground terminations simplify grounding requirements Internal mounting plate standard EMP Series— the most complete line of devices in the industry • pilot lights • pushbuttons • selector switches • potentiometers NPT or metric entries available Copper-free aluminum construction available with Corro-free™ epoxy powder coat for additional protection in corrosive atmospheres Optional individual device markings to clearly indicate the function of each device Optional engraved nameplates May be added in the field Certifications and Compliances: ATEX Certifications EJB Custom Control Panels • EJB Enclosure with Conduit Entries & Device Holes • NEC/CEC: Class I. and markings. • Custom Control Panel is component certified only. F. † Certified to the ATEX Directive when ordered with ATEX suffix.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Certificate #: ITS07ATEX15652U • GUB0108 ATEX Window II 2 G Ex d IIB + H2 Certificate #: ITS07ATEX15638U • ECD Breather/Drain II 2 G Ex d IIB + H2 *Groups C and D only when ordered with GUB window. 9EFG • cUL to CSA Standard C22. Groups B*. the EJB Custom-Built Control Panel is an explosionproof enclosure built to customer specific requirements • Available in a variety of sizes with an unlimited combination of devices. Divisions 1 & 2. Please consult the factory for alternatives not detailed in these pages. please consult factory. IP66 watertight seal Captive. fax it to your local Eaton's Crouse-Hinds Distributor. 30—C22. device locations. For assembly certification. Div. • Manufactured for hazardous environments. G Cl.2 No. 9EFG IP66 Applications: The following pages will assist you in choosing the combination of features suited to your needs and requirements. II. D Cl. Zones 1 & 2 Class II. 7B*CD. 4. Groups F and G Class III • NEMA: 3. F. F and G Class II. 25 Cl. windows. I. 5C Tap-in mounting feet offer a simple and secure way to mount enclosure. such as other conduit arrangements. Div.2 No. This corrosion resistant. Groups E. heavy-duty enclosure features bolted construction. Zones 1 & 2 Cl. and flexible tap-in mounting feet. stainless steel hinges. Division 1. or circuit breaker operating handles. specifying devices. I. terminal blocks.crouse-hinds. G Cl. G) • Ex d IIB + H2 T6 • UL Standard 1203 • IP66 • Certified to the ATEX Directive when ordered with -ATEX suffix. II. II 2 G Ex d IIB + H2 • EMP Devices II 2 G Ex d IIB + H2 www. 2. 7B*CD. C and D Class I. The easy. Groups F.

It’s as simple as that! Easy Five Step Ordering Process: 1 2 3 4 5 Specify cover openings and devices. viewing area SIZE REQUIREMENTS EJB Size Max. Using Table 1. May be installed in all boxes.crouse-hinds.com W US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 577 . 5C Step 1 Specify the openings required for the cover of the enclosure. Specify device location. Specify conduit openings. and fax it to your local Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Distributor. and windows required. Determine device arrangement. you can determine the smallest size enclosure required based upon the total number of devices/openings and the number of devices a window requires.5C Ordering Information— Building a Custom Solution EJB Custom-Built Control Panels Globally Certified—Individually Customized Ordering and receiving Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds EJB Custom-Built Control Panels is now easier and faster than ever. Specify legend and nameplates. Total the number of device openings required based on the devices. EJB Enclosure Catalog Number 9 = 3 X 3 EJB100806 16 = 4 X 4 EJB121204 16 = 4 X 4 EJB121206 16 = 4 X 4 EJB121208 36 = 6 X 6 EJB161606 36 = 6 X 6 EJB161608 24 = 6 X 4 EJB181206 24 = 6 X 4 EJB181208 36 = 9 X 4 EJB241208 36 = 9 X 4 EJB241210 54 54 = = 9 9 X X 6 6 EJB241808 EJB241810 81 = 9 X 9 EJB242408 81 = 9 X 9 EJB242410 52 = 13 X 4 GUB0108—Symbol W 4-3/4" dia. No.) TABLE 1 DEVICE AND WINDOW INFORMATION Total # of Device Openings Available Device Layout Requires same area as 12 devices. Windows EJB361208 121204 to 181208 1 241208 to 362408 2 78 78 = = 13 13 X X 6 6 EJB361808 EJB361810 117 = 13 X 9 EJB362408 www. fill out a separate order form for each panel. openings without devices. (NOTE: The actual size of your custom panel enclosure may change based on the number and size of your entry requirements. Follow the steps below. Indicate in Section 1 of the order form the combination of devices. openings and windows specified in Section 1.

5C EJB Custom-Built Control Panels Ordering Information— Building a Custom Solution 5C Globally Certified—Individually Customized 578 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business .

EJB Custom-Built Control Panels

Ordering Information—
Building a Custom Solution

5C

Globally Certified—Individually Customized

5C

www.crouse-hinds.com

US: 1-866-764-5454

CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business

579

5C

EJB Custom-Built Control Panels

Ordering Information—
Building a Custom Solution

Globally Certified—Individually Customized

5C

Eaton’s

580

www.crouse-hinds.com

US: 1-866-764-5454

CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business

EJB Custom-Built Control Panels

5C

Order Form

Globally Certified—Individually Customized
Eaton’s

5C

Quantity

www.crouse-hinds.com

US: 1-866-764-5454

CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business

581

com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business .crouse-hinds.5C EJB Custom-Built Control Panels Order Form 5C Globally Certified—Individually Customized 582 www.

beginning in the upper left corner of the grid. Phone Number: EATON’S CROUSE-HINDS FACTORY USE ONLY Catalog Number Entered: Reference #: B# OPTIONS All Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Custom-Built Control Panels are provided with a mounting plate and hinges.Order Form EJB Custom-Built Control Panels 5C Globally Certified—Individually Customized Section 2 Distributor: Contact: Customer: Completed Catalog Number: Specify the complete catalog number including conduit designations.com US: 1-866-764-5454 Engraved Plate Line 2 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Marking Size Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 583 . circle choice here: TOP RIGHT BOTTOM For any of the following options.crouse-hinds. check here: ____ ATEX Certified (ATEX) ____ Breather and Drain (S756V) ____ Epoxy finish. 2 3 4 5 Top (column) 6 7 8 9 10 11 5C EJB__________________________________ 12 13 A B C size D Section 4 Device Markings: Indicate by row and column position markings/legends for each device. internal and external (S753) Section 3—Exterior Front View size 1 Location of Devices and Windows in Cover: Outline the cover space available. See Table 1 for device layout. based upon the EJB selected.62" center to center. If you desire hinges on one of the other sides. Specify Row Column Device Marking (DSL) or Engraved Plate Line 1 www. external (S752) ____ Epoxy finish. F Right Side Left Side (Hinge Side) (row) E G H I Engraved Plate: Specify markings for each nameplate based upon the following: Maximum Number of Characters/Line J K L Marking Size 1/8" 3/16" 1/4" 1/2" Number of Characters 36 24 18 9 M Bottom Note: All device openings are spaced 2. Hinges are on left side of enclosure.

Momentary contact clockwise. G Cl. 9EFG Diagram Position 1 Position 2 Position 2 Position 3 Pilot light‡ Short Assembly Cat. Division 1 & 2. 9EFG UL Standard 1203 CSA Standard C22. T5 Short Cat. Short assemblies are for custom-built control panels only.2 No 30 CENELEC ATEX Certificate ITS07 ATEX 15652U Cl. double operator Diagram Short Assembly Cat. # EMPS069 ➁ EMP069 ➁ EMPS079 ➁ EMP079 ➁ EMPS089 ➁ EMP089 ➁ ➀Add color symbol for each pilot light from table below. Diagram 5C Certifications and Compliances: • • • • • • • • Class I. II. For pushbuttons and selector switches. see pages 576–583 describing custombuilt control panels. ✠ The following suffixes may be used with these catalog numbers: S634 . spring return to center. G Class III NEMA/EEMAC: 3. Groups E. Groups E. Div. Consult factory. # Standard Cat. 1 & 2.Momentary contact counter-clockwise. optional markings may be specified in the tables below. 2. # EMPS019 ➁ EMP019 ➁ EMPS029 ➁ EMP029 ➁ Double pushbutton. Div. For pilot lights and illuminated pushbuttons. * Other voltages available. D Cl. 584 www. Groups B. certain barrel assemblies are the same as those used in complete EMP units and may be utilized as replacements. Groups F.EMP and EMPS Barrel Assemblies 5C As indicated in the listings. S635 .crouse-hinds. Division 2. Add suffix LED to end of catalog number after last color symbol. III II 2 G Ex d IIB + H2. Diagram Position 1 Group 1: Three-position selector switch Standard assemblies are for replacement in complete EMP units or for custom-built control panels. 1. C. F. markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number. I.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business . # EMPS039 ➁ EMP039 ➁ Two-position selector switch Ordering Information: Short Assembly Cat. specify color of jewel using symbols from the table below. # Standard Assembly ✠ Cat. # Standard Assembly Cat. For 24 VDC operation. Select from the list of standard markings below: Push Button Station Marking START STOP ON OFF RESET RUN TRIP JOG TEST LIGHT ON HAND AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY FORWARD REVERSE OPEN CLOSE UP DOWN IN OUT RAISE LOWER ‡ LED pilot lights can be furnished in place of standard incandescent pilot lamps. No. F. 7BCD. add suffix S300. # Standard Assembly Cat. # EMPS049 ➁ EMP049 ➁ EMPS059 ➁ EMP059 ➁ Select the Cat. Single pushbutton Double pushbutton. D Class II. from the listings. For additional information. # Diagram (120V)* EMP009 ➀ ➁If desired. Groups B. 7BCD. C. single operator The remainder are primarily for use with hazardous area boxes to assemble special control stations. Color Symbol Color Symbol Red J1 Clear J10 Green J3 Blue J11 Amber J6 Standard Assembly Cat. Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations NEMA 3. spring return to center. G Cl. II. Div. Both assemblies may be used with System 4 Control Stations.

G Cl. # ✠ ‡ LED pilot lights can be furnished in place of standard incandescent pilot lamps. # EMP098 ➁ Diagram 120V pilot light EMP0090 ➀ 120V pilot light EMP0098 ➀ ➀Add color Color Red Green Amber Clear Blue J10 J11 Push Button Station Marking START STOP ON Diagram Position 2 J1 J3 J6 ➁If desired. # Standard Assembly Cat. I. spring return to center. II. Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations NEMA 3. Div. www.EMP and EMPS Barrel Assemblies Cl. D Cl. # Both positions Left only Right only EMPS0491 ➁ EMPS0492 ➁ EMPS0493 ➁ EMP0491 ➁ EMP0492 ➁ EMP0493 ➁ Both positions Left only Right only EMPS0591 ➁ EMPS0592 ➁ EMPS0593 ➁ EMP0591 ➁ EMP0592 ➁ EMP0593 ➁ EMERGENCY FORWARD REVERSE OPEN CLOSE UP DOWN IN OUT RAISE LOWER Three-position selector switch. Symbol Color Symbol 5C Long Assembly Cat. S635 . T5 Group 2: For custom-built control panels. II. Div. # All Center only Left only Right only EMPS0691 EMPS0692 EMPS0693 EMPS0694 ➁ ➁ ➁ ➁ EMP0691 EMP0692 EMP0693 EMP0694 ➁ ➁ ➁ ➁ All Center only Left only Right only EMPS0791 EMPS0792 EMPS0793 EMPS0794 ➁ ➁ ➁ ➁ EMP0791 EMP0792 EMP0793 EMP0794 ➁ ➁ ➁ ➁ All Center only Left only Right only EMPS0891 EMPS0892 EMPS0893 EMPS0894 ➁ ➁ ➁ ➁ EMP0891 EMP0892 EMP0893 EMP0894 ➁ ➁ ➁ ➁ Standard Assembly Cat. Groups B. # OFF RESET RUN TRIP JOG TEST LIGHT ON HAND AUTOMATIC Key Removal Short Assembly Cat. 1. III II 2 G Ex d IIB + H2. 9EFG 5C Maintained Contact Pushbutton Illuminated pushbutton‡ Up Diagram Down Long Assembly Cat. 1 & 2. Select from the list of standard markings below: Two-position selector switch.crouse-hinds.Momentary contact clockwise. key operated Diagram Position 1 Position 2 Position 3 Key Removal Short Assembly Cat.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 585 . markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number. Groups F. key operated Position 1 symbol for each pilot light from table below. spring return to center. C. 7BCD. F.Momentary contact counter-clockwise. Add suffix LED to end of catalog number after last color symbol. ✠ The following suffixes may be used with these catalog numbers: S634 . 2. G Cl. Div. Groups E.

1.5C EMP and EMPS Barrel Assemblies Cl. F. Groups B. Groups F. 2. 069.crouse-hinds. Div. 0591. 0791. 586 www. G Cl. C. not for construction purposes. 0691. III II 2 G Ex d IIB + H2. II. 9EFG Dimensions* In Inches: 5C EMP-EMPS029 EMP009 EMP-EMPS019 EMP-EMPS039 EMP098 EMP0090 EMP-EMPS0491. I.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business . 089 All barrel assemblies are 3/4"-14 NPSM thread size. D Cl. T5 Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations NEMA 3. 7BCD. II. Div. Div. 1 & 2. Groups E. 0891 Series EMP0098 *Dimensions are approximate. G Cl. 079. EMP-EMPS049. 059.

Div. F.00 (7. hose-tight. chemicals. C. and hose-down applications • NEMA 4X compact.54) CONDUIT ENTRY WITH 3/4" (1.80 (32. D • Class II. petroleum. Divisions 1 & 2. Groups F.75 (4.30 (21.13 (28. corrosion resistance. Options: Description Internal space heaters to limit condensation build-up Transformer suitable for both 220/240VAC or 440/480VAC applications 50 foot cord Suffix R11 S883 50FC Options: Replacement Parts: Ground clamp Ground clamp assembly (includes 25 ft.95) DIAMETER BOLT 12. Groups B.51) 11. safety fluorescent yellow cord is easily identifiable to ensure safety and reduce tripping hazard • Neoprene cover gasket provides a watertight seal to meet UL Type 4 (NEMA 4) requirements • Stainless steel hinges are corrosion resistant while providing safe and easy access to interior of enclosure • Waterguard™ desiccant packet absorbs and removes water/moisture and protects the enclosed equipment when not energized • Adjustable mounting feet provide ease of mounting during installation Ordering Information: Description Indicator with two pilot lights* Catalog Number EGL210 J1 J3 *Includes one red and one green pilot light.70) CL 1" (2. and increased product lifetime • Interior and exterior epoxy powdered paint finish provides superior corrosion resistance inside and out • LED pilot lights provide long-lasting visual identification of status of ground connection • ECD Type 4X drain protects interior equipment from environmental moisture and condensation. 2. 9FG. 4X. railcars. Division 2. The EGL is mounted adjacent to loading/unloading areas and connected to transportation tank vehicles. 9FG. 12 Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight / Wet Locations 5C Applications: EGL Static Grounding Indicator is the ideal product for safe loading/unloading of ethanol. 1. static grounding before.27) Electrical Rating Ranges: • • • • 120-volt AC supply Control relay interlocking contact: 15A at 277VAC.91) REDUCER 8. C. G Cl. II.45) www. G • UL/cUL Listed • Class II. 4X. Div. 1 & 2. II. cord. and corrosion-resistant enclosure offers years of service in harsh industrial environments • 25 ft. Groups E. Div. III UL/cUL Listed NEMA 3.36) (16. Groups F.00 (12. 440/480VAC) Space heater Pilot light plug kit EGL-K1 EGL:20109-B EGL210-R1 EMP009-J1-LED EMP009-J3-LED EJB-KIT5 EGL S883 KIT EGL R11 KIT EGL PLUG KIT Weight & Dimensions: EGL Assembly: Weight = 32 lbs (14. Zone 1 & 2 IIB + H2 Cl.12) 3/8" (0. 7BCD.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 587 .00) 3. G • IP 65 • Class III • NEMA 3.crouse-hinds. rain water. 12 5C • Static ground verification system provides ground path for static build-up to ensure safe product transfer • Integrated control relay allows for safe control of electrically operated pumps or valves. drums or other portable containers to prevent explosions due to static discharge during product transfer by providing: • A ground path for static build-up • Automatic pump shutdown when static grounding circuit is broken • Visual indication of safe. I. Zone 1&2 IIB + H2 B. F.07 (28. during and after loading and unloading operations Features and Benefits: Certifications & Compliances: • Class I.5 kg) Dimensions = inches (centimeters) Standard Materials: • Enclosure: Copper-free aluminum with interior and exterior epoxy powder coat • Clamp: Stainless steel • Clamp Grips: Polyvinylchloride dipped • Gasket: Neoprene 11. biofuel. 7BCD. connector and clamp) EGL210 universal interior replacement kit Pilot lights (Red) Pilot lights (Green) Mounting feet Transformer (220/240VAC. I.EGL Static Grounding Indicator With Automated Pump Control and Static Ground Verification System Cl. G Cl.41 6. 10A at 600VAC Dual-tapped 240 and 480 VAC Step Down Transformer available Provides 2k ohms or less switching impedance 5. Division 1. Groups E. and for energizing remote indicators • Stainless steel clamp for grounding connection provides industrial durability. plastics and other combustible materials.62) 1. D Cl. Groups • Class I.

F. Div.crouse-hinds. Div. bulk handling systems and similar equipment • In steel mills. Groups E. 4. II.AFU and AFUX Conveyor Belt Control Switch 5C 5C Applications: AFU and AFUX conveyor control switches are used: • As emergency or normal "STOP" switch for conveyor lines. • Enclosure has three 1" conduit hubs – two for horizontal through feed and one at the bottom. A pull on the line of the required operating force and with a total movement of 1/2" actuates the plunger. opens the switch and trips the red painted indicating arm forward. Division 2.) Total Operating Force Required (lbs. Standard Materials: • • • • Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations AFU0333-50 Single end left Enclosure – Feraloy® iron alloy Plunger – stainless steel Loop – bronze Indicating arm – steel Features: • Furnished with one or two end units. supports at properly spaced intervals may be necessary to ensure that the line or cable weight alone will not actuate switch. 1. mining and ore and coal handling operations. Cast mounting lugs on 11/ 2" centers permit attachment to the web of a standard 3" angle iron. II. F. AFUX series complies with requirements for use in NEC Class I areas which are hazardous due to the presence of flammable vapors or gases. supported every 10' is recommended. 9EFG • IP66 • UL Standard: 698 • CSA Standard: 22. • Precision switches provide maintained contact (switches have a snap action mechanism). Div. 2. 5 • NEMA: 3. • Depending on the size and length of line. cranes. G Class II. Groups C. 1 & 2. # Cat. each containing 2-NO and 2-NC contact arrangements. G Class III • NEMA: 3. 2-NC in Each End Unit Cat. 9EFG • IP65 • UL Standard: 698 • cUL Options: Description Finish: Corro-free™ epoxy powder coat – for coating outside only. Division 2. automotive and other assembly lines. # Single end left Single end left Single end right Single end right Double end Double end 15 25 15 25 15 25 25 50 25 50 25 50 AFU0333 AFU0333 AFU0333 AFU0333 AFU0333 AFU0333 †A galvanized steel aircraft cable. AFU series are also gasketed for use in hosedown areas even when combustible dusts are present. Returning the indicating arm to its normal position resets the mechanism. Dimensions In Inches*: *Dimensions are approximate. not for construction purposes. 7CD. warehouses. 3.) Contact Arrangements With 2-NO. D Class II. AFU0333-66 Double end Ordering Information Description Maximum Weight of Unsupported Line or Cable Without Actuating Switch† (lbs. G Class III • Encl. the actuating line or cable is connected from a fixed point to the loop on the end unit. which locks the plunger in the actuated (switch open) position. D Cl. Groups F. or for use in NEC hazardous areas classified simultaneously as Class I and Class II.2 No. Division 1. F. Groups C. 7CD. Cl. Division 1. 4. AFUX series also complies with NEC requirements for use in Class II hazardous areas. III NEMA 3. Groups F. Groups E. 588 www. 9EFG Certifications and Compliances: Standard Finishes: • Feraloy iron alloy – electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint • Steel – electrogalvanized with chromate finish (red acrylic paint on indicating arm) • Bronze – natural AFU Series • NEC/CEC: Class II. Division 1 & 2. 30 AFUX Series • NEC: Class I. unloaders. loading docks and various process industry facilities • In the control circuit of magnetic motor starters to shut down motor-driven conveyors or other machinery when switch is actuated AFU series complies with requirements for use in Class II areas having combustible dusts that may or may not be electrically conductive. 600 VAC max. I. • In installation. G Cl. Groups E. Groups F. A typical installation would include single end switch units at each end of the conveyor with double end switch units between. G Class II. AFUX series also complies with requirements for use in NEC Class I areas which are hazardous due to the presence of flammable vapors or gases. G Cl.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 50 60 05 06 55 66 AFUX0333 AFUX0333 AFUX0333 AFUX0333 AFUX0333 AFUX0333 50 60 05 06 55 66 . Suffix S752 Electrical Rating: • Control circuit switch – 15 AMP.

Groups F. • Housing consists of a center section which can be mounted either vertically or horizontally. F. 4. G Cl. grain loading and handling facilities. G Cl. Division 1. G Class II. Groups E. # 2 normally open AFA20 Standard Finishes: 2 normally closed AFAX20 • Feraloy – electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint • Stainless steel – natural Options: Typical AFA Switch Application Description Suffix Finish: Corro-free™ epoxy powder coat – for coating outside only. D Cl. Cast mounting lugs on 11/2" center permit attachment to the web of a standard 3" angle iron. G Class III • NEMA: 3. Groups C. Groups E. • In steel mills.2 No. 9EFG Electrical Rating: • Control circuit switches – 15 AMP. Groups F. AFA series are also gasketed for use in hosedown areas even when combustible dusts are present. 9EFG • IP66 • UL Standard: 698 • CSA C22. F. automotive and other assembly lines. II. AFAX series also complies with NEC requirements for use in Class II hazardous areas. Div. • In the control circuit of magnetic motor starters to shut down motor-driven conveyors in case of abnormal belt misalignment or run-off. • Spring loaded operating arm will automatically return switch to normal position when belt interference is removed. 1 & 2. S752 Dimensions In Inches*: *Dimensions are approximate. Cl. Approximately 3/4" lateral movement of operating arm actuates switch. AFAX conveyor belt alignment switches are used: • As emergency or normal "STOP" switch for conveyor belts whenever they become misaligned or run off their tracks due to excessive speed. or for use in NEC hazardous areas classified simultaneously as Class I and Class II. leveling. G Class III • NEMA: 3. uneven load. 5C Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Certifications and Compliances: AFA SERIES • NEC/CEC: Class II. warehouses. I. 2. Division 2. 1. • Enclosure has three 1" conduit hubs. 9EFG • IP65 • UL Standard: 1203 • CSA Standard: C22. 25 AFAX SERIES • NEC: Class I. mining and ore and coal handling operations. • Operating arm has 31/2" long stainless steel protective roller. and a switch housing with an attached switch operating arm. 30 5C AFA. Division 2. II. • A severe conveyor belt run-off can rotate the operating arm counter-clockwise up to 85 degrees without damage to the switch mechanism. Groups E. III NEMA 3. Division 1. G Class II. 4.crouse-hinds. A typical installation would include a pair of AFA or AFAX units at each end of the conveyor belt where belt returns. • Installation of AFA or AFAX unit on either side of a conveyor belt allows approximately 1" or a predetermined allowable belt misalignment before switch is actuated. Groups F. and various other bulk handling operations. not for construction purposes. F. Groups C.AFA and AFAX Conveyor Belt Alignment Switch Applications: Features: • Furnished with precision switches that provide normally open and normally closed contacts (switches have a snap action mechanism). 600 VAC max.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 589 . Div. AFA series complies with requirements for use in Class II areas having combustible dusts that may or may not be electrically conductive.2 No. AFAX series complies with requirements for use in NEC Class I areas which are hazardous due to the presence of flammable vapors or gases. 7CD. Ordering Information Contact Arrangement Diagram Standard Materials: • Enclosure – Feraloy® iron alloy • Bearing and operating arm – stainless steel with plastic end caps Cat. breakage and/or other problems. Div. 7CD. Division 1 & 2. loading docks. www. D Class II.

# 25 15 AFU254 AFU154 50 25 Dimensions Standard Materials: • Enclosure – Feraloy® iron alloy • Plunger – steel • Loop – bronze In Inches*: Standard Finishes: • Feraloy – electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint • Steel – electrogalvanized • Bronze – natural *Dimensions are approximate.) With Pushbutton Heavy Duty 600 VAC Max. not for construction purposes. of Line or Total Operating Cable Without Actuating Force Required Switch (lbs.crouse-hinds. Cat.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business . 590 www.5C NEMA 3 Raintight Wet Locations AFU Mine Signal Switches 600 VAC Applications: AFU mine signal switches are used: • For signalling circuits or remote control of magnetic motor starters • In non-hazardous areas of mines or process industry facilities where a rugged enclosure is needed for protection from falling ore and other material or dripping water • Mounted on walls or in shaft ways and actuated by pulling line or cable attached to the loop at the bottom 5C Features: • Sturdy raintight enclosure with heavy mounting lugs • Wires enter enclosure through clearance holes in the underside • Switches are actuated by a springloaded plunger which returns to the normal position when the operating force is removed • Units are furnished with heavy duty motor control push buttons. Several of these may be interconnected electrically for remote control of a magnetic motor starter from more than one location Certifications and Compliances: • NEMA: 3 AFU mine signal switch with pushbutton switch (cover removed) Ordering Information Maximum Wt.) (lbs.

30 5C Standard Materials: • Body and cover – steel reinforced neoprene • Strain relief and reinforcement plates – stainless steel • Exterior hardware – stainless steel Standard Finishes: 5C • Neoprene – safety yellow • Stainless steel – natural Features: • Safety cushioned – neoprene encapsulation protects internal switches and connectors from impact damage and provides extra protection for personnel.crouse-hinds. www.2 No. • Jam-resistant operator buttons are raised flexible diaphragms – an integral part of the molded one-piece cover. 2). 2). Division 2. 2 Areas NEMA 3. wet. Div. 12 Watertight Raintight Dust-tight Wet Locations Applications: Certifications and Compliances: FLEXITITE attachable pendant pushbutton stations are used: • For safe multi-function motor circuit control of: Hoists Cranes Machine Tools Electromagnets • In hazardous areas such as Class I. 6. 4X. Groups B. Division 2. C and D (classified) areas or Class II. Groups B. 2). Division 2. • Stress relief for your cable is built-in. 7BCD (Div. • Indicator plates meet OSHA requirements for clear identification of functions. A full set of plates is included with each station.com 8-Button Control Station US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 591 . • Uses Eaton's Crouse-Hinds ESWP factory sealed contacts suitable for use in Class I. 5. • Safety yellow finish. as defined by the National Electrical Code • Where wash downs are necessary – in damp. 7BCD (Div. 12 • UL Standard: 1203 • CSA Standard: C22. • Compact design. and D. C. 6.FLEXITITE™ D2X Series Attachable Pendant Pushbutton Stations For Class I. 2). dirty or corrosive locations • For control applications requiring 2 to 8 functions • NEMA: 3. 9FG (Div. A separate cable grip is not needed. 5. 9FG (Div. Groups F and G. 4X. • Switches are rated for 10 amps 600 VAC (NEMA A600).

2 Areas NEMA 3. # Replacement Switch ESWP126 4.59 – . 5. # Description Down/West Start/North Stop/South Off/In On/Out Fwd/Right 315116 7 315116 8 Rev/Left Up/East Description Cat. # Description Cat. 12 Watertight Raintight Dust-tight Wet Locations Ordering Information Pendant Pushbutton Stations Description Cable Dia.31 – .92 D2X8635 810 Replacement Indicator Plates (A full set is included with each control station) Replacement Switch 5C 2-Button Cat. 2).75 D2X8635 210 D2X8635410 6-Button . 6. 9FG (Div. # 2-Button 4-Button .5C FLEXITITE™ D2X Series Attachable Pendant Pushbutton Stations For Class I. Cat.50 – . 2).75 . 6 and 8-Button Cat.crouse-hinds.59 – .81 D2X8635 610 8-Button .com 4-Button US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 6-Button Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 8-Button . 4X. Div. # 315116 315116 315116 315116 315116 315116 1 2 3 4 5 6 Description Cat. 7BCD (Div. # 314850 1 Bridge 314850 6 314850 2 Trolley 314850 9 314850 3 Hoist In/Out Up/Down Right/Left East/West 314850 4 314850 5 Description Fwd/Rev North/South On/Off Start/Stop Dimensions In Inches: 2-Button 592 www.

5. STRAIN RELIEF – Integral part of the inner steel core – provides tie-off point for strain chain to relieve tension from electrical cable. 6. EASILY INSTALLED – Despite their many advantages. • Positive action long life momentary contact switches. LOW COST.C. • Indicator plates meet OSHA requirements for clear identification of functions. switch contacts for added safety.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 593 . • Where washdowns are necessary – in damp. ELECTRICAL INTERLOCK – Schematic furnished to wire switches against opposed operations.and 6-button models. wet. SEPARATOR – For 4. Tough polypropylene sheet retains switches and forms an insulated wiring channel.FLEXITITE™ Attachable Pendant Pushbutton Stations NEMA 3. and N. • Jam resistant operator buttons are raised flexible diaphragms – an integral part of the molded one-piece cover. 4X. RAISED BUMPER – protects lens against damage caused by impact. • Compact – 3" x 3" enclosure easily fits your hand. 5. GREEN GROUNDING SCREW – Makes positive contact between inner steel core and ground wire. 12 Applications: A cable grip is used with pilot light option. 6. Position switches and separate N. INSULATION BARRIERS – On 4. Eaton's Crouse-Hinds pendant stations generally cost less than similar metal units. 7. BODY SEAL – Compresses against mating half to form a positive seal.) 4. TOGGLE SWITCH (OPTIONAL) – Maintained off-on switch to control power to pendant stations.crouse-hinds. Raintight Watertight Dust-tight Wet Locations 5C Inside Front View 5C Features: • Safety insulated to meet OSHA requirements for enclosing live parts. REDUCING GROMMETS – Permit use of five different cable sizes while sealing cable entrance. FLEXITITE attachable pendant pushbutton stations are used: • For safe. Transfers strain to inner steel core of switch. 6.O. and 8 button units. or corrosive locations. • Maintained Off-On toggle switch is optionally available on 4. 5. A separate cable grip is not needed unless the optional pilot light kit is used. dirty. • Safety cushioned – neoprene encapsulation protects internal switches and connectors from impact damage and provides extra protection for personnel. (Not used with pilot light. 3. • Stress relief for your cable is built-in. The entire unit except the strain relief is insulated with neoprene. CABLE CLAMP – Secures conductors inside switch. 6. A full set of plates is provided with each station. multi-function motor circuit control of: Hoists Cranes Machine Tools Electromagnets • Non-hazardous control environments requiring from 2 to 8 functions. and is included with kit. Certifications and Compliances: • NEMA: 3. 12 • UL Standard: 508 • CSA Approved Standard Materials: • Body and cover – steel reinforced neoprene • Strain relief and reinforcement plates – stainless steel • Exterior hardware – stainless steel Standard Finishes: • Neoprene – safety yellow • Steel – stainless steel www. 1.and 6-button models. 2. 4X.

# Description Cat. 4X. 6. 5.4. # Style Front Cover 2-Button A335578 Switch Element Part Numbers Toggle Switch Kit† Back Cover 1 Speed 20A. 3316480 2 speed DC Toggle 10A. Voltage 240 AC 120 AC 24 AC 250 VDC 125 VDC Amps Make 7.698 thru . 6 and 8-Button Cat. 125V Cable Diameter Shipping Weight (lbs. 6 and 8 Buttons Style 1 Speed 2 Speed DC 20A 460V 10A 230V 10A 125V Switch* 2 hp. 230V A335577 1 Not Avail. cable support grip.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Pilot Light Kit Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 335616 (1 Req'd) 335571 (1 Req'd) RX8635 41 See Above RX8635 61 Chart .730 3 131/2" 3" 35/8" 3316317 X8635 61B X8635 62B X8635 60B .75 thru . 12 Raintight Watertight Dust-tight Wet Locations Ordering Information .665 21/2 83/4" 21/4" 3" 3316317 X8635 41B X8635 42B X8635 40B .27 . ‡Parts kit – includes cable grommets.0 15. 594 www.One and Two Speed 2. # X8995 1 Yellow Momentary Switch Pilot light kit includes: lamp assembly with lens and bulb.055 Amps Break 0. and "S" hook. 4.FLEXITITE™ Attachable Pendant Pushbutton Stations 5C NEMA 3.97 110–125V AC 3316533 3316533 1 3316533 2 3316624 210–250V AC 3316534 3316534 1 3316534 2 3316625 Contact Style Cat. # Description Cat. NEMA 3.5 2. 230V /8 hp. 2-speed switches and 2.69 thru .74 .12 only.) Dimensions Length Width Depth None X8635 20 .62 . Replacement Parts Cat.50 thru . NOTE: Refer to price list for identification of stock items. 8 button (P/N 1316311-3). single speed switches.63 thru . (North/South) 315116 2 Start/North 315116 8 Up/East 314850 2 Trolley 314850 9 On/Off (Start/Stop) 315116 3 Stop/South 315116 9 Raise/Lower 314850 3 Hoist 314850 12 Raise/Lower 314850 13 315116 4 Off/In 315116 10 Up/Down 314850 4 In/Out (Up/Down) 315116 5 On/Out 315116 11 Right/Left 314850 5 Right/Left (East/West) 314850 14 315116 6 Fwd/Right Inbd/Outbd Off/On Shoulder Bolts for Fastening Front to Back Cover – 2-Button (P/N 1316311-2). 460V 2hp. 230V 1/8 hp. 6 and 8-Button Only Cable Diameter 4 and 6 Button FLEXITITE™ 2-Button Attachable Pendant Switch 8 Button Lamp Voltage .968 9 211/2" 3" 37/16" 2-Button X8635 21 X8635 22 4-Button 5C 6-Button 8-Button X8635 82§ *Should be ordered separately.87 . guard. 125V Off/On 1 /2 hp.505 thru . assembly and screws.590 thru .840 61/ 2 17" 3" 35/8" 3316317 X8635 81 X8635 80 .75 1. 230V 1/2 hp. # Description Cat.5 15. 125V Element Barrier 1 314896 Parts Separator Kit‡ 314903 RX8635 21 4-Button 3335848 1 3335829 1 3316317 3316480 314896 314903 314849 1 1316313 (4 Req'd) 6-Button 3335845 1 3335830 1 3316317 3316480 314896 314903 314849 1 1316313 (6 Req'd) 8-Button 3344153 3316480 314896 314903 1316313 Not Req'd Not Req'd RX8635 80 3344154 3316317 †Toggle switch kit – includes: toggle switch.5 0.555 thru .crouse-hinds. legend plates and assembly screws.27 0. Support grip and "S" hook not required on 8-button. 230V 10A.& 6-Button (P/N 1316311-1). Pilot Light Kit for 4.5. 4.0 0. # Description 315116 1 Down/West 315116 7 Rev/Left 314850 1 Bridge 314850 6 Fwd/Rev.55 Indicator Plates (Replacement only – units come with plates standard) 2-Button 4. §2 speed includes: 6.

Groups F. # 5 5 5 30 30 30 EGF11 ➀ EGF12 ➀ EGF21 ➀ EGF11EPD ➀ EGF12EPD ➀ EGF21EPD ➀ Dimensions In Inches: Standard Materials: • Bodies. • EPD breakers for protection of heat tracing circuits. threaded barrels. D Class II. guards. G Class III • NEMA 3. Groups E. • Compact. • Push-to-test button and pilot light (with 10. G Class II. 1. 2. Groups E. 20. 9EFG. Div. 120 / 240 VAC for two pole (10. 12 5C • Copper-free aluminum construction offers lightweight. 2.EGF Series Ground Fault Control Station Cl. secure. corrosion resistance and a long. 7CD. Div. Features: Certifications and Compliances: • NEC: Class I. and corrosionresistant mounting. • Cast aluminum circuit breaker operating handle for durability during use. 7CD. Ordering Information Number of Breakers Number of Poles 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 ➀Add 15. II. EPD breakers – 120 VAC (single pole). 9EFG. Div. 1. F. 1 & 2. 12 Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations 5C Applications: EGF Series of control stations are used: • For the additional safety of personnel.000 AIC) www. 25. Div. 1 & 2. F. and for equipment protection in remote areas. or 30 amp breaker rating. Div. Groups C. • 11/4" throughfeed conduit hubs with 11/4"–1" reducers for ease of installation. internally flanged enclosure requires minimum installation area. I. and toggle operator – copperfree aluminum • Pushbuttons – type 6 / 6 nylon • Operating shafts – stainless steel Standard Finishes: • Copper-free aluminum – natural • Sheet steel – zinc electroplate with chromate finish • Stainless steel – natural Electrical Rating: • GFI.000 hour incandescent lamp) for easy and constant operational monitoring of unit. Div. III NEMA 3. D Cl. Groups F. covers. G Cl. • Accepts #14–#10 copper wire sizes for application flexibility. II.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 595 . • Steel mounting feet with electroplate finish for fast. maintenance-free service life. G Cl. Groups C. Milliamp Trip Cat. collars.

D Cl.12 Hours Material: SA .crouse-hinds. II. Groups E. heaters. Part I.DPST Minutes or Hours: M .2 Hours 4 . 250 VAC max. and other energy consuming loads in Class I and Class II hazardous areas Features: • Spring wound. 125 VAC max.Hours Time: Minutes: 5 . Divisions 1 & 2. 10A resistive 250 VAC max. 1 & 2.6 Hours 12 .30 Minutes 60 . lights. Section 18-100(a). 2 HP. Groups C. Applications: • Provides automatic shut-off for fans. Groups C.5" from front of switch to back of box.5 Minutes 15 . Groups E. F. Div. 7A Tungsten.Minutes H . mechanical timer switch • Copper-free aluminum covers 5C Certifications and Compliances: • • • • CSA certified per file LR5169 Class I. These bodies are to be ordered separately from the DSD-TS covers. 125 VAC max. III DSD-TS Series Timers For use with Eaton's Crouse-Hinds EDS/EDSC back boxes (single and two-gang) and EDSCM modular control device bodies (up to nine-gang maximum). 20A resistive 125 VAC max. Divisions 1 & 2. Electrical Ratings: • • • • • • 1 HP. G Cl.SPST 12 .5C Cl.15 Minutes 30 . I. Catalog Numbering Example: DSD TS 11 M Dimensions (in Inches): 15 SA Series: DSD-TS Poles: 11 .Aluminum Note: 596 www. Div. F. pumps.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Depth is 5.60 Minutes Hours: 2 .4 Hours 6 . Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business . 1 & 2. G Class III NOTE: Suitable for use in Zone 1 and Zone 2 classified areas (gas groups IIB and IIA) as per Canadian Electrical Code. 10A resistive 277 VAC max. D Class II.SPDT 21 .

com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 597 .crouse-hinds.6C Explosionproof Variable Frequency Drives Description Page No. Explosionproof VFDs . Division 1 & 2 ACE10 Series ACE20 Series see pages 599–603 see pages 605–609 6C www.Class I.

crouse-hinds.6C 6C 598 www.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business .

• • • • • • Oil and gas/refineries OEM skid builders Petrochemical Water/waste water Pharmaceutical Food and beverage manufacturing Certifications and Compliances: Applications: • For speed control of pumps. www. C. Washers and Springs – Stainless steel. separators. dig up roadways and sidewalks.along with the traditional VFD benefits of energy savings. It is designed to match the high requirements of pumps. Divisions 1 and 2. 7BCD Cl. These drives can be mounted next to the motor in the classified area. I. fans. natural • Internal Brackets – Stainless steel. Divisions 1 and 2. 4X. conveyors. C. epoxy painted Keypad – Stainless steel. C. D (UL) NEMA 3. 7BCD Raintight Wet locations • Operating Temperature Range -10°C to 50°C (14°F to 122°F) Standard Materials and Finishes: • • • • • • • • • • Body and Cover – Copper-free aluminum. compressors. chemical and mining ACE Series System Benefits: Simple. Groups B. compact AC drives *5HP and below listed for Group B. Div. natural Horsepower Ratings: Avoid Downtime with Real-Time Equipment and Process Data • Diagnostics help locate disturbances to the system and suggest remedies. allowing the solution to be rated Class I. natural Filters – Stainless steel. natural Disconnect – Stainless steel. natural Shroud – Copper-free aluminum. natural • Manifold and Intake – EDPM rubber. separators. Divisions 1 and 2. natural Window – Tempered soda lime glass Blower – Aluminum. D (cUL) Raintight Wet locations 6C Utilizes ABB ACS850 Series Drives The only explosionproof VFD solution utilizing a NEMA 7 classified enclosure Eaton's Crouse-Hinds Explosionproof VFDs are highly flexible AC drives designed specifically for hazardous area locations. 4X. fans. 1 & 2.crouse-hinds. Bolts. epoxy powder coated Operating Handle – Copper-free aluminum. Cost-Effective Installations • ACE Explosionproof VFDs are installed ‘on-machine’ inside the hazardous areas. and system diagnostics. D • cUL Classified Class I. natural Pre-filters – Stainless steel. mixers. allowing proactive maintenance decisions to be made • Available up to 60HP • Higher horsepower ratings coming soon VFD System Specifications: • ABB ACS850 Series low voltage. I. C. speed and torque control. 1 & 2. compressors. and mixers in the following process industries: Reduce stress on electrical system Reduce water hammer effects with soft start capability Lower speed/load on bearings and seals Reduce risk of system damage due to cavitation • UL Classified Class I. eliminating expensive. navigate around obstacles and hazards or build off-site control rooms in non-hazardous areas to house VFD clusters • Reflected Wave Syndrome is eliminated due to short motor cable runs Additional VFD Benefits: Reduce Energy Costs Through Improved Process Control • Fine speed and torque control optimizes system performance and reduces energy consumption Reduce Operation and Installation Costs • • • • 6C This Eaton's Crouse-Hinds innovative product features the first ever NEMA 7 enclosure with active cooling.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 599 . complicated installations • There is no need to run long lines of conduit and motor cable. Groups B*. Div. and other process equipment • Designed to meet the high reliability and safety requirements of process industries such as oil and gas. epoxy painted Cover Hinges. providing significant installation cost savings . Groups B*.ACE10 Series Explosionproof Variable Frequency Drives Cl. D • Standards UL 1203 • Environmental Ratings NEMA 3. Groups B.

1 & 2. I. 1 & 2.6C ACE10 Series Explosionproof Variable Frequency Drives Cl. Groups B*. 7BCD Cl.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business . Groups B. C. Div. Div.crouse-hinds. D (UL) NEMA 3. 4X. D (cUL) Raintight Wet locations Utilizes ABB ACS850 Series Drives System Design 6C Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) in explosionproof enclosure allows installation in classified area. Fused disconnect. C. providing significant installation savings. 600 www. *5HP and below listed for Group B. I. Internal and external grounding lugs.

ensuring reliable and consistent airflow. Heavy duty blower† creates airflow through the enclosure. Explosionproof keypad allows operation of VFD interface module without opening the enclosure door. Pre-filter screens can be easily removed and cleaned without shutting down operations. Div. 1 & 2. I. C. 6C Stainless steel hinges provide convenient and easy access to enclosure interior. Pre-filter screens† (not shown) eliminate clogging of the primary filters.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 601 . allowing VFD to operate in ambient temperatures up to 50ºC. cooling the VFD and eliminating risk of overheating. captive. Explosionproof pilot lights provide run. and pre-filter screens not included with units containing 1. †Heavy duty blower.0 horsepower VFDs. 4X.crouse-hinds. Filters† in top and bottom of enclosure allow airflow into and out of the enclosure. Stainless steel. and alarm indication. www.ACE10 Series Explosionproof Variable Frequency Drives Cl. Div. D (cUL) Raintight Wet Locations 6C Utilizes ABB ACS850 Series Drives Shroud† covering top filters maintains NEMA 4X rating. *5HP and below listed for Group B.5 to 5. C. triple lead quick release spring loaded bolts install faster and provide clear indication that the cover bolts are fully retracted from the body. Enclosure epoxy painted for superior corrosion resistance. 7BCD Cl. D (UL) NEMA 3. shroud. I. Explosionproof window allows for viewing of the VFD interface module LCD screen. filters. Groups B*. 1 & 2. Groups B. stop.

1 4.0 36. rounded up to 90) Ethernet Communications ACE Series Recommended Distributor Stock List: Description Cat.0 3.0 (1. Rating 30 J J J J J J 1 1 1 1 1 1 2. provisions must be made to account for heat generation to ensure proper operation of the device.0 (7.0 737 737 847 903 T4A T4A T4A T4A 100 J J J 2 2 2 55.0 81.0 26.0 1217 1397 1577 T4A T4A T4A †De-rating may be required to account for specific environmental conditions (high ambient temperature. C. finger.0 30. manifold.5) 10.0 20. Div. 1 & 2.0 44. Groups B*. # ACE10 ACE10 ACE10 ACE10 ACE10 ACE10 1 2 3 5 7 10 1.0) 50.0) (18.0 30.8 8.0 65. etc).0) 7. 7BCD Cl.0 35.0 (45.0) Max. 1 & 2.0 (37.0 58.5 (1.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business . I.) Filter assembly (1 pc. D (UL) NEMA 3.0 16.5) ACE10 ACE10 ACE10 ACE10 15 20 25 30 15.0 ACE10 40 ACE10 50 ACE10 60 (11. and hardware (1 pc.2 15.5) 3.crouse-hinds. 4X. D (cUL) Raintight Wet Locations Utilizes ABB ACS850 Series Drives Ordering Information: Step 1 – Select VFD Horsepower Rating Nominal Horsepower (KW) 6C Cat.6 106 112 132 178 606 674 T6 T6 T6 T6 T4A T4A 60 J J J J 2 2 2 2 20. Disconnect Disconnect Rating Fuse Enclosure (Amps) Type Size Input Rating (Amps) Max. Groups B. # Pre-filter and hardware (1 pc.0 72.0 (30.5) (22. C.0 30.0 (3.) ACE ACE ACE ACE ACE KIT KIT KIT KIT KIT 1 2 3 4 5 *5HP and below listed for Group B. I. Consult factory for de-rating information.0 3.0 12. 602 www.) Blower. Div.ACE10 Series Explosionproof Variable Frequency Drives 6C Cl.0 6.) Pushbutton operator.6 12. and hardware (1 pc.0) 40.5 (5.6 4.1) 2.0) 60.0 25.3 3.0 23. Step 2 – Add Desired Options Description add suffix Communication Modules Profibus Devicenet CAN Open Modbus Ethernet CP CD CC CM CE Potentiometer in Cover AB 800H PT Step 3 – Add Current Rating for Eaton's Bussmann Fuses FJ Fuse Type J Current Rating Note: Add 5 Amps to your requirements to account for cooling system blower and round up to the nearest increment of 5 Catalog Number Example: Options ACE10 60 CE ABB VFD With 60 HP Rating PT FJ90 Potentiometer Fuse (81A requirement + 5A for blower.0 (2.0 82. Output Rating (Amps)† Power Loss (Watts)‡ Temp.) Temperature controller (1 pc. ‡When not installed in a well ventilated environment. altitude.2) 5.0) (15.

2] 17.70 [93.25 [82.0] 21.42 [112.25 [438.15 [638.25 [717.09 [230.ACE10 Series Explosionproof Variable Frequency Drives 6C Cl.08 [383.7] 15.1] 5/8" BOLT (4 PLACES) 9.38 [238.3] 17.2] 4.2] 9. Groups B*. Div.5] 16.0 Horsepower VFDs) *5HP and below listed for Group B.0] 15.25 [387.9] 21.40 [111.50 [88.00 [203.4] 5/8" BOLT (4 PLACES) 5.2] 5.50 [12.08 [281. D (UL) NEMA 3.6] 44.04 [432.8] 15. 4X. Groups B.50 [12.85 [148.3] 22.0 horsepower VFDs do not require pre-filter screens.1] 1" NPT 1-1/2" NPT (2 PLACES) Enclosure Size 1 (1.30 [414.88 [555. I.00 [228.crouse-hinds.48 [240. www.59 [395. 8.5] 1" NPT 2" NPT (2 PLACES) Enclosure Size 2 (15.9] 9.02 [559. 7BCD Cl.6] 11.8] 4.08 [637. Div.83 [554.0] 6C 9.9] 6.98 [812.3] Pre-filter Screen .70 [93.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 603 .0 Horsepower VFDs) 25. D (cUL) Raintight Wet locations Utilizes ABB ACS850 Series Drives Dimensions In Inches: 25.5 to 10.9] 3.7] 3. C. 1 & 2.00 [203.0 to 60. 1 & 2. C.6] 3. I.75 [171.9] Note: Units containing 1.31 [1125.2] 9.00 [127.9] 28.5] 31.2] Pre-filter Screens 8.7] .5 to 5.22 [234.7] 3.

crouse-hinds.6C 6C 604 www.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business .

natural • Manifold and Intake – EDPM rubber. epoxy painted Window – Tempered soda lime glass Blower – Aluminum. epoxy powder coated Operating Handle – Copper-free aluminum. conveyors.crouse-hinds. complicated installations • There is no need to run long lines of conduit and motor cable. speed and torque control. compressors. allowing proactive maintenance decisions to be made VFD System Specifications: • Allen-Bradley® PowerFlex 700® Series low voltage.Cl. Div. natural Shroud – Copper-free aluminum. Groups B*. allowing the solution to be rated Class I. natural Horsepower Ratings: Avoid Downtime with Real-Time Equipment and Process Data • Available up to 50HP • Higher horsepower ratings coming soon • Diagnostics help locate disturbances to the system and suggest remedies. compact AC drives *5HP and below listed for Group B. fans. fans. eliminating expensive. 1 & 2. C. D (cUL) Raintight Wet locations ACE20 Series Explosionproof Variable Frequency Drives 6C Utilizes Allen-Bradley® PowerFlex 700® Series Drives The only explosionproof VFD solution utilizing a NEMA 7 classified enclosure Eaton's Crouse-Hinds Explosionproof VFDs are highly flexible AC drives designed specifically for hazardous area locations. C. natural • Internal Brackets – Stainless steel. and mining ACE Series System Benefits: Simple. It is designed to match the high requirements of pumps. Washers and Springs – Stainless steel. Groups B. 4X. epoxy painted Cover Hinges. natural Disconnect – Stainless steel. I. chemical. Divisions 1 and 2. navigate around obstacles and hazards or build off-site control rooms in non-hazardous areas to house VFD clusters • Reflected Wave Syndrome is eliminated due to short motor cable runs Additional VFD Benefits: Reduce Energy Costs Through Improved Process Control • Fine speed and torque control optimizes system performance and reduces energy consumption Reduce Operation and Maintenance Costs • • • • Reduce stress on electrical system Reduce water hammer effects with soft start capability Lower speed/load on bearings and seals Reduce risk of system damage due to cavitation • UL Classified Class I. compressors. Divisions 1 and 2. Groups B. dig up roadways and sidewalks. separators. Cost-Effective Installations • ACE Explosionproof VFDs are installed ‘on-machine’ inside the hazardous areas. C. Div. and system diagnostics. 7BCD NEMA 3X rating with PB23 or RR3 options added Raintight Wet locations • Operating Temperature Range 0°C to 50°C (32°F to 122°F) Standard Materials and Finishes: • • • • • • • • • Body and Cover – Copper-free aluminum. and mixers in the following process industries: • Oil and gas/refineries • OEM skid builders • Petrochemical • Water/waste water • Pharmaceutical • Food and beverage manufacturing Certifications and Compliances: Applications: • For speed control of pumps. I. Groups B*. separators. www. 6C This Eaton's Crouse-Hinds innovative product features the first ever NEMA 7 enclosure with active cooling. Bolts. These drives can be mounted next to the motor in the classified area. 1 & 2. Divisions 1 and 2. mixers. 4X.along with the traditional VFD benefits of energy savings. and other process equipment • Designed to meet the high reliability and safety requirements of process industries such as oil and gas. natural Pre-filters – Stainless steel.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 605 . D • Standards UL1203 • Environmental Ratings NEMA 3. 7BCD Cl. providing significant installation cost savings . D (UL) NEMA 3. natural Filters – Stainless steel. C. D • cUL Classified Class I.

C. 606 www. 1 & 2. I.crouse-hinds. Div. Groups B. 4X. I.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business . Internal & External Grounding Lugs Fused Disconnect *5HP and below listed for Group B. C. 7BCD Cl. Div. providing significant installation savings. 1 & 2.6C ACE20 Series Explosionproof Variable Frequency Drives Cl. D (UL) NEMA 3. Groups B*. D (cUL) Raintight Wet locations Utilizes Allen-Bradley® PowerFlex 700® Series Drives 6C Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) in explosionproof enclosure allows installation in classified area.

filters. www. C.0 horsepower VFDs.5 to 5. * Heavy duty blower. shroud. Optional potentiometer. 6C Explosionproof window allows for viewing of the VFD interface module LCD screen. Stainless steel hinges provide convenient and easy access to enclosure interior. I. Wireless Interface Module Option Filters* in top and bottom of enclosure allow airflow into and out of the enclosure. Groups B. 1 & 2. Div. pushbuttons and selector switches Enclosure epoxy painted for superior corrosion resistance. Explosionproof pilot lights provide run. ensuring reliable and consistent airflow. D (UL) NEMA 3.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 607 . 1 & 2. and pre-filter screens not included with units containing 1. D (cUL) Raintight Wet locations ACE20 Series Explosionproof Variable Frequency Drives 6C Utilizes Allen-Bradley® PowerFlex 700® Series Drives Stainless steel. Heavy duty blower* creates airflow through the enclosure. Groups B*. stop and fault indication. 7BCD Cl. I. allowing VFD to operate in ambient temperatures up to 50ºC.crouse-hinds.Cl. Pre-filter screens* eliminate clogging of the primary filters. 4X. Shroud* covering top filters maintains NEMA 4X rating. *5HP and below listed for Group B. captive. Pre-filter screens can be easily removed and cleaned without shutting down operations. C. cooling the VFD and eliminating risk of overheating. Div. triple lead quick release spring loaded bolts install faster and provide clear indication that the cover bolts are fully retracted from the body.

0 1010 1117 T4A T4A Max. Catalog Number Example: Communication Module & Options ACE20 50 Allen-Bradley® VFD With 50 HP Rating CE PT FJ90 Potentiometer Fuse (81A requirement + 5A for blower. manifold.8 31.7 11. etc.9 6.5 10 30 ACE20 ACE20 ACE20 ACE20 15 20 25 30 15 20 25 30 60 J ACE20 40 ACE20 50 40 50 100 J Cat.5 12.0 27. 1 & 2.) Filter assembly (1 pc. # ACE KIT ACE KIT ACE KIT ACE KIT Pre-filter and hardware (1 pc. altitude. C.6 30 J 1 3. Consult factory for de-rating information.) Blower.0 22.0 Nominal Horsepower (KW) 1 2 3 5 1 2 3 5 J 2 VFD Manufacturer Part # 20BD027A0AYNANC0 20BD027A0AYNANC0 20BD065A0AYNANC0 Above data is for a 480V drive. D (cUL) Raintight Wet locations Utilizes Allen-Bradley® PowerFlex 700® Series Drives Ordering Information: Step 1 – Select VFD Horsepower Rating Power Loss (Watts)†† 63 76 93 164 Temp. For 600V drive.4 5. Div. †De-rating may be required to account for specific environmental conditions (high ambient temperature.6C ACE20 Series Explosionproof Variable Frequency Drives Cl.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business .0 14. 7BCD Cl.0 34. rounded up to 90) Ethernet Communications ACE Series Recommended Distributor Stock List: Description Cat.2 36.0 594 618 726 794 841 859 T4A T4A T4A T4A T4A T4A 47. ††When not installed in a well ventilated environment.0 8.9 24.5 19.0 40. 4X. provisions must be made to account for heat generation to ensure proper operation of the device. I. 608 www. # ACE20 ACE20 ACE20 ACE20 6C Max. and hardware (1 pc.9 ACE20 7 ACE20 10 7. Div.). D (UL) NEMA 3. Output Rating (Amps)† 2.) 1 2 3 5 *5HP and below listed for Group B. Groups B*. Groups B.) Temperature controller (1 pc.0 65. I. Rating T6 T6 T6 T6 9. please consult factory.crouse-hinds.1 3.6 2. 1 & 2. Input Disconnect Disconnect Enclosure Rating Rating (Amps) Fuse Type Size (Amps) 1.7 59. C. Step 3 – Add Current Rating for Eaton's Bussmann Fuses Step 2 – Add Desired Options Description Add Suffix Communication Modules Profibus Devicenet CAN Open Modbus Ethernet Wireless CP CD CC CM CE WL Options Potentiometer Hand-Off-Auto Switch‡ Pushbutton Start-Stop‡ 600 VAC VFD PT RR3 PB23 Consult Factory FJ Current Rating Note: Add 5 Amps to your requirements to account for cooling system blower and round up to the nearest increment of 5 Fuse Type J ‡RR3 and PB23 cannot be ordered together.6 52.

6 6.6 21.7 9.6 4.25 88.20 215. 4X. Div.0 Horsepower VFDs) 638.98 248. Groups B.5 11.3 46.30 2" NPT (2 PLACES) 148.4 15.1 20. Div. I.7 . 1 & 2.4 4.0 Horsepower VFDs) *5HP and below listed for Group B.50 101.8 3. C.7 4.8 8. 1 & 2.6 28.88 125.95 1176.79 6C 487.8 25.0 to 5.00 106.2 31.50 93.69 5/8" BOLT (4 PLACES) Pre-filter Screens & Filters Enclosure Size 2 (7.5 6.50 532. D (UL) NEMA 3.17 5/8" BOLT (4 PLACES) 106.31 203.85 398.5 9. www.20 438.69 128 5.0 horsepower VFDs do not require filters.00 281.7 . I.crouse-hinds. C.75 Note: Units containing 1.7 5.6 21. 12. D (cUL) Raintight Wet locations ACE20 Series Explosionproof Variable Frequency Drives 6C Utilizes Allen-Bradley® PowerFlex 700® Series Drives Dimensions In Inches: 632 24.00 717.50 1" NPT 1-1/2" NPT (2 PLACES) Enclosure Size 1 (1.9 3.5 4.5 to 50. 7BCD Cl.0 to 5.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 609 .15 Filters & Shrouds 555.2 8.95 12.88 398.2 17.1 16.Cl.7 19.88 555.08 1" NPT 414.04 812.25 156.70 228. Groups B*.19 171.4 15.

com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business .6C 6C 610 www.crouse-hinds.

Specialty Products see pages 612–613 Switch Racks General Information Bus Duct Assemblies Selection Guide see pages 614–617 see pages 618–619 see pages 620–622 7C www.Engineered Solutions Hazardous and Non-hazardous 7C Description Page No.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 611 .crouse-hinds.

labor savings. 9EFG. Groups A. 4X. 7BCD. 9EFG. distribution. protection. plugs. Fill out the request form on the following page to receive a custom quote for your inquiry. pre-terminated cables. D Cl. and glands Capabilities: 7C • Product selection and application-specific support. Div. 1 & 2.control. including recommendations for material selection. 3R. 612 www. C. painting. 12 Integrated Solutions: • Enclosed metering and instrumentation • Component populated enclosures • Custom machining. fittings.crouse-hinds. 7BCD. F. Ease of Installation Solutions: Portable Solutions: • Rack assemblies . III NEMA 3. Groups A. C. Groups E. integrated packages. F. G Class III • NEMA: 3. B. ease of maintenance. D Class II. B. II. 12 Engineered Solutions Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight Applications: Labor Saving Solutions: • Custom engineered solutions for a wide variety of industrial and commercial applications • Hazardous and non-hazardous products engineered to application-specific designs and customer requirements • Product sub-assemblies and sub-systems • Pre-fixtured products. Div. 1 & 2. Groups E. 4. and protection • Project bid support • Engineering design services • Custom product design • Value-add packages for: ease of installation. 4X. Divisions 1 & 2. I.7C Cl. and portable products Certifications and Compliances*: • NEC: Class I. and legend • Installed fittings and seals *Ratings may not be available or relevant for every proposal. monitoring • Skid assemblies • Pre-wired products • • • • Power distribution Lighting products Plugs Protection equipment Interested in a custom engineered product? Contact your local Eaton's Crouse-Hinds sales representative to see how we can design a solution for you.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business . 4. G Cl. Divisions 1 & 2. ratings.

I. 7BCD. 3W. Groups A. C. F. B. CONTACT: E-mail: crouse. specifications. 1 & 2. C. G Width _____________ Depth _____________ C Height _______________ D Service System: (i. including: sketches.customerctr@cooperindustries. II. bill of materials. 480V.crouse-hinds. drawings. 4X.com Phone: (866) 764-5454 www. 60 Hz) Div. 12 Request a Quote Customer: ______________________________________ Project: ________________________________________ Prepared By: ____________________________________ Bid Quotation For: Estimate/Budget Quotation Required By (Date): ______________________ 7C Engineering Firm: ________________________________ Location: _______________________________________ Date: __________________________________________ Immediate Buy Material Required By (Date): _______________________ Is a current copy of plant STDS/SPECS available to Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds? ____________________________________ Dimension Restrictions: HAZARDOUS . 9EFG. 1 & 2.Circle all that apply: Class I Div. 4. Div. G Cl. D Cl. etc.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 613 7C Area Classification: . 3PH. 1 Div.Engineered Solutions Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight Cl.e. Groups E. 2 Groups B. 2 E F G 3R 4 4X ____ VOLT ____ PH ____ W ____ HZ ____ AMP Class III NON-HAZARDOUS Ordinary Locations NEMA Rating Products Involved (Select all that apply): Control & Apparatus Fittings & Glands Lighting Plugs & Receptacles Commercial Products Other Description: _______________________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________________________________ Please attach any supporting documentation to this form. III NEMA 3. D B Class II Div. Div. F. single line diagrams. 1 Groups E.

4X (optional). such as petroleum refineries. D Cl. EPC. chemical and petrochemical plants. such as coal handling facilities. Div. Division 2. Groups E. and assembly and scheduling problems at job site • Wiring is simple. I. G Cl. NMG. Groups F. feeders are connected to the main bus and connections made from starters motors. EPL. 12 Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight 7C Applications: Free-standing switch rack assemblies are used: • To provide a complete motor control center in one integrated package • Outdoors and indoors • In damp. and food preparation areas • In areas made hazardous due to the presence of flammable vapors or gases. After switch rack is in place. Div. bolted and welded • Components – see sections A & C for material CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business . and D2L enclosures featuring ready access to starters and breakers for inspection and maintenance • Custom built racks to meet your exact requirements are an Eaton's CrouseHinds specialty. No other field wiring is necessary • Maintenance time and costs are reduced by having controls grouped. Groups F. and certain food process industries Features: • Complete factory assembled and wired switch racks • Pre-drilled bus boxes allow for quick and easy changing or adding of components • Complete assembly covered under one order. Div. 4X. 1. grain processing and handling plants. G Class III • NEMA: 3. lumber mills. Groups E. C. eliminates engineering costs. Divisions 1 & 2. D2D. EXD. 9EFG. pipeline compressor stations. wet or corrosive locations such as sewage treatment plants. 1 & 2. III NEMA 3. large or small (38' length max) 614 www.crouse-hinds. 9EFG. II. G Class II. II. NCB. D2PB. D (Group B optional) Class II. Division 1. FLB. Groups C. marine installations. both onshore and offshore • In areas where hazardous dusts are present. Complete quotations will be supplied for any job.7C Switch Rack Assemblies Cl. F. Groups B. F. 2. 7B (optional) CD. 7BCD. G Cl. gas gathering plants. and drilling rigs. NMC. 12 Standard Materials: Standard Finishes: • Rack frame – hot dip galvanized steel or natural aluminum • Components – see sections A & C for finishes Options: • Rack frame finish – corrosion resistant primer with air dry epoxy • Options listed for individual components can be incorporated in complete switch racks • Rack frames – structural steel or aluminum channel members. Work is performed in one location instead of moving from one control to another in various locations • Major components are standard EBM.com US: 1-866-764-5454 Certifications and Compliances: • NEC: Class I. additional costs of placing separate orders with several vendors for various components.

and mounting hardware shall be shipped unassembled for quick assembly at the job site. and 2foot overhang. Load conduit or cable will leave rack either below or above. • Mounting feet shall be anchored at the job site with 1-inch diameter bolts. Div. 4X. Roofing material shall be corrugated aluminum. 1 & 2. • All hazardous area enclosures for motor starters. Div. Manufacturer will supply drawings and material for complete field assembly of canopy. II. main bus. G Cl. • All other standard hazardous area enclosures shall be UL listed or UL classified. assembled and fabricated from standard rolled structural steel or aluminum shapes. Finish: • Rack frame shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication or natural aluminum. Eaton's Crouse-Hinds type WJB. Width of such feet for single-sided racks shall be 41 inches. (Specific section dimensions to be determined by the manufacturer. shall be rigid. or replacing. • End mounting feet will be braced (welded) to the upright with 6" T member.) • Racks longer than 20 feet will be supplied as bolt-together sections. • Vertical risers will be 6" I-beam and horizontal members shall be 6-inch channel.crouse-hinds. Groups B. Cable bus will be wired to terminal blocks enclosed in cast. Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight • A pressure-type grounding lug with appropriate wire capacity will be provided at each end of frame. III NEMA 3. II. and testing of mechanical functions of components. C. 2. Cable bus will be wired to terminal blocks enclosed in cast. Eaton's Crouse-Hinds switch rack installed in a fuel storage area. (Specific dimensions to be determined by the manufacturer. and lighting fixtures shall be made and supplied by the manufacturer. Such junction boxes for incoming power and distribution wiring shall be provided at either the top or bottom of the rack. Div. D Cl. • All explosionproof threaded enclosures for combination starters. Enclosures shall be connected by rigid conduit with conduit seals installed in accordance with the NEC. state and local standards as designated by the purchaser. Such junction boxes for incoming power and distribution wiring shall be provided at either the top or bottom of the rack. combination motor starters. • Maximum horizontal spacing between mounting legs shall not exceed 6 feet. www. Class I. purchase/manufacturer of components. I. Enclosures shall be connected by rigid conduit with conduit seals installed as required by the NEC. Eaton's Crouse-Hinds type EJB. • Mounting feet shall be 6-inch channel. receptacles. circuit breakers. any fully-assembled rack or rack component. Manufacturer shall provide conduit layouts. copper-free aluminum. motor circuit protectors. 9EFG. panelboards. cross channels. Bus Duct in Lieu of Junction Boxes (Optional): • Cable bus will be wired to a weathertight bus duct provided at the top or bottom of the rack. 1. motor circuit protectors. free-standing structures. Canopy roof trusses. fittings.Switch Rack Assemblies Cl. Groups F. Manufacturer shall provide conduit layouts. copper-free aluminum weathertight junction boxes. Division 1: • Main bus material shall be copper only and capable of withstanding up to 65K amps fault current. either single or double face as required. • Manufacturer shall retain permanent records of all motor control racks and shall have the capability of duplicating. National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA). complete circuit continuity testing. G Cl.) Class I. F. 7BCD. • Manufacturer to assume responsibility for construction.or double-pitched canopy shall have minimum 15-degree pitch with a minimum 7'6" ground clearance. Canopy (Optional): • Single. Anchor bolts and mounting pads will be the responsibility of the user. Load conduit or cable will leave rack either below or above. 12 Construction: Rack Frame Design: Main Bus Equipment: General: Structure: • All construction to be in accordance with current National Electrical Code® (NEC). • Switch rack. explosionproof junction boxes. Racks shall be factorywelded. circuit breakers.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 615 7C Grounding: 7C . Groups E. and starters shall be UL classified. instrument enclosures. roof material. All holes in structure shall be provided except for roof mounting holes which will be drilled in the field. Division 2: • Main bus material shall be copper only and capable of withstanding up to 65K amps fault current.

Spring loading shall give visual indication that the bolts are free of the body when the cover is being opened. These openings shall be arranged two at the top and two at the bottom and shall be sized for power and control requirements. • Cover bolts shall be hex head stainless steel without screwdriver slots. • Threaded construction enclosures shall be Eaton's Crouse-Hinds type EPC. 3R and 4) areas. • The mounting bracket shall provide a three-point suspension system for quick installation and adjustment. copper-free aluminum hinges that shall allow the cover to swing away from the body when opened and shall permit unobstructed working space for maintenance. Most importantly. classified for use in Class I. shall be padlockable in either the "ON" or "OFF" position with up to three padlocks. with adjustable. All conduit entrances shall be located the same distance from the enclosure mounting surface to facilitate conduit run layout and/or stub up construction. Types: • Ground joint bolted cover enclosure shall be Eaton's Crouse-Hinds type EBM. Divisions 1 and 2. Divisions 1 and 2 and Class III hazardous locations and shall also be suitable for Type 3.) • All conduit entrances shall be furnished with removable copper-free aluminum reducers. plugged 1" entrance for a control conduit shall be provided at the bottom of the enclosure. Power conduit entrances shall be located 1 (or 2) each on (or equally spaced from) the enclosure vertical centerline at top and bottom. (Some enclosures can also be provided with a plugged 1" entrance for control conduit at the top. 3R and 4) areas. Additionally these hinges shall allow minimum enclosure-to-enclosure spacing with little interference between an open cover and an adjacent enclosure. D. rain or sleet. Multiple-start straight buttress threads between the covers and the body shall ensure quick access to the interior in less than two full turns of the covers. corrosion-resistant.com US: 1-866-764-5454 • All enclosures shall be fitted. • The external circuit breaker operating handle affixed to a stainless steel shaft. • Conduit entrances shall have integral wire pulling bushings and conduit stops. A single. (To be field poured). motor circuit protectors and combination or acrossthe-line motor starters shall be enclosed in quick-opening enclosures (Eaton's Crouse-Hinds types EBM or EPC). Circuit breaker mechanisms shall be trip-free of the circuit breaker itself to allow the circuit breaker to open under overload conditions even if it is locked in the "ON" position. visual confirmation of the circuit breaker status. Enclosures with hinges fabricated from steel or aluminum stampings shall not be permitted. They shall be captive to the cover and stainless steel spring loaded to indicate the fully unthreaded position. 3R and/or Type 4 (NEMA 3. These handles shall operate the internal mechanisms via stainless steel. cast copper-free aluminum circuit breaker and motor starter overload reset operating handles located on the right side of the enclosure. extended. • Circuit breaker handles shall be padlockable in either the "OFF" or "ON" position. Groups E. • Covers shall be hinged on the left side and. tapped and plugged conduit entrances suitably sized for the electrical application. F. bolts and hardware shall be stainless steel. Groups E. adjustment or replacement of the internal apparatus. Groups C. Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business . Underwriters Laboratories Inc. CAN: 1-800-265-0502 • Motor starter overload reset operating mechanisms shall be field adjustable. when closed. Divisions 1 and 2. gasketed shafts and bearings through the side wall of the body. The cover flange ground joint shall have an integeral gasket to prevent the entry of windblown dust. • All enclosures shall be cast of a corrosion-resistant copper-free aluminum alloy (less than 0. adjustment and maintenance. A system of stops shall prevent overtightening and thread seizing. Underwriters Laboratories. • Adjustable circuit breaker handle stops shall be provided to ensure full operation of the circuit breaker and to prevent handle overthrow that could damage the circuit breaker toggle. 616 www. Class II. enclosure inside dimensions shall conform to the wire bending space requirements of the National Electrical code NFPA70 paragraph 373-6. All hardware used to mount the enclosures shall be stainless steel. Inc.crouse-hinds. • All exposed screws. • All enclosures shall be cast of a corrosion-resistant copper-free aluminum alloy (less than 0. • All enclosures shall be provided with drilled. • Female threads on the top cover with male threads on the bottom cover shall ensure inherent water and rain shedding. Enclosures shall be connected to the main bus via conduit seals. Correct circuit breaker and overload reset operation shall be visually confirmed with the cover open. shall be affixed top the body by multiple lead thread bolts to promote quick opening and closing of the enclosure. and shall be trip-free of the circuit breaker itself. Enclosures with flat covers. F. A system of locks shall prevent covers from loosening due to external vibration. General: • All enclosures shall be bolted to the horizontal frame members on either the front or back or both front and back.7C Switch Rack Assemblies 7C Motor Control Components: Explosionproof Quick Opening Enclosures: • All circuit breakers. Class II.4% copper) and shall be of a three section design. Groups C. 3R and/or Type 4 (NEMA 3. internal flanges or those not conforming to NFPA70 paragraph 373-6 are not permitted. An attached indicating plate shall give clear. as standard. G. G Divisions 1 and 2 and Class III hazardous locations and shall also be suitable for Type 3. each with integral wire pulling bushing.4% copper) and shall be of a semi clamshell design with external flange to promote ease of apparatus installation. • All enclosures shall have rugged. to promote the use of a socket or wrench for proper tightening. classified for use in Class I. D.

2 or 3 pole. two-pole. 100 amp maximum branch trip rating.000 AIC. lighting panelboard shall be type D2PB factorysealed. (Eaton's Crouse-Hinds Condulet EYD drains to be specified as required. two-pole. Outlet Boxes. Device Boxes: • Conduit boxes. main breaker ranging to 225 amp.crouse-hinds. 75°C minimum rating. 7C NEMA 4X Option: • All bus boxes. All incoming and outgoing rack conduit entrances shall include conduit seals as required by the hazardous location specified. 10. 120 / 240 volt panelboards and be provided with single-pole or two-pole factory sealed circuit breakers with 15. and device boxes shall be Eaton's Crouse-Hinds Condulet® fittings. 120 / 240 volt panelboards and be provided with single-pole. Similarly. Fittings: • All fittings shall be made and provided by the manufacturer. Seals: • Seals will be standard Eaton's CrouseHinds type Condulet EYS. All interconnections between components shall be done by the manufacturer with galvanized rigid conduit. main breaker rating to 225 amp. or three-pole branch circuit breakers with up to 100 amp trip rating. • Wiring shall be sized in accordance with the NEC requirements. Seals and unions will be provided for each incoming and outgoing conduit as required. Division 2: • Lighting panelboard shall be Eaton's Crouse-Hinds type D2L factory-sealed. up to 600 volt are provided with single-pole. Drawings: • Standard drawings supplied for customer approval shall include complete rack wiring diagram. nominal weight of the rack. Wiring: • Standard wire shall be copper only. 20 or 30 amp trip ratings and maximum 10. Interconnecting conduits to be provided with conduit seals as required.000 AIC. • Control wire shall be 14AWG minimum. • No power wire less than 12AWG shall be used. UL listed. 240 volt maximum. Breathers and Drains: • Breathers and drains shall be Eaton's Crouse-Hinds ECD. or three-pole branch circuit breakers with up to 100 amp trip ratings. 7 strands. 100 amp maximum branch trip rating. THW minimum. 600 volt. www. factory-sealed EXD or EPL as specified and shall meet the following electrical ratings: EPL – 1. outlet boxes. Class I.) Unions: • Unions will be Eaton's Crouse-Hinds UNY.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 617 . control enclosures and lighting panelboards will be made of KRYDON® material to meet NEMA 4X requirements.Switch Rack Assemblies Lighting Panelboards: Conduit Boxes. Division 1: • Panelboards shall be Eaton's CrouseHinds type. EXD – 1. 2 or 3 pole. 600 volt maximum. 7C Class I. component data. Power panelboards type D2D factory-sealed. and overall rack dimensions. and conduit fittings as required to meet the hazardous classification. Such seals will be provided by the manufacturer and will not be filled where field wiring is to be introduced.

three-phase. Stainless steel hardware throughout. Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business .sheet aluminum. NEMA 3R. 3 or 4 wire. • Bus ducts or termination boxes provide a means of tapping feeder circuits for power distribution on outdoor switchrack assemblies or indoor wall-mounted applications. silver plated and/or insulated – optional per customer request).7C NEMA 3R Up to 600 Volts Bus Duct (Termination Box) Assemblies Applications: Features: • Eaton's Crouse-Hinds is now offering NEMA 3R. Solid copper bus bars (tin. External flange on bus duct enclosure and lip on covers prevents water leakage and allows covers to hang freely for ease of installation and maintenance. Space heaters – optional per customer request. Chorosulfonated polyethlene (Hypalon®) gasket material at all bus box section joints. 3 degree pitch at top. on all flush mounted bottom entry designs. 400 Amp or 600 Amp @ 25KAIC or 50KAIC. New applications may include on-site construction of switchracks or indoor feeder distribution points due to space confinements making local installation more practical. • • • • • • • 7C • • • • • • • • • • • • 618 www. Pre-drilled copper bars (when specified by customer). Two hole compression lugs at all power phase connectors attatched with stainless steel hardware. UL Listed Bus Duct (Termination Box) Assemblies as standard product. Conduit entries for Myers hubs – optional per customer request. All welded construction .com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 UL Listed. Bus bar sizing and bracing complies to UL857 requirements. Solid copper ground bar – standard.crouse-hinds. One (1) drain is standard per bus duct section (typical 4 foot sections). Incoming main lugs – supplied size and location specified with customer. for water run-off. sheet steel (galvanized). • Typical application is primarily for bus replacements on existing switchrack installations. 400Amp or 600Amp service with short circuit ratings of 25K or 50K. covers and end plates. Standoff (Glastic) insulators molded of (UL) recognized flameresistant fiberglass-reinforced thermoset polyester molding compound. or stainless steel. Up to 600V. Maximum voltage rating 600V.

com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 619 .crouse-hinds. www. contact Eaton's Crouse-Hinds Customer Service at 866-764-5454 or fax to 315-477-5179.Bus Duct (Termination Box) Catalog Numbering System 7C 7C For pricing and lead times.

G Cl. II. Groups E. Div. G Cl. Groups F. Div. 7BCD. 1. I. 2.crouse-hinds. C. III NEMA 3. 1 & 2. 12 620 www. Div.7C Switch Rack Assemblies 7C Selection Guide Cl. Groups B. F. 4X. II. 9EFG. D Cl.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight .

12 Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight 7C 7C ‡ Not available with D2PB panelboards. II. Div. F. III NEMA 3. Groups B. C. Groups E. 7BCD. 1 & 2. www. 1.Switch Rack Assemblies Selection Guide Cl. 2.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business 621 . Div. Div. I. G Cl. Groups F. G Cl.crouse-hinds. II. 4X. 9EFG. D Cl.

Groups B. 7BCD. I. D Cl. 9EFG. G Cl. Groups E. C. III NEMA 3. Div. Div. Div. II. F.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2013 Eaton’s Crouse-Hinds Business Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight . G Cl.crouse-hinds. 1. 12 622 www.7C Switch Rack Assemblies 7C Selection Guide Cl. Groups F. II. 2. 1 & 2. 4X.